Home

Quantar RSS Instruction Manual 6881085E35-AG

1. RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE siete Inpede Software IC Software E Software IC Software REELS Part Numbers Version Part Numbers Version SCM SCM SC_020_10_101 SCM SCM IR_020_10_599 R10 12 00 R10 13 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 10 025 573 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 10 025 App Sftwr 509 10300010101 Boot 2 020 10 022 App Sftwr 509 104000010599 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 5095104000010816 0135 5095104000010816 App Sftwr 509500100010025 App Sftwr 509500100010025 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM 5 020 12 008 SCM SCM IR 020 12 508 R12 01 00 R12 01 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 12 003 523 0 P651 0180706 51 WL WL 020 12 003 App Sftw 509 10300012008 B2 020 10 022 and App Sftwr 509 104000012508 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 009 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 009 WL SZ4 1 U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 5095104000010816 0135 5095104000010816 App Sftwr 509500100012003 App Sftwr 509500100012003 EXC 5093104000009009 5093104000009009 SCM SCM SC_020_12_021 SCM SCM IR_020_12_521 R12 02 00 R12 02 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL
2. 3 14 Access Code Table Screen Parameters 3 15 Channel Configuration Field Definitions 3 21 THO OOmImarids sex edavidaDadazcbsbek 3 26 RF Configuration Data 3 29 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Data Fields 3 31 Scan List Configuration Data 3 33 IntelliRepeater Screen Fields 3 35 Site Frequency Screen Data Fields 3 37 Site General Screen Data Fields 3 38 Site Timer Screen Data Fields 3 39 Radio Modulation Partition Screen Data Fields 3 40 Band Partition Screen Data Fields 3 41 Repeater Information Screen Data 3 43 RF Configuration Data Fields 3 46 RX TX Wireline Alignment 3 56 RX TX Wireline Equalization
3. 22 2222 2222 2 3 17 Adding New Users 5 3 17 Modifying an Existing 1 3 18 Deleting an Existing 3 19 Programming the Channel Information 3 20 Programming the TRC Commands 4 4 3 25 Programming DC Remote Command 3 27 Programming the RF Configuration Data Screen 3 29 Programming the 6809 Trunking Interface 3 31 Programming the Scan List Configuration Data 3 32 Programming the 3 35 Programming the Site Frequency 3 36 Programming the Site General Parameters 3 37 Programming the Site Timer Screen 3 39 Programming Radio Modulation Partition 3 40 Programming Full Sub Band Partition Screens 3 40 Programmi
4. 2 19 Writing Codeplug Data to the 2 21 Obtaining Codeplug Size 1 2 22 File Maintenance ie debe ede i 2 22 Saving Configuration Data to an Archive 2 23 Opening an Archive Codeplug 2 25 Chapter 3 Optimization Required Test 3 2 Verifying the Device s Configuration Data 3 3 Device Type Programming 3 4 Programming the IP Address 0 0 ce nents 3 6 Programming the 4 1 3 7 Setting the Device s Date and 1 3 8 Programming Wireline Configuration 3 8 Programming the Access Code Table Data For Conventional Systems 3 13 Programming the Access Code Table Data for 6809 Trunking 3 15 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS Programming the Multi Coded Squelch Table Screen 3 16 Saving User
5. 5 27 Status Panel Screen Example Primary Comparator in an Expanded G nfig rat OMe DR CDD 5 28 Status Panel Screen Example Standard 5 29 Station and Comparator Version 5 30 Example of a Saved Codeplug 5 33 Reference Oscillator Alignment 8440021 6 2 Power Output Alignment Setup eds 6 5 Power Output Alignment Setup for Quantro 350W Stations 6 8 Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Alignment 6 12 Reference Modulation Compensation Alignment Setup 6 14 Waveform 2 028 6 16 Release R1 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 22 Release R2 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 23 Release R3 00 R3 01 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 24 Release R4 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 25 Release R5 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 26 Release R6 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 27 Release R7 00 Features and System Capabilities Convent
6. 3 17 Channel Configuration Screen 3 20 Advanced Channel Information 3 21 Command Table 5 0 0 3 25 DC Command Table Screen 3 28 RF relatis Pienso im 3 29 6809 Trunking Interface Screen 3 31 Scan List Configuration 0 44 3 33 IntelliRepeater Specific Configuration 3 35 Site Frequency R E 3 36 Site General 5 3 37 EE els 1 3 39 Radio Modulation Partition 00 4 3 40 Full Sub Band Partition and Radio Modulation Partition Screen 3 41 Repeater Summary 3 41 Repeater Information Screen Basic Tab 3 42 Repeater Information Screen Advanced 3 42 RF Configuration Screen Conventional Stations 3 45 RF Configuration Screen IntelliRepeater and 6809 Trunking Stations 3 45 TX Wireline Alignment Setup
7. 8 1 SLIP Naming Convention 11 45 Software Versions cua ca ex eke ox ad 7 17 7 18 Software Downloading Downloading Software to Station 6809 Controller SYSTEMS e wii RR RU UR eee dd 11 52 Downloading Software to Station IntelliRepeater SYSTEMS suu stes dba x ede wat dew ets 11 56 Installing Dial Up Modem in Windows 2000 11 14 Installing Dial Up Modem in Windows Professional 11 34 Installing Null Modem in Windows 2000 Professional 11 3 Installing Null Modem in Windows XP Professional 11 22 Loading Station Software toPC 11 52 OVEIVIEW ossa kd tha a Ree 11 1 Upgrade Firmware 6 ee eee 7 1 WildCard Auxiliary Input 148 10 3 Auxiliary Input Programming 10 2 Auxiliary 10 2 INDEX 4 PC 11 3 11 2 RSS SLIP Naming Convention 11 45 Station Connection Ethernet 11 48 Station Connection Overview 11 46 Station Connection Remote Dial Up 11 49 Station Connection 11 47 Station Connection Zone Controller Link 11 49 Software Version Station cuu ie ea ade dis Ge eae RERO E kun 5 30 Squelch Adjust Alignm
8. OHL1SVV3HV 1V201 V3uv 5 O1VNY 1V201 IVNOLLN3ANOO TWNOILNSANO9 Saunivai4d AYVMLAOS IVNOILdO 226 SS300V HualVadau WYS aav OVN HNW l1SVOLOdT3S peojumog asemyos 69zX ou 1 J ti 1X3 ZHIA OL ZHIN S 122 ZH 921 16 1 5 aav Bulkey N 8 3 S uo uuelv PU LY SHA M OSE ZHIN 006 oguenc 2 006 4ejueno LH AHN M 001 0LL JEjueno agii 908X ouisv dav 692X Ov1 vHlO3ds aav M OOL PHM OLL E etin Uno IM OLL ZH LH OH Sz ZH LH AHN c 1V2011VNOLLN3ANOO p a ens ZHN 008 21529 ZHN 008 onueno SNOILYLS S3auniv34 34 1405 Figure 7 17 Release R14 0 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 38 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz Basic TRC QUANTAR VHF R1 and R2 Battery Revert Quantro UHF R1 through R3 12 5 kHz Channels QUANTAR 900 MHz 5 MHZ External Reference Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 Failsoft z requires optional hardware 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING SINGLE SITE
9. 8 2 Changing Station Password 2 8 3 Erasing Station Password Local 8 4 Erasing Station Password Remote 55 8 5 Bypassing the Station 1 8 6 Chapter 9 Remote Dial Up Modem Requirement ass Inca 9 2 Station Modem Configuration 4 4 9 2 PC Modem Configuration 9 3 Chapter 10 WildCard Operation Station Auxiliary Inputs 10 2 Programming the WildCard Input 10 2 Station Auxiliary 1 4 10 4 Programming the Wildcard Output 10 5 State Action Tables cei Ld ee ee eR Re De bie hea eee ee klip 10 6 How State Action Tables Operate 10 7 Programming the Wildcard State 10 8 Chapter 11 Software Downloading PPrerequisites xis ae ae eee ane ap EES we ad 11 2 Preparing PC for Software Download Commun
10. WL WL_020_10_807 522 03 0180706F50 WL WL_020_10_807 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010030 Boot B2_020_10_002 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010527 Boot B2_020_10_002 Boot2 PC5091002000010002 EXC 020 09 005 Boot PC5091002000010002 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010807 U134 PC5095204000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 042 2 scM SCM R 020 10 536 R10 04 00 R10 04 BST SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 10 807 822 03 Best 0180706F50 WL WL 020 10 807 App Sftwr _ PC509F10300010042 Boot B2 020 10 003 App Sftwr 509 10400010536 Boot B2 020 10 003 Boot PC5091002000010003 EXC 020 09 005 Boot PC5091002000010003 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010807 U134 PC5095204000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 049 2 scM SCM 020 10 543 R10 05 00 R10 05 S57 M 0180706F47 WL WL 020 10 812 8Z2 05 0180706F50 WL WL 020 10 812 App Sftwr 509 10300010049 Boot B2 020 10 008 App Sftwr 509 10400010543 Boot B2 020 10 008 Boot PC5091002000010008 EXC 020 09 005 Boot PC5091002000010008 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010812 U134 PC5095204000010812 U135 PC5095104000010812 U135 PC5095104000010812 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 058 2 scm SCM IR_020_10_552 10 06 00
11. 10 5 WildGard State Sra ein tnt ial dd rap a ER 10 8 Serial Connection for Software Download 11 47 Ethernet Connection to a Single Station 22 11 48 Ethernet Connection to IntelliRepeater Ethernet Network 11 48 Remote Dial Up Connection rir RR nore tr ae 11 49 Zone Controller Link Connection esses 11 51 Adapter for Connecting between PC and Zone Controller Link 11 51 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 IX LIST OF FIGURES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 LisT List of Tables Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 3 18 Table 3 19 Table 3 20 Table 3 21 Table 3 22 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 6 1 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 6881085E35 AG OF TABLES Device Types and Applicable 44 224 22221 3 5 Wireline Parameters a e E cune roma pua 3 10 Tone Remote Control Tab Parameters 2 3 11 ASTRO Tab Parameters dune 3 12 Access Code Table Field Definitions
12. ONDINNYL 6089 6089 tz A 688X s nb y 888X tz A 688X 888 69zx sepnjoul 692 upqede 18 7 1SYITNNIS GDN oves s sepnioul Sd9 isvolnwis Gav 9119 aav aav 686 OHLSV 266 08157 ALIS 319NIS ONDINAYL 15 6089 v3uv SNDINQH L OULSV 6089 J3NOZLUVIIS 166X 5O1VNYV 3LIS 315NIS 6089 966X L3N3Hf193S ALIS SNDINIH L 6089 jeuondo 6072 JNOZLHVINS RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1X3 ZHINOL ZHIW S ZH 9 21 21529 Aujigede dry jeig U01I 09 01d PAOMSSEd SSY 5 Saunivad 3HVALLdOS Saunivad 3HVALLdOS 2H PU SHA M OSE ZHI 006 42 UeNO vu Lu oUeND M 001 YH M OFF ZH M SZ LH ueno u LY SHA 4 ZHI 008 42 UeNO ZHN 008 daLYOddNS SNOILVLS Figure 7 22 Release R6 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 5 LSVOINWIS OH1SVV3HV ONDINNYL SN
13. Boost Frequency 2500 Hz 2500 Hz Click Tone Off near the bottom of the pane Subtract the absolute value measured in step 8 from the absolute value measured in step 10 and enter the result in LO Boost Adjust Level 400 Hz Current field Example 22 8 dBm measured in step 8 25 4 dBm measured in step 10 25 4 22 8 2 6 if the result is negative use 0 Enter 2 6 in LO Boost Adjust Level 400 Hz Current field Hi Boost Level Equalization 17 13 In most cases the default 2500 Hz Hi Boost Frequency is acceptable If the telephone lines exhibit a notch or peak at 2500 Hz you may need to change the boost frequency by entering another frequency such as between 2200 Hz and 2800 Hz in the Hi Boost Frequency field and then click the Set Freq Click Tone On to cause the station receiver to generate a 1 kHz test tone at the level specified in Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure on page 3 57 Measure in dBm and record the new value as indicated on the AC voltmeter connected to the comparator 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Current Stored tone ont RX Wireline Level 1 KHz 6 dBm 8 dBm Press to turn on the 1 KHz tone JAudio Level 1 6 dBm 14 Click Tone On for HI Boost Adjust Level 2500 Hz in the Rx Wireline Equalization section to cause the station receiver to generate a 2500 Hz alignment tone Measur
14. 3 56 RX Wireline ASTRO Link Management Tone Alignment Matrix 3 56 Hardware Configuration Screen Data 5 4 4 Conventional System Screen Data 4 5 Smartzone System Screen Data Fields 4 6 Analog Voting Screen Data Fields 44 22 2 4 7 Port Control Screen Data 08 4 8 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages 5 6 Status Panel Screen Buttons 5 27 Comparator Status Panel Screen Buttons 5 29 Alignment PIOGSCHEBS susc LLULLU SS 6 2 TRN7475 and TRN7667 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility 7 3 TTN4094 and TRN7900 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility 7 4 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 and CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility ec n 7 7 12 30 2006 XI LIST OF TABLES Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 9 1 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 11 1 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table B 1 XII Factory Shipped Upgrade Kit RSS Compatibility for stations without So
15. 3 3 Date and Time Setting 3 8 Wireline Configuration 3 8 IP Address 3 6 Wireline Configuration 3 10 MAC Address Setting 3 7 Optimizing OVEIVICW t Gat eae ae wah Bang n 3 1 4 1 Post Optimization 3 93 Programming 4 3 Required Equipment 3 2 OVerVIEW 255545 ea wae sus RR OR 9 1 StationType Program Overview 3 4 Password Erasing Remote 8 5 ACtVatlOD u saa acea Ree EE 8 1 8 2 22 2 4 eee 8 6 Protection Overview 8 1 Changing 8 3 TAM OU ROC ya s p egent aoe 8 1 i Ruine Simla ae ae a es 8 2 PC 2 4 Erasing 1 8 4 PL CodeS uuu e xe cR ck Pe a A 1 Reference Oscillator Alignment 3 75 4 10 RSS Remote Connecting PC to 2 12 Disabling Station 5 33 BRING eed aad a oe ae eee eel ba eas 2 15 Enabling a 5 33 Feature Summary
16. jeuondo eyowey uonoejoJd uoneis SSH Ayjiqedeg aemyos O S IVD OH1SV e9ueJeJeH 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S Ayiqedeg ZH S L iliqedeO Haney Mpeg 4 seg Saunivad AYVMLAOS quvaNvis Saunivad AYVMLAOS TWNOILdO 6089 M SOTVNV 35 319NIS 6089 Aywjiqedeo 8 9119 39V H31NI ALIHOIHd 310SNOO aav 6089 697X VL VY19JdS 166X 35 319NIS 6089 PU LY SHA M OSE ZHIN 006 oguenc 2 006 4Ejuenp LH AHN M 001 YH MOLL EH M OLL ed LH M SZ 24 14 AHN Jejueno pue LH JHA J amp jueno ZHN 008 ZHN 008 ogueno aardoddns SNOILVLS 27 Release R09 03 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking Figure 7 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 48 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 15 1 5 SNDINnu L OH1SV 3aqIN ONDINNUYL 6089 Ou SV 6089 LINFYNIAS AIM LSVOTNNIS 6089 688X 888X LSVOTNAINIS
17. 00 011 AHN JEJueno M 00L PH A OLL M OLL zH Lg OH M Se zu HHd AHN ueno u LH AHA ZHN 008 ZHN 008 aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 16 Release R13 00 00 through R13 02 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 37 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES 8VONI MOVETIVS 1Lv3d3u 8VO NI 4oVgT1V4 ANY 5 ualv3dau ASVOTNWIS OHL1SVV3HV 1 207 1VNOILN3ANOO 1VNOILN3ANOO 940 940 1V3d3u aav 1V3d3u aav 5 66322 ualvadau LSVOTNWIS 5 1V907 Ou1SWa3uv IAIM VNOILN3ANOO jeuondo c 6x dn oy 1524 888X ssa00v 69230 L 0 E IVO OH1SV LSVO INNIS aav 2vA1 vHLO3dS aav LLOULSY qay dn Ieiq uoln09101d 5 SSH ejoueH yeadoy Jeuiqe uj yoeq e4 JSeo NWIS Aqpueis ure eoedsepiM ISVO INNIS uojenbs euoug LLHIN SS399V H31V3d3H
18. 2 1 Repair Firmware 7 2 Alignment Procedures 6 2 Installation Procedure 2 4 Output Power Alignment Procedure 6 4 qnd ae s 2 14 Output Power Alignment Procedure 350W VHF 2 4 Staton erm 6 7 Program Versions Compatibility 7 16 Post Repair Alignment Overview 6 1 Screen 2 19 Reference Modulation Alignment Procedure 6 14 User Interface Description 2 2 Tx Deviation Alignment Procedure 350 Stations RSSI 9 Alignment usd ea Rn 3 68 Reports Rx Wireline Alignment 3 55 Bie et ee eas 5 31 Printing Codeplug Report 5 31 Saving Codeplug Report 5 32 Stats 5 3 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 INDEX 3 Security Password 8 1 Password 1 8 6 Password 8 3 Password Creation 8 2 Password Erasure 1 8 4 Password Erasure Remote 8 5 Password Features 8 2 Password Protection 8 1 Password Protection Overview 8 1 Password
19. uonels 5 SSH ejoueH yeadoy jeuiqe u 1 5 5 Agpueis ule eoedsepiM pieOpi A uojenbs pepoo niniw u9 eq euoug LLHIN Auliqede 8 OSHN 5 Saunivad 3HVALLdOS IVNOILdO OWN HNN LSVOLOATAS asemyos 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHW S Sjeuueu ZHY 6721 Bue 9 3 Seuo uue v yojanbs 011002 peoueuu3 9 seg Saunivaid3HvALdos 1 9 l1V3d3aH AAY S3900V 1 OHL1SVV3HV 1V907 1VNOILN3ANOO OH1SW3uV 1SVO nWIS VNOILN3ANOO IVNOILN3ANOO 888X ze6X 1LSY TNNIS SS322V 1 aav IVS aav 692x OVA1 VH123dS AAY LSVOTNWIS 1VNOILN3ANOO SS395V H31V3d3u 1v201 WNOILNSANO9D 16 1 207 7WNOILNSANO9 501VNV IVNOILN3JANOO 226 SS300V Hualvadau WYS aav 6 2 120385 692 sepniour 242X 1SVOTnWIS aav 908X 09157 AAY 169X V3HV 1V201 PU LY HHA M OSE ZHIN 006 oguenc 2 006 4 amp jueno LH AHN
20. orrei 1 Carre Crew Bun HAN Ss tent ACHE eve _ Crap e 1 HW Output Type eva Det n ec Ace e md cL Xr EE m RENE Seetee 2 Transistor Lo _ 2 GROUP M Coded 3 LO lt m Mul Coded 3 Tranwastor T 3 4 Teaio Transistor Lo v 5 Traer M 5 Transistor GROUP 6 Transstor 1 77 eut 6 Trorsistor GROUPS ens Access Code Tatie z j 7 Rew GROUPS OTD TL _8 tay L LL GROUPS im m T Grey Grange OUTPUTS TS d 10 L E 10 Kees L L Sat To Dat J Set To etme Figure 10 2 WildCard Output Screen Enhanced Shown Table 10 2 WildCard Output Screen Data Fields ern Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any Channel Binary Group Used to select one or None None System dependent None of the pre defined 1 Inputs 1 4 binary groups used to 2 Inputs 1 8 report station operating 3 Inputs 9 10 channel 4 Inputs 9 12 5 Inputs 5 8 Multi Code Squelch Table Used to select one or None None System dependent Binary Group None of the pre defined 1 Inputs 1 4 binary groups used to 2 Inputs 1 8 report MCS users 3 Inputs 9 10 4 Inputs 9
21. 3 67 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Vil LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Vill Roo Alignment Test SOellpi succedere ipu e Repo 3 69 Squelch Adjust Alignment puit SP IERI mete tuf na Ree 3 71 Comparator Configuration Screen 4 3 Hardware Configuration 2 44 0 4 4 Conventional System 2442244 0 eene nennen enne 4 5 Smartzone System Screen RAI PPM 4 6 Analog Voting Screen 4 7 Port COMPOS creer sc das fc ud Rep e tr 4 8 Station Metering Screen 5 3 Station Status Report Screen 2 5 4 Comparator Status Report Screen 5 5 Station Status Panel Screen Example
22. 2 5 LSVOTANIS 6089 ZY pue LY JHA M OGEo4UeND ZHW 006 enO LY AHN pue LY JHA enO ZHW 008 enO ZHN 008 ojueno daLYOddNS SNOILVLS 692 Idd M 2229 1svo1nWis aav jeuondo Aitiqede yosireJ OSHN Saunivaid 3HVALdOS IVNOILdO 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S Sjeuueu ZHY 9 21 9 seq Saunivad 3HVALdOS 15 1 6089 3GIM 6089 ILIS 319NIS 6089 697X 2vl VHlOddS AAV 69ZX 220 ISVOINWIS aav Ayjiqedeo 8 9110 39VJH3 NI ALlHOIBHd 3 1OSNOO aav 69zx Ovi vHlO3dS 966x 66 ALIS SNDPINnH L 6089 1 5 ALIS 319NIS SNDINNYL 6089 Figure 7 20 Release R4 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 41 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES LINFUNIIAS AIM LSVOTNINIS ONDINNYL 6089 6 2 sepniour 122X LSVOTNINIS o1ewpieu jeuondo sauinba Autigede dn IeIq PIOMSSE 5 SSY i
23. Trama ros GROUPA DTJ yE Trereastor reget i Group 10 5 rod NONE 5 teaser 150 o LO 6 Troeeistor gut L v T Lo y a Trento ret 10 H Treratetor Peut L 5 omm res iro 9 qu T 2 GROUP Tt 10 Optocoupier Input 12 11 ptocoupter x 1 12 J Figure 10 1 WildCard Input Screen Enhanced Shown Table 10 1 WildCard Input Screen Data Fields Data Field Description Range Selections Default Recomme nged Setting if any Channel Used to select one or e None None System dependent Binary None of the pre Inputs 1 4 Group defined binary groups 2 Inputs 1 8 used to select Access 3 Inputs 9 10 Code Table overriding 4 Inputs 9 12 ACT programmed for 5 Inputs 5 8 channel in Channel dupa Information screen Access Code Used to select one or None None System dependent Table Binary None of the pre Inputs 1 4 Group defined binary groups 2 Inputs 1 8 used to control station 3 Inputs 9 10 operating channel 4 Inputs 9 12 5 Inputs 5 8 Active Level If a binary group is Hi N A System dependent selected active level Lo HI or LO is chosen here applies to all inputs of selected binary group Aux Input Station Aux Inputs 1 12 for enhanced N A Dependent on listed her
24. WYS 908X PU SHA M 056 oguenp d 13SA 669X HN 006 09157 aav 869X oueno ZHN 006 J4ejueno vu LH AHN M 00L tH M OLL M OLE ZH LY M SZ 2u LH Zu pu LH AHA ZHN 008 ZHN 008 ogueno 69 13N3unoasaav OV1 VH1O3dS aav 76 lt 501VNV 1V201 1VNOILN3ANOO qaargoddns SNOILVLS 7 12 Release R09 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional igure F 7 33 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES MOVETIVA aqIA LSVOTANIS IVNOLLN3ANOO 1 v940 1V3d3u qeo ui0vaTiV4 aav OuLsvv3uv jeuondo dniay 1524 IVO 41 OH1SV Autiqede dr jeiq lou tu Uu0l 099101d 15 5 SSY jeedeu jeuiqeo u x oeqjreJ 1seojnuiis jouueyo gpuejg urew pug eoedsepiM illqedeO uojenbs pepoo niniw 49ed ILYN illqedeO 8 LSVOTNNIS TWNOILNSANO9 Saunivad AYVMLAOS TWNOILdO illqedeS peojumog aemyos 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S Sjeuueu ZHY 921 N 9 3 uojenbs
25. Networking Advanced Select a device Communications cabl Show icon in notification area when connected 21 Select the device you just added and then click Configure The following window appears 11 42 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS Modem Configuration Communications cable between two computers Maximum speed bps Ew Modem protocol Hardware features C Enable hardware flow control C Enable modem error control C Enable modem compression 0 Show terminal window Enable modem speaker 22 Select the desired baud rate and uncheck all other check boxes You can only select baud rate values that are supported by RSS See RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 for baud rate and connection name dependencies 23 Click OK 24 Select the Options tab and set the option selection as shown in the figure below RSS SLIP FP 9600 COM3 General Options Security Networking Advanced Dialing options v Display progress while connecting 0 Prompt for name and password certificate etc C Include Windows logon domain Redialing options Redial attempts 0 Time between redial attempts 1 minute v Idle time before hanging up never b C Redial if line is dropped 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 43 PREPA
26. Reterenee Tx Deviation Power Output On Receiver 1 Channel 1 Unmodulstexd Sigal input SO Receive Frequency 1 BNE 0125 Receme Frequency 2 ov Currert Channel Select RX1 Channel RX gt Channel Stat ASH Calibration Note Raton is Currently ACCESS Stalin Status Not Keyed 3 Turn the communications analyzer on and set it as follows Generate Frequency Set the station s receive frequency Output level 90 dBm Modulation None 4 Click Select RX1 Channel 5 Click Start RSSI Calibration The station automatically calibrates the receiver circuitry and stores the setting in station memory 6 If the station is equipped with two receiver modules Click Select RX2 channel Otherwise you have completed this procedure 7 Change the frequency on the communications analyzer to that of the second receive channel 8 Click Start RSSI Calibration The station automatically calibrates the receiver circuitry and stores the setting in station memory 3 70 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Aligning Squelch Adjust Procedure 1 Connect the station as shown Figure 3 30 TO RECEIVE ANTENNA Figure 3 30 Squelch Adjust Alignment Setup 2 Setthe c
27. ee 2 WE Reference TX Power RSS Reference Oscillator Frequency w Tranamit Frequency 8530125 Meter ALITO NET 5 AUTONET 10 MT HEYUP SAVE DO Y Sintion Note Sintion in ACCESS Stebon Statut Nt Keyed Generally the Reference Oscillator screen appears as the default screen as shown above 8 Observe the frequency reading on the R2001 analyzer as you click Keyup to key the station transmitter If the observed transmit frequency reading is not the same as that specified by the FCC for that station adjust the internal reference oscillator using the right or left arrows on either side of the Reference Oscillator Frequency graph until you obtain a reading on the analyzer as close as possible to the FCC specified transmit frequency for that station Ifthe observed reading equals that specified by the FCC for that station no changes are required 9 Click Dekey to dekey the station 10 If you adjusted the reference oscillator frequency click Save to save the reference oscillator value Otherwise this procedure is complete Disconnect the test equipment Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure 1 Connect the output of a stable 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference source to the BNC connector located at the bottom of the station control module fron
28. User Access ENABLED Modify the settings as required Click Accept to save the user data or Cancel to exit without saving 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE MULTI CODED SQUELCH TABLE SCREEN Deleting an Existing User 1 Click Multi coded Squelch Table in the navigation pane 2 Click the number of the user to be deleted so that the cursor blinks in the number s cell it 1s non editable 3 Click Modify User The Modify Entry window appears for that user IH Modify Entry Modify Entry 2 Station Serial Number 448CAX0252 Stati Type FreqiCode Stet ex Evi v pe Save Report Modify User Clear Accounting 4 Select Delete from the User Access selection list IB Modify Entry Modify Entry 2 448CAX0252 Stati Stati Station Serial Number Type Freq Code Rx DPL v 051 v 103 5 1 051 DELETE Clear Accounting Report Modify User 5 Click Accept The User Table indicates the User Access as DELETE Rx Type Rx Freq Code Tx Type Tx Freq Code User Access T PL 103 5 14 PL 103 5 14 ENABLED DPL 051 DPL 047 DELETE 3 Save Report Modify User Clear Accounting The current usage time and number of call data for the deleted users is erased when the codeplug is uploaded to the station 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 19
29. requires optional hardware X599 ADD SAM REPEATER ACCESS X932 ADD SECURENET Enable Using RSS ADD SPECTRA TAC X269 CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ANALOG CONVENTIONAL CONVENTIONAL WITH REPEATER ACCESS LOCAL AREA SECURENET WIDE AREA ANALOG ADD SAM ADD SPECTRA TAC ADD SECURENET STATIONS SUPPORTED REPEATER ACCESS Enable Using RSS X932 Quantro 800 MHz QUANTAR VHF R1 and R2 Quantro UHF R1 and R2 Voca D EB CONVENTIONAL Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 TH REPEATER ACCESS WIDE AREA SECURENET Figure 7 1 Release R1 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 22 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz Basic TRC QUANTAR VHF R1 and R2 PL Quantro UHF R1 through R3 DPL QUANTAR 900 MHz Battery Revert Quantro 350W VHF R1 and R2 Alarm Tones E amp M Keying 12 5 kHz Channels 5 MHZ External Reference requires optional hardware CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ANALOG CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ASTRO CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA SECURENET X599 ADD ASTRO Enable using RSS CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ASTRO ADD SAM REPEATER ACCESS X932 ADD SAM REPEATER ACCESS X932 CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREASECURENET ADD SAM REPEATER ACCESS X932 ADD SECURENET ADD Enable using RSS SPECTRA TAC X269 CONVENTIONAL WIDE AREA ANALOG ADD SECURENET
30. the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 5 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 6 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane isj Servke Configuration Took Help 74 Recto 4 PEDE 2 2 2 TX Weine f Hardware Configuration Reterence Compensation watery Equaizason B Sasken Rx vreine ine 2 Ste General m Reterence Osciletor TX Deviation 8 Power Output RSSI Calibration Ske Timer Dand Patton Rado Modulation Partition Reporter Summary RF Configuration Sy Sorice iun Reference Oscillator Frequency O Mawi 2 The station will automaticaly be put into Access Disabile mode A station reset wil be required Lo return the station to Access Enabled Do you wank Lo continue e Test tus T Click Yes to continue NOTE When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears 3 76 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Rinference Mad Campenantion Banery Eganin Speech agua
31. 190 M SOIVNV 3115 319NIS 6089 SOTWNV ONDINNYL 6089 Ayjiqedeg 8 sepniouj 9119 39V H31NI 697X ALIHOIHd 310SNOO 9V1 Y8193dS dv aav 66 35 319NIS 6089 LH AHA M OSE ZHN 006 Jejuenp uBnouul Lu M 001 PH M OLL EH M OLL 2u LH M Zu 1H dH D enO ZH JHA eeno ZHN 008 Jejueno ZH 008 ogueno qaardoddns SNOILV LS Figure 7 24 Release R07 02 02 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 45 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES Figure 7 25 Release R09 00 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 46 STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W R3 110 W R4 100W Quantro R1 through R4 Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE 6809 ASTRO TRUNKING WIDE AREA ASTRO X897 IMBE ADD GPS SIMULCAST X888 Requires X889 V 24 Board 6809 ASTRO TRUNKING SIMULCAST WIDE AREA ASTRO CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 MHz 10MHz Ext Reference Software Downloading Capability OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES UHSO Failsoft ASTRO CAI 3 0 Remote RSS includes Station Password Prote
32. ENABLED Line Conditioning C To access an outside line dial 0 To disable call waiting dial Modem Response Strings Connect CONNECT Busy BUSY 15 Failure seconds Failure seconds NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIALTONE Failure Failure TIMEOUT Control String Send Control String Previous Settings Load Defaults 8 Configure the fields in this window as required See Table 9 1 Valid Range Recommended Setting Data Fields Description Selections Default if any Command Strings Initialization Command string sent to N A ATEIQOVIXA4 amp KOS Default command string PC modem on initiating a 020 M designed for most Hayes remote dial up compatible modems If default connection fails try modem factory settings AT amp F M or refer to modem user guide Dial Prefix Specifies the dialing ATDT Tone ATDT System dependent method pulse or tone dialing ATDP Pulse dialing Dial Suffix Specifies the character M Carriage M System dependent that signifies the end of return the dialing string Hang up Specifies the command N A Default is Hayes compatible string sent to hang up the modem 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 9 5 PC MODEM CONFIGURATION Table 9 1 RSS PC Modem Configuration Data Fields continued Valid Range CHAPTER 9 REMOTE DIAL UP Recommended Setting Data Fields
33. HDLC FRAMES QUEUE CREATE FAILED hdlc in partn creation failed hdlc out partn creation failed HDLC PENDING QUEUE CREATE FAILED HDLC TASK UNINITIALIZED HDLC TX QUEUE CREATE FAILED 15 5 A A SA A A 5 5 SASA 5 5 5 5 5555 5 555 5 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 11 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectl Status Message y System Programmed Status RSS Hardware Failure HDLC TX OVERRUN ERROR lt HDLC WINDOW_FULL hcl task create failed hcl task start failed HDL WAKEAFTER_FAILED hdr task create failed hdr task start failed hdt task create failed hdt task start failed HIGH_POWER_RAIL Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier HIGH_FINAL_PA_VSWR_ALARM Power Amplifier HIGH_PA_TEMP_ALARM Power Amplifier HIGH_TX_FINAL_VSWR_ALARM Exciter Power Amplifier HOLD QUEUE CREATE FAILED HOST_TO_TX_CHKSUM_ERR hpl task create failed hpl task start failed hpt task create failed hpt task start failed HPT_TASK_UNINITIALIZED Idles Illegal Option I Frame should not arrive so far ILLEGAL RX SPACING ILLEGAL TX EEPROM ADDRESS 5 57 NN LN GN INCOMPAT_CODEPLUG Upgrade and download
34. IVNOILNJANOO 1 9 1V3ddu 482 4 9 811 aav S300V 1 1 1V901 TWNOILNSANO9 Z 6x 55800 1 WYS aav 5O1VNV LSVOTNNIS IVNOILNJ3ANOO 69 sepniouj 142X 16 01 5 dav OHLSVV3HV 17207 IWNOILNSANO9 908X d 13SA 669X 5 aav IVNOILNJANOO 92 1V3dau Gav L3N3Hh123S 15 5 IVNOLLN3JANOO OH1SV IAIM TWNOLLNSANO9 6 2 OV1 VH1O3dS QAY 222X 15 5 Gav 65300 ualvadad 3N34un23s IVNOLLNS3ANOO 3N3un23S 1v201 VNOILN3ANOO 869X J13N3unoasaav Z 6x 6920 SS329V Halvadau QAY Ov1i vuloddsdaav SS399Y ualvadau 17207 501VNV v3uv SU NOLNSANCS IVNOLLNJ3ANOO 1v201 1VNOILN3ANOO 226 55800 ualvadau WYS aav LY AHA M OSE oguenc ZHIN 006 Lu M 001 011 PH EX gt M 001 PH M OLL MOLL zu LH SZ AHN Heen PUR LY JHA ZHIN 008 ZHN 008 869X J1aNdunodgsqav 692X VL V4L9JdS dav 169X V3HV 1 201 TVNOILNSANOD 5 SNOILVLS
35. j My Network Places Files of type m Files Figure 3 9 Save Report Button to Save MCS Data Adding New Users 6881085E35 AG To add new users perform the following procedure 1 Click Multi Coded Squelch Table in the navigation pane 2 Click the last number in the list at the blank line so that the cursor blinks in the number s cell it is non editable 3 17 PROGRAMMING THE MULTI CODED SQUELCH TABLE SCREEN CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Click Modify User The Modify Entry window appears for that user Enter the settings as appropriate IB Modify Entry Modify Entry 2 Station Serial Number 448 0252 Stati Type FregiCode Stal o MV 719 xa Rx Type Rx Freq Code Tx 90 User Access DISABLED 1 PL 103 5 14 PL miim Jee J Click Accept to save the data The new user is added to the list and also the next user number is added Modifying an Existing User Click Multi Coded Squelch Table in the navigation pane Click the number of the user you need to modify so that the cursor blinks in the number s cell it is non editable Click Modify User The Modify Entry window appears for that user Station Time Modify Entry User Tables Modify Entry 1 de Tx Type Tx Freq Code User Access PL 103514 ENABLED Type FreqiCode Rx Gv toss 1 PL v hoss 1a Modify Clear Accounting
36. 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 15 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectly Status Message System Programmed Status RSS LOCAL_LINK_HWR_FAILURE Wireline ASTRO Modem LOCAL_LINK_HWR_OK V LOG TX INHIBIT FROM WL V LOST CD WHILE OP PROP V LOW POWER RAIL Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier LT SEND FAILURE Wireline ASTRO Modem LT SEND OK V malloc failed V MAX INBND ANA TMR EXP 11 V MCS MAX CALLS V MCS MAX TIME V MCS PTTN ERROR Station Control Middle block arrived but frame buf ptr ZZNULL V MI PTTN ERROR Station Control MISSED ANA STOP ON TX WL V Modem Cable V MODEM COMMAND FAILURE Wireline ASTRO Modem MODEM FAILURE ACTIVE Wireline ASTRO Modem MODEM FAILURE INACTIVE V MODEM FAST TRAINED V MODEM LONG TRAINED V MODEM TRAINED ON DATA V Monitor partition create failed 4 Monitor Queue Create failed morse_complete sending failed V Morse id timedout V 5 16 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued
37. Add Repeater Previous Repeater Next Repeater 8 Figure 3 25 Repeater Information Screen Advanced Tab 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 3 18 Repeater Information Screen Data Fields PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Aare Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default EA P 9 Setting if any Basic Tab Repeater Number Identifies the repeater number selected through this 1 28 digits 1 As determined by the screen system configuration Serial Number This field shows the serial number of the station to 1 to 10 digits 123ABC6789 Depends on the system which this screen applies design Base Repeater Rx Receive frequency in KHz for the selected repeater Follows input of Base 45 MHz less Non editable Frequency Repeater Tx Frequency than Tx frequency Base Repeater Tx Transmit frequency in MHz for the selected Depends on band 851 0125 MHz Depends on the system Frequency repeater design Base Station The Morse Code ID for the station An entry must Up to eight alpha numeric None Assigned by FCC Refer Identification be provided if BSI Capability is set to Enabled characters in length to system design document Control Channel Indicates whether the station is capable of operating Enabled Disabled Enabled if station is to Capability as a control channel station Disabled be used as a control channel if not it is disabled Prefer
38. Radio Service Software Radio NE 2181 Fie Configuration Took Help vj Recto 4 8 T 273 Condiguration Le oes Reference Mocusston Compensation Battery Sasken Rx Vereine ine 2 Sie General Reterence Osciltor TX Deviation Power Output RSSI Calibration San Timer Band Patwon Rado Modulsiion Partition Repeater intormsation Repeater Summary RF Configuration 001000000690 2 Tat 2 73 Service Reference Oscillator Frequency vers ERE The station vell automatically be put into Access Disable mode station reset will be required Lo return Ue station to Access Enabled Do you want to continue Men ss _ NOTE When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 79 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 3 80 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION TX Werine L i ME Reference Moduistion Compensation Battery Equsization Squstch Adjust E RX Weeline 2 Reference Orator B Tx Deviation Bil Power Output RSS i The Stabon should be powered up for UO mintes betore aging Use UHSO ENABLE bution to override the 7 5
39. UHSO werm up liner Internal UHSO bo Transit Frequency 8529125 MHz teo Note Ration it Currently ACCESS ED Station Status Not Keyed If the station transmitter and or receiver do not lock as indicated by the Tx Lock LED being off or the Rx Fail LED lit when the UHSO source is present and on click Manual Net Otherwise proceed to step 12 uency 851 0125 MHz MANLIAL NET UHSO ENABLE SAVE Perform Manual Alignment The following screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Tx Werne Retererce Modulslion Compensation Wi Battery SquvekchAdust RX Wesine ire 2 W Reference B 1x Gensteon Il Power Output BE Celbcation Reference Oscillator Frequency Tranem Frequency 853 9125 MHz KEYLP SAVE Stebon Note Staton is Currerily ACCESS DISABLED Staten Statur Not Keyed 9 Connect the output of the stable 5 or 10 MHz external reference source to either the BNC connector located at the bottom of the station control module front panel or to the BNC connector located on the station backplane 10 Click either Auto Net 5 MHz or Auto Net 10 MHz depending on the reference in use to begin the calibration process using the test reference source The status
40. aav W 9 3 ouisv aav Seuo WEY pue LY SHA MOSE oyuenD ZHIN 006 Bueno vu yno LH dH D o4gueno Hendy JJa 169X M 001 VY M OLL V3HV 2 M OLL M 92 AHN Od ZY pue SHA ueno ZHN 008 JEjuEnp 9 5889 ZHIN 008 oguenp 3HVvMLJOS qardoddns 5301115 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG Figure 7 9 Release R08 00 00 R08 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 30 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Quantar UHF R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W R3 110 W R4 100 W Quantro UHF R1 through R4 Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STANDARD OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES SOFTWARE FEATURES Wireline Squelch UHSO PL ASTRO CAI 3 0 DPL Remote RSS includes Battery Revert Station Password Protection Alarm Tones Remote Dial Up Capability 12 5 kHz Channels requires optional hardware 5 MHz 10 MHz Ext Reference Software Download Capability CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ASTRO CAI ADD SPECTRA TAC X269 CONVENTIONAL WIDE AREA ASTRO CAI X806 ADD SAM REPEATER ACCESS X932 ADD ASTRO SIMULCAST X888 CONVENTIONAL CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ASTRO SIMULC
41. dBm to Microvolts Conversion provides a table of dBm to microvolt conversions Appendix C Glossary provides a glossary of terms Appendix D Acronyms provides a listing of acronyms and abbreviations 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 The following manuals may be required to supplement the information contained in this guide The Functional Manuals provide additional servicing and troubleshooting information for use by technicians when optimizing or servicing QUANTAR or Quantro station equipment Motorola QUANTAR Functional Manual UHF 800 MHz 900 MHz 68P81095E05 Motorola QUANTAR Data Base Station Functional Manual UHF 800 MHz 900 MHz 68P81096E05 Motorola Quantro Functional Manual VHF UHF 800 MHz 900 MHz 68P80800E95 Motorola QUANTAR Satellite Receiver Functional Manual 68P81087E25 Motorola ASTRO TAC Receiver Functional Manual 68P81094E85 Motorola ASTRO TAC 3000 Digital Voting Comparator Functional Manual 68P810098E20 Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP System Software User s manual Computer Owner s manual RELATED MANUALS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER RSS Overview The model RVN5002 ver 14 00 00 and later RSS is a GUI based alignment programming and diagnostics program for various Motorola base station and comparator products The program is designed to run on any laptop or desktop personal computer that is ca
42. Read codeplug verification Successful completion CHECKING DATA PASS 2 OF 2 8 Click Continue The RSS window displays the following screen Radio Service Software Base Radio File Service Configuration Tools Help cH T Base Radio Configuration Service Decoding Operation In Progress You can now review and configure the device s codeplug settings and perform diagnostic procedures IMPORTANT It is advised that you save the opened codeplug as an archive before you begin changing codeplug parameters and settings See Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File on page 2 23 This is important if your changes create problems because it allows an easy way to revert the connected device to a functional codeplug 2 18 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG Navigating Through the RSS Screens Use the navigation pane of the RSS program window to access the various screens Clicking the signs in the screen hierarchy expands that branch to show the applicable information screens for a QUANTAR station Base Radio 7 Base Radio L Contigurati amp Configuration da Service Hardware Configuration Wireline Configuration Access Code Table Channel Information TRC Command Table RF Configuration WildCard Input WildCard Output WildCard State rvice Version Screen Alignment S
43. Saved to a file on the PC hard disk See Saving the Codeplug Report to a File on page 5 32 Printing a Codeplug Report To print the codeplug report on paper perform the following procedure 1 From the File menu select Print Codeplug Report The Print window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 31 CODEPLUG REPORTS Service Configuration Tools Ctrl S Read from Device Ctrl R Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Print Codeplug Report Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Printer Name HP LaserJet 5000 Series PS Properties Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 5000 Series PS Where 000 Comment Print to file Print range m Copies All Number of copies 1 E C Pages 9999 Hl cell C Selection 2 Ifrequired configure the printer connected to the RSS PC and then click Print The RSS program formats the report and sends it to the printer Saving the Codeplug Report to a File To save the codeplug report to a file perform the following procedure 1 From the File menu select Save Codeplug Report The following browser window appears Service Configuration Tools Open Save Ctri s Save As Read from Device Ctrl R Write to Device Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P S
44. State Action Tables The State Action Tables screen s provides a powerful interface that allows custom WildCard functions to be created or existing WildCard Functions to be modified Implementing WildCard functions using the State Action Tables ranges from simple single action tables to complex multiple action tables A common application of the station outputs is to provide external monitoring equipment with indications of the current station channel Access Code Table and or MCS users To facilitate these applications the Output Configuration screen provides the ability to select pre defined groups of outputs whose binary values indicate the station channel access code table or MCS users Alternatively in order to provide maximum flexibility in designing WildCard functions the outputs may also be configured individually Three binary group programming areas are provided on the WildCard Input screen one for Channel Binary Group one for ACT Binary Group and one for MCS Binary Group These areas are used to program the pre defined input combinations binary group which is used to indicate the external equipment of the channel ACT and or MCS users Each may be programmed independently 10 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATE ACTION TABLES A caution While the State Action Tables feature provides a powerful flexible method of creating and modifying WildCard Functions there is also the i
45. 10 Select For all users 11 Click Next The following window appears Completing the Network A Connection Wizard Type the name you want to use for this connection css_SuP_FP_9600_comt To create this connection and save it in the Network and Dial up Connections folder click Finish To edit this connection in the Network and Dial up Connections folder select it click File and then click Properties lt Back Cancel 12 Enter the name of the connection in accordance with the rules outlined in RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 13 Click Finish The following window appears 11 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS User name Password Save Password Connect Cancel Properties Help 14 Click Properties The following window appears General Options Security Networking Sharing Select a device SLIP Connection NT COM1 Show icon in taskbar when connected tees 15 Select the null modem you just added 16 Click Configure The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 11 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 17 Select the desired baud rate and uncheck other checkboxes You can only select baud rate values that are supported by RSS 18 Click OK 19 Select the Options ta
46. 2 Preview gt gt My Recent 1 Archive Attributes Documents File Type QUANTAR CODEPLUG Version 12 Last User Tech_1 Date 10 03 05 is the original codeplug as configured at lt Codeplug Header Information Device ID 0000041E1E9E APP R020 12 546 IP Address 145 1 160 200 Physical Address 08003 504 8 Boot1 RO20 10 012 2 020 13 001 WL R020 13 002 File name IR 1 site 1 cp My Network Places Files of type Codeplug files cp 4 Click Open to open the file The codeplug archive is opened in the RSS window If a codeplug is already loaded in the RSS the following warning message appears Codeplug Data Has Already Been Entered Overwrite Existing Data 5 Click Yes to overwrite the currently loaded codeplug The following message window appears when the archive file is successfully loaded in the RSS e The Codeplug Has Been Successfully Read From EL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 27 FILE MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 28 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Optimization 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Base stations must be optimized after the initial installation and after the maintenance actions such as retuning or replacing modules Optimization includes tasks such as verifying the station hardware configuration performing alignment and programming the stati
47. 29 Set the IP Address field as follows leaving the rest blank If the connection being configured connects to the front port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 5 If the connection being configured connects to the back port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 4 30 Click Advanced The following window appears Advanced TCP IP Settings General DNS WINS This checkbox only applies when you are connected to a lacal network and a dial up network simultaneously When checked data that cannot be sent on the local network is forwarded to the dial up network Use default gateway on remote network 31 Uncheck the Use default gateway on remote network check box 32 Click OK on all windows until you reach the Network Connections screen When you finish clicking OK on all windows a Connect window appears offering you the opportunity to connect to the device Click Cancel to close the Connect window 17 mm You cannot connect to the device using the Connect window a successful connection can only be made using the RSS You are now ready to perform the SWDL procedure to upgrade the device s software See Remote Dial Up Connections on page 11 50 RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention Due to the limitation of dynamic creation of a SLIP connection using the Windows Remote Access Service RAS module a naming convention was created to allow the RSS to communicate with the Windows RAS through a null mode
48. 5 20 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectl Status Message y System Programmed Status RSS RESET FROM ADDR ERROR V Hardware Failure RESET FROM BUS ERROR RESET FROM UNINIT VECTOR SINIS Restart by MDC command RE_SYNC_1PPS_FAILURE No 1 pps GPS input to station RETRIEVED_OLD_CLST_STATIC RETRIEVED_OLD_LAUNCH_TIME RETRY_REQUIRED RF key down ridleg creation failed Rid task creation failed Rid task start failed ring creation failed Rin task creation failed Rin task start failed rmm control queue create failed ROUTINE INIT FAILED routq creation failed rout task creation failed rout task start failed RSS TEST TONE OVERRIDE RTS ASSERTED 415 5 A A SASA A 5 55 5 5 555 555 RTS_REMOVED RX2_LOCK_FAIL Incorrectly Receiver programmed receive frequency on Channel Information Screen rxbdq create failed V RXB EVENT DETECTED V block sending failed V 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 21 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Station Generated Status Message Source Internal System
49. 5 aav 869X LINIUNIAS aav 226 55300 HalV3d3aH WYS aav jeuondo s uinb OWLSV PIOMSseg uoneis 65320 sepnpul gg NONAS L2N34n23sv3auv 1v907 DOWNY 17207 eoedsepiM uojenbs pepoo niniw uojed uoud LLHIN Autiqede 8 TVNOLLN3ANOO TVNOLLN3ANOO aN 669X 692X 869X EIOS 5 QQV VL VYL19JdS 1 235 AAY TWNOILdO 226 SS320V HalVadau WYS aav eouei9Jeg 1x3 ZHN OL ZHIN S ZH SL Busey N 9 3 LY AHA M OSE oguenp Seuo ZHIN 006 ueno 269 LH Jd V3HV 1 201 1VNOILN3ANOO ME EH MORI d M OLL M SZ ZH LH JOUOD Oq ZY pue LY SHA ueno peoueuu3 ZHI 008 ueno 21529 2 008 Saunivad SAYVMLAOS qaardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 7 Release R7 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 28 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SS399V L3N3Hn23S IAIM OHLSV 1 207 LSVO
50. Analog Rptr Hold In c PLoPL Analog Rptr Access NONE elp annel revious Channel le anne elete Channel Hel Add Chi 1 Previous Chi Next Chi 1 X Delete Ch Figure 3 10 Channel Configuration Screen 3 20 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN Channel Number 1 Tx ove D Normal Over Air DISABLED Audio Fitters 20 Watts Battery Backup 10 Pre emphasis ENABLED v De emphasis ENABLED Hi Pass Filter ENABLED IM CHANNEL 1 of 4 Repeater Watts Drop Out Delay 10 Over Wireline ENABLED Rev Signal Inversion PTT Priority Analog Repeater Boost Figure 3 11 Advanced Channel Information Screen Table 3 7 Channel Configuration Field Definitions sec Time Out Timers Audio Hold Off 4 OE msec Hear Clear Wireline 120 sec Local 0 sec Compander DISABLED v Repeater 60 sec Noise Canceller DISABLED Alarm Tone DISABLED v W R gt M gt D gt L DISABLED v Help Add Channel Previous Channel Next Channel E gt Delete Channel Fare Recommended Data Field Description Range Selection Default MUR p g Setting if any Channel Number Identifies the current channel as one of 1 16 1 N A 16 possible channels Frequency Receive frequency in MHz for current Depends on band N A Frequency assigned by FCC and Rx2 chan
51. AppSttwr 509 02 000012011 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009017 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509F02N000012028 EXC PC509E02M000009017 7 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Table 7 3 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 and CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility continued RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE Version Rel Release Software IC Software Release Software IC Software erence Part Numbers Version Part Numbers Version SCM SCM SC_020_13_009 SCM SCML IR_020_12_541 R13 00 00 R13 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL 020 12 014 523 0 P651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL_020_12_014 App Sftw PC509F10300013009 B2 020_10 022 and 5 509 104000012541 Boot B2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 App Sftwr PC509F02N000012014 SZ4 1 509 02 000012014 EXC PC509E02M000009017 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC 020 13 017 SCM SCML IR 020 12 551 01 00 R13 01 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL 020 13 002 523 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_13_002 App Sftwr PC509F10300013017 2 020 13 001 and AppSftwr 509 104000012551 Boot B2 020 13 001 Boot2 PC5091002000013001 EXC
52. Boot2 PC5091002000009025 EXC 020 09 004 Boot2 5091002000009025 EXC 020 09 004 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC509500100009034 App Sftwr PC509500100009034 EXC PC5093104000009004 EXC PC5093104000009004 SCM SCM SC_020_09_068 SCM SCM 020 09 564 R09 i 07 00 R9 07 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 036 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 036 App Sftwr PC509F10300009068 Boot B2 020 09 026 App Sftwr PC509F10400009564 Boot B2 020 09 026 Boot2 PC5091002000009026 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 5091002000009026 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC509500100009036 App Sftwr PC509500100009036 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_006 SCM SCM IR_020_10_506 R10 00 00 R10 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_001 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_001 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010002 Boot B2_020_10_001 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010502 Boot B2_020_10_001 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 App Sftwr PC509500100010001 App Sftwr PC509500100010001 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 013 SCM SCM IR 020 10 513 R10 01 00 R10 01 P651 SIMM 0180706F52
53. Ionuoo 9A 94L 21529 Saunivaid 3HVALdOS Lv3d3H 8VO NI 2 11 ANY 55329 H3 1V3d3H 1Lv3d3H J13N3Hh03S OY LSYV3YV 1V201 ASVOTNWIS 1VNOILN3ANOO 1VNOILN3ANOO 792 v94 lV3d3au qeo ujxovaTiv4d aav 1V3d3u 989 Ul HOVETIVA aav 3N3uHno23s IAIM 1SVOTnMWIS 1VNOILN3ANOO 55800 ualvad3H 5 1V907 1VNOILN3ANOO OH LSV JAIM IVNOILN3ANOO 69 2220 226 Ov1 vulo3ds aav 1svolnWis dav 288X 55300 1 1Svo1nWis nvs aay SS399V H31V3d3ti aav 4 5 AaN3unoas 1 207 IVNOILN3ANOO IVNOLLNJ3ANOO 226 SS300V Hualvadau WYS Gav 697X OVv1 VH1O3dS AAY 15 5 2 869X JA3Nauunoasdav 1v20 SS399VY ualVadad IVNOLLNJANOO 3N3Hh23S 1 207 IVNOILNJ3ANOO SOIVNV 1 207 TWNOILNSANO9 IVNOILN3ANOO 226 SS329Vv ualvadau WYS 908X aav uo d 14SA 669X 2H PU LH SHA M OSE ouenD 692 sepniour X 69zx 869X Ov1 VHLO3dS aav LSVOTINWIS aav J13N3aunods aav M 001 YH M OLL M OLL 2 Se Zu Lg ZHW 006 oguenc 2 006 Jejueno uBnouul Lg s
54. Power Amplifier CAL POWER LEVEL ALARM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL TX FINL VSWR ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL TX HOLDOFF ACTIVE Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL TX INHIBIT ACTIVE Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL TX LOCK ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL TX LOCK INACTIVE Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL UNABLE START Exciter Power Amplifier old event detected V OPEN POWER LOOP ALARM Exciter Power Amplifier Outbound MDC message arrived V Outbound msg received V OUT OF BUFFERS V OVERRUN ERROR V OVERVOLTAGE ALARM Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier 5 18 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source CERE MELIA Internal Incorrectly Hardware System Programmed Failure Status RSS FIVE TEN MHZ LOST Perform auto netting Station Control procedure in Chapter 4 5 MHz External Reference PENDULUM LOST Station Control PA ALARM Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier PA LOW SUPPLY ALARM Power Supply Power Amplifier ALARM V PEND RECEIVE FAILED V PHYSICAL TX ERROR V PIB ALARM V PIB Board PL INACTIVE WHEN DPL ACTV V PORT ACCESS FAILURE V PP NVM PTTN ERROR Station Control Preempt mode failed V PRIORITY REQUEST FAILURE 4 PROCESS MOVE CMD V
55. QUANTAR QUANTRO MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2006 MoTOROLA INC 6881085E35 AG ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 12 30 2006 PRINTED IN U S A Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document include a copyrighted Motorola computer program Laws in the United States and other countries as well as International Treaties preserve for Motorola the exclusive rights for Motorola s copyrighted computer programs including the exclusive right to copy reproduce distribute or otherwise transfer said computer program s Accordingly the copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in this document may not be copied decompiled reverse engineered or reproduced in any manner and on or within any media without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Motorola except for the normal non exclusive royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product Document Copyrights Motorola Inc All rights reserved No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola No part of this document may be reproduced distributed or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechan
56. Source ME ated Internal Incorrectly tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS MTRING_STRT_STOP_MISMATCH V NACK ERROR V NEGATIVE BLOCK COUNT V NEW CODEPLUG RECV V NO BUFFERS 4 NO CMD FOUND Corrupt RSS installation corrupt upgrade installation NO LAST TX BUFFER V NO EXCITER MATCH Verify Programming NO FORWARD PWR Exciter Power Amplifier Non frame on frame Queue V non HH L1 L2 arrived V NON OCTET 4 Non preempt mode failed V NO PA DETECTED Verify Programming Power Amplifier NO RX BD OVERRUN V Not RDLAP 19200 V NOT ENOUGH MEMORY V null partition id V Null value variable 4 CONDITIONING ERROR Station Control ODR CAL CIRC TEMP ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL PA FAIL ACTIVE Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL FINL PA VSWR ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL NO FWD PWR ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Source pibe dus Internal Incorrectly TEM tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS ODR CAL NOT KEYED 2 SECS Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL OPN PWR LOOP ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL PA FAN ALRM Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL PA LO SUPPLY ALRM Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier ODR CAL PA TEMP ALRM Exciter
57. Table B 1 dBm to Microvolts Conversion dBm Microvolts dBm Microvolts 80 22 3606 106 1 1206 81 19 9289 107 0 9988 82 17 7617 108 0 8901 83 15 8301 109 0 7933 84 14 1086 110 0 7071 85 12 5743 111 0 6302 86 11 2068 112 0 5616 87 9 9881 113 0 5005 88 8 9019 114 0 4461 89 7 9338 115 0 3976 90 7 0710 116 0 3543 91 6 3020 117 0 3158 92 5 6167 118 0 2815 93 5 0059 119 0 2508 94 4 4615 120 0 2236 95 3 9763 121 0 1992 96 3 5439 122 0 1776 97 3 1585 123 0 1583 98 2 8150 124 0 1410 99 2 5089 125 0 1257 100 2 2360 126 0 1120 101 1 9928 127 0 0998 102 1 7761 128 0 0890 103 1 5830 129 0 0793 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER B DBM TO MICROVOLTS CONVERSION Table B 1 dBm to Microvolts Conversion continued 104 1 4108 130 0 0707 105 1 2574 B 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 APPENDIX Glossary Term Definition Alignment Adjustment procedures usually aided by RSS program that set the station operating parameters to meet the specifications Includes deviation power out and wireline levels Archive Files Codeplug backup file Base Base station The type of station in which transmit and receive frequencies usually the same Operates in simplex mode only Calibration Method of adjusting a circuit to meet critical operating parameters Call Sign FCC assigned ID of the licensee Typi
58. Verifying the Comparator s Configuration Data 4 2 Programming the 4 3 Programming the Hardware Configuration Screen 4 3 Programming the Conventional System Screen 4 5 Programming the Smartzone System 4 6 Programming the Analog Voting 4 4 6 Programming the Port Control 4 7 Performing Comparator 4 9 Equalizing ss ierste ns REA uy Pie eee PLA ERN RR ee hae et 4 10 Reference Oscillator Calibration 4 10 Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure 4 11 External Reference Oscillator 4 11 Chapter 5 Diagnostics and Status Station Comparator Status Messages 5 1 Station Metering Screens 5 2 Station Comparator Status Report Screen 5 3 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages 5 5
59. vH ep gs 5 17001 1VNOLLN3ANOO 22 OHLSV 1V901 1VNOILN3ANOO ZHN 008 9 seq Saunivad 3HVALLdOS quvaNvis 501VNV 1 201 1VNOILLN3ANOO gardodans SNOLLVIS Figure 7 3 Release R3 00 R3 01 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 24 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SS3900V Halv3dau 225 IAIM 5 17207 1SVOTnWIS lVNOILN3ANOO 6 SS320V Ha31V3d3u Wvs aav 2 SS399Y 3N3Hh23S IAIM aav 13N3Hn23SV3uV 17207 IVNOLLN3ANOO 3GIM LSVOTNWIS z 6x T1VNOILN3ANOO 869X SS320V 1 WYS aav 13NJ34N9IS AAY 697X OV1 VH123dS 692x sepnioul aav 222X LSVOINNIS aav SS390V H31V3d3H OHLSV 17207 5 1v901 1V201 TVNOILN3ANOS TEHORNIANOS 7VNOILN3ANOO jeuondo s unb 66 lt 692 5 AAY 21 23 5 AAY 869X LANAYNIAS aav uojenbs pepoo niniw euoug LLHIN Auliqedeo 226 OSHN SS399V Halv3adau WYS Sa3univad 3HvMLJOS aav WNOILdO OHLSV e
60. 12 PL and 1 DPL When finished the information is saved to the station codeplug When the station is placed into service and users begin placing calls their usage time is monitored and stored in station non volatile memory The RSS allows access to this information for display and saving to a text file 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE MULTI CODED SQUELCH TABLE SCREEN Multi coded squelch is allowed on only one channel To retrieve the multi coded squelch information such as usage time you must read the codeplug from the station Saving User Information To save multi coded squelch user data information such as usage times and number of calls you must first read the codeplug from the station However the information is not saved with the codeplug data when the codeplug is saved to an archive file To save the multi coded squelch MCS information click Save Report as shown in Figure 3 9 A browser window appears allowing you to browse to the desired directory and provide a name for the multi coded squelch data file Save in B My Documents 2 E x Adobe lt 2 Corel User Files My Recent Creator Documents tation Serial Number 448CAX0252 My eBooks My Music a My Pictures a My Shapes m My Videos ECS_view question sxw PL 103 5 14 3 Help gt Report 48 My Computer 2 DPL 051 My Documents File name
61. A timer in the comparator controls the length of time that the boosted charging voltage is applied and automatically sets the charging voltage to its normal level when the timer expires 3 Ifyou must stop the process manually click Turn Equalization Off Reference Oscillator Calibration Procedures 4 10 The circuit device s that set the comparator s reference frequency exhibit slight variations in their operating characteristics over time Approximately 9096 of these variations occur in the first year whether the comparator is in service or in storage and non operational Therefore it is necessary to calibrate the reference oscillator during optimization 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING COMPARATOR ALIGNMENT It is recommended that the frequency measurement equipment have an accuracy of 10 times greater than the accuracy required for the measurement For example if the frequency must be measured to be within 5 PPM the accuracy of the measurement equipment should be 0 5 PPM The reference oscillator calibration procedure depends on the comparator configuration There are two possible configurations Perform the calibration procedure that corresponds to the comparator s specific configuration Internal reference oscillator located on the comparator control board Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure on page 4 11 External source typically 5 MHz
62. DIU_3_NOACKS DL CMD QUEUE CREATE FAILED DLM_OPERATING_PROPERLY DOB_TIMEOUT DPL_INACTIVE_WHEN_PL_ACTV DPLL ERROR 415 5 5 5 5555 DRIVER_OVERDRIVE_ALARM Exciter Power Amplifier DSP_TIMEOUT lt DSTN_FILE_WRITE_ERROR V E A D RETURN V E BAD WC WRITE Station Control E BAD OPCODE lt E CREATE STREAM SOCKET EEPROM_CHKSUM_ALARM Exciter E_ERASE_FLASH E FRAME INDEX OUT OF SYNC E ILLEGAL PORT NUMBER END QSEND FAILED ENTERING FLASH MODE ENTERING NORMAL MODE E PARAMETER RANGE E PEND OUT OF BOUNDS ADJ ERASE FLASH REQ E RECEIVE SOCKET DATA 415 5 AA 55 5 5 5 515 ERROR IN COPY FILE 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 9 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectly TEM Status Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS ERROR IN PERFORM DECOMP V ERROR IN PROC APP HEADER V Error out of range V E STN NOT ACCESS DISABLED V E SWITCH SCS RESET REQ V E TIME DATE SET V E UHSO OUT OF BOUNDS ADJ V event received no message in Queue V E WC SCAN CMD TYPE V EXCEPTION Station Control EXCITER ALARM V Exciter Power Amplifier SPIF TIMEOUT 4 EXT CIRC
63. Direct Connection on page 11 47 Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional To connect to the station or comparator to perform Software Download using a remote connection using a dial up modem you must 1 Add a dial up modem that is used to connect to the device at a remote location See Adding a Dial Up Modem in Windows 2000 Professional on page 11 15 11 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 2 Adda SLIP connection that uses the modem you just added See Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Dial Up Modem Connection on page 11 17 Adding a Dial Up Modem in Windows 2000 Professional To add a dial up modem to connect to the device from a remote location install the dial up modem in your computer in accordance with the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer On completion of the new modem s installation or for an existing modem set up the dial up modem as directed in the procedure below 1 If not already open it opens by default when adding a new modem open the Modem Options window from Control Panel The following window appears Dialing Rules Modems Advanced The following moderns are installed Modem AttachedTo amp Standard 56000 bps V90 Modem COM1 Remove Properties DK Cancel Apply 2 Select the modem from the lis
64. Enable using RSS CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ANALOG WITH REPEATER ACCESS ADD SPECTRA TAC X269 CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ASTRO WITH REPEATER ACCESS CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREASECURENET WITH REPEATER ACCESS CONVENTIONAL WIDE AREA SECURENET Figure 7 2 Release R2 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 23 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES SS390V H3lV3d3H U3N3HnO3S 5 1V901 TWNOILNSANO9 15 5 IVNOILNJ3ANOO 226 553007 H3lv3dad WYS aav Guns GE VOUS diui SS399V HalV3daH 1VNOILN3ANOO LANTUN ay NOM 226 501VNV SS392V Halvadau 1SvOTnMWIS WYS aav 226 55300 Halvadau WYS Gav TWNOILNSANO9 692 OVI VHIO3dS AAY ssy Buisn 69 sepniour J13gN3auHno3as aav 242X LSVOTNNIS aav SS300V H31V3d3H 08157 1V201 TWNOILNSANO9 V3uv 5 1v901 IVNOILN3ANOO 501VNV V3HV 1V907 TWNOILNSANOD IVNOLLN3ANOO 554202 WYS 5 dav aay sauinba OSHN 1X3 ZHINOL ZHIN S 692 SSH ejqeua side OV1 VH1O3dS QQV 3w3unao3saav BuiKey W 9 3 pue LY SHA OSE oguenp Seuo uuelv 669X ZHIN 006
65. Fast Key Up Specifies whether the Fast Key Up feature is implemented Disabled Disabled Customer selected between the station and external device If enabled station Wideband feature transmitter key up time is shortened to 10 12 msec See Aux Tx Fast Keyup Feature section in station manual for details ASTRO RDLAP Repeat Specifies whether RDLAP data is repeated Disabled Enabled Depends on system Enabled configuration Wireline Drop Out Specifies the length of transmitter hang time following 0 255 sec 0 sec Depends on system Delay reception of last RDLAP data block configuration ASTRO Tx Filter Affects signal shaping so that the transmitted audio Wide Pulse Wide Pulse Depends on system occupies a 25 kHz wide or 12 5 kHz narrow channel Narrow Pulse configuration Coordinate with subscriber programming Analog Simulcast Specifies whether reverse burst is generated internally by Internal Internal Depends on system Reverse Burst station or by external equipment For conventional External configuration simulcast systems only SECURENET Rx code Detect Setting determines amount of time following a loss of Rx 0 9999 msec 80 msec 80 msec recommended Fade Timer Data before EOM is sent and call is terminated For example due to signal fade Fade EOM Timer Setting determines length of EOM signal transmitted 0 9999 msec 80 msec 80 msec recommended following expiration of the RX Code Detect Fade Timer 3 30 6881085E35 AG 12 30
66. General Options Security Networking Advanced Select a device Communication sable between two computers v Show icon in notification area when connected 18 Select the device you just added and then click Configure The following window appears Modem Configuration Communications cable between two computers COM1 Maximum speed bps 0 Modem protocol Hardware features C Enable hardware flow control C Enable modem error control C Enable modem compression C Show terminal window v Enable modem speaker 19 Select the desired baud rate and uncheck all other checkboxes You can only select baud rate values that are supported by RSS 7 mam See RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 for baud rate and connection name dependencies 11 32 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 20 Click OK The following window appears Select the Options tab and set the option selection as shown in the figure below CSS_SLIP_FP_9500_COM1 EER General Options Security Networking Advanced Dialing options v Display progress while connecting Prompt for name and password certificate etc C Include windows logon domain Redialing options Redial attempts 0 Time between redial attempts 1 minute Idle time before hanging up
67. None None Customer determined channel For example if channel 3 is specified and there Float are five channels in the scanning list then the scanning channel gt sequence is 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 1 Floating Priority Instead of specifying a priority channel this field allows Off Off Customer determined you to use the last active RX TX or either RX or TX RX channels to be the priority channel TX Priority Channel must be set to Float RX TX Channel Marking Allows a channel that has been determined to be active Off Off Customer determined during the scanning process but that is busy to be marked Normal When marked the scanning process does not wait the Priority normal 250 msec when sampling that channel but rather Normal waits only the 30 msec required for carrier detection Priority Scan Delay Specifies the amount of time after a non priority channel 0 to 10 000 msec 3000 msec Customer determined becomes inactive before the scanning process continues 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 33 PROGRAMMING THE SCAN LIST CONFIGURATION DATA Table 3 11 Scan List Configuration Data Fields continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION mer Range Recommended Data Field Description 9 Default Selections Setting if any Priority Scan Specifies the amount of time after a priority channel 0 to 10 000 msec 3000 msec Customer determined Delay becomes inactive before the scanning process cont
68. R1 through R4 12 5 kHz Channels Remote Dial Up Capability Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110W External Helerenee 83 110 W 100 W UHSO Quantar 900 MHz Full Sub Band Partition requires optional hardware Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE SMARTZONE SMARTZONE ASTRO INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG WIDE AREA SECURENET WIDE AREA ASTRO X999 X998 X990 Figure 7 34 Release 12 00 00 through 12 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SZ2 0 3 Trunking STATIONS SUPPORTED SOFTWARE FEATURES SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz I Remote RSS includes Quantar 800 MHz Battery Revert Station Password Protection 12 5 kHz Channels Remote Dial Up Capability Quantro UHF R1 through R4 5 10 MHz External Reference SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 4 1 Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W UHSO 110 W R4 100W Full Sub Band Partition Quantar 900 MHz ASTRO CAI requires optional hardware Quantro 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE SMARTZONE SMARTZONE ASTRO CAI INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG WIDE AREA SECURENET WIDE AREA ASTRO CAI X999 X998 X898 Note SECURENET is not supported beginning 1 1 02 Figure 7 35 Release 12 00 00 through 12 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1 Trunking 6
69. Status Incorrectly Programmed RSS Hardware Failure RX LOCK FAIL Incorrectly programmed receive frequency on Channel Information Screen Receiver Rx off but msg received RX SNET SYNC ERROR Receiver station id sending failed SAM ALARM 4 5 NSN SAM Board SAM_NOT_RESPONDING SAM Board SA_NVM_PTTN_ERROR Station Control SCAN_RX_ACT_INCOMPATIBLE Verify RSS Programming SCAN_ZERO_FREQS_INCOMPAT Verify RSS Programming Scc rx part create failed lt scc tx part create failed lt SC_NVM_PTTN_ERROR Station Control SC_REQUESTED_RETRANSMIT SCS_COMMAND SDMA_BUS_ERROR SECURENET_BUFFER_ERROR send DSP block failed SHTERM BACK TO BACK SHTERM NO TRK LC SHTERM RCVD DURING IDLE SITE CONTROL ERROR SOURCE FILE READ ERROR SPI BUFFER FULL SPI NOSPIF SPI TIMEOUT 57 5 LN SACSA SR_NVM_PTTN_ERROR Station Control 5 22 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source MEE ated Internal Incorrectly tatus Message System Programmed Fallure Status RSS STARTED_ANALOG_RX_WL_CALL V STARTED ANALOG WL CALL V START NVM CONDITIONING 4 STATION CTRL FAN FAIL Station Control cooling fan on backp
70. TX RX Wireline Level 1 KHz Peak Audio Level RX Wirekne Equnization Spectra S TRO T AC LO Boost Adjust Lewel 2400 Hz HI Boost Adjust Level 2566 Hz Boost Frequency Status Tone Level Below Peak Audio Alert Tone Level Below Peak Audio Power Output Current 50 _ dm 15 dBm 400 Tone Ott Sabon Note Radon is Currently ACCESS Station Status Not Keyed ME ASS Caremen M n BH Reterence Moduistion Compensation Battery Squech Adust RX reine ire 2 Stored 50 Stored 00 B 00 a 299 Stored 430 400 fave 2 Set the Status Tone Level as required by the System Installation Guidelines typically 10 dBm This example shows a setting of 13 dBm 1 Connect the station to the communications analyzer as shown in Figure 3 29 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT TO RECEIVE ANTENNA Figure 3 29 RSSI Alignment Test Setup 2 Click the RSSI Calibration tab The RSSI Calibration screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 69 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION BW 1X Weelne Reterence Moduisbon Compensation Ustery Loosiretbon Sech NEL Rx vwelne ne 2 pad M Bain
71. WL 020 12 004 523 0 P651 0180706 51 WL WL 020 12 004 App Sftwr PC509F10300012021 Boot 2 020 10 022 and App Sftwr 509 104000012508 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 010 Boot2 PC509F 104000010022 EXC 020 09 010 WL SZ4 1 509 02 000012004 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009010 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr _ PC509F02N000012004 EXC PC509E02M000009010 SCM SCM SC 020 12 024 SCM SCML IR 020 12 524 R12 03 00 R12 03 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 12 008 573 0 P651 0180706 51 WL WL 020 12 008 App Sftwr 509 10300012024 2 020 10 022 and App _ PC509F104000012524 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F 104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 WL SZ4 1 Sftwr 509 02 000012008 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009017 U135 5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509F02N000012008 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC_020_12_034 SCM SCML IR_020_12 524 R12 04 00 R12 04 P651 SIMM 0180706 52 WL WL_020_12_008 573 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 12 008 App Sftwr PC509F10300012034 2 020 10 022 and App Sftwr 509 104000012524 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 WL SZ4 1 Sftwr 509 02 000012008 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009017 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sft
72. and requires the dummy load 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 6 7 ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE FOR A QUANTRO 350W VHF STATION CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT Bypass Circulator with Bullet Pe Connector Here MALE N to MALE N CONNECTOR CIRCULATOR RF OUTPUT TO TRANSMIT ANTENNA TRANSMIT RF LOW PASS FILTER FROM POWER lt lt 4 AMPLIFIER MODULE I I Disconnect y Disconnect I td THERMISTOR i 50K 25 C MATES WITH CONNECTOR ON POWER TEMP SENSE CABLE I HEAT SINK J DUMMY IN LINE LOAD WATTMETER Figure 6 3 Power Output Alignment Setup for Quantro 350W Stations 2 Click Hardware Configuration in the navigation pane The Hardware Configuration screen appears 6 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE FOR A QUANTRO 350W VHF STATION Serial Number 448CAX0252 Station BOSTON FIRE Hardware Platform System Type CONVENTIONAL Station Type ANALOG ONLY Rx Freq Band 1 VHF_R2 150 174 MHz Tx Freq Band vHF R2 150 174 MHz Rx Freq Band 2 NONE MHz PA Power Rating 350 Watts with No Circulator er Supply QUAM Battery Type r Options Wireline SAWIRE WildCard ENHANCED Freq Ref INTERNAL STA
73. latest version codeplug INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt EMERGENCY RQST Misprogrammed DOWNGRADE subscriber radio 5 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source CRM Internal Incorrectly tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt FROM CNSL Misprogrammed MULTIGRP RQST ON TALKGRP subscriber radio INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt FROM CNSL NOT Misprogrammed EMERGENCY CAPABLE subscriber radio INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt FROM CNSL TALKGRP Misprogrammed RQST ON MULTIGRP subscriber radio INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt FROM RADIO Misprogrammed MULTIGRP RQST ON TALKGRP subscriber radio INDV ID lt xxxx gt GRP lt xxxx gt FROM RADIO Misprogrammed TALKGRP RQST ON MULTIGRP subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx GRP xxxx FROM WRLN Misprogrammed MULTIGRP RQST ON TALKGRP subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx GRP xxxx FROM WRLN TALKGRP Misprogrammed RQST ON MULTIGRP subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx GRP ID xxxx INVALID GRP Misprogrammed RECEIVED FROM CNSL subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx GRP ID xxxx INVALID GRP Misprogrammed RECEIVED FROM RADIO subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx MULTIGRP xxxx TLKGRP Misprogra
74. msec Channel TX Slave ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED e Wh Figure 3 16 Scan List Configuration Screen In general the data fields in the upper portion of the screen relate to scanning parameters that affect the overall scanning process The lower portion of the screen is used to select the channels to be included in the scanning list and to determine which channels if any are to be used as repeater channels To access the Scan List Configuration screen click Scan List Configuration in the navigation pane See Table 3 11 for the screen s data fields The channels listed in the table four are shown in Figure 3 16 are the available channels for the particular station Use this table to enable or disable the scanning feature for the listed channel s The data fields in the TX Slave column allow you to set one or more of the scanning channels to act as repeater channels For example when the scanning process detects a carrier on a scanning channel the transmitter is keyed while locked on that channel Table 3 11 Scan List Configuration Data Fields Range Recommended Data Field Description 9 Default E Selections Setting if any Scan On At Reset Specifies whether the station initiates the scanning process Enabled Disabled Customer determined when reset Disabled Priority Channel Specifies if any channel is used as a priority scanning
75. perform the following procedure From the Tools menu select Set and MAC Address as shown Figure 3 1 Set IP and MAC Address window appears Set IP and MAC Address guration Help and MAC Address Settings 4 Connection configuration Stored Set device date and time 5 ress Set IP and MAC address h Device IP Address 1451150200 14511460200 sePAwes Set device password ontigurat show CodePlug size Physical Address D8003ec5d4c8 O8003ecSd4c8 Set Physical Address CodePlug upgrade 4 el gupg Please reset the device for the stored value to take effect Enable Disable Station Enter each Component of the IP Address from 0 to 255 No leading zeros required Figure 3 1 Accessing the IP Address Field 2 Enter the IP address in accordance with your system s network documentation 3 When done click Set IP Address The following message window appears RSS Information i IP address is successfully set Click the restart button to put it in effect 4 Click OK The window closes 5 You must reset the station to set its IP address to the value you entered If you do not reset the station at this point the IP you entered is not set in the device To reset the device click Reset The device restarts and uses the IP address you entered when it completes the restart process 3 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERV
76. recommended CSC Logical Channel Specifies the logical channel number to which 1 32 1 Depends on system Number this repeater is assigned configuration Rx Discriminator Type Specifies the Rx Discriminator Audio QUANTAR Micor QUANTAR Depends on system characteristics for stations at a 6809 trunking MSF Micor configuration site Programming the Scan List Configuration Data 3 32 The channel scanning feature allows conventional stations and subscribers to continuously scan through a list of channels looking for carrier activity If a carrier is detected the scanning process is suspended When the carrier is no longer detected the scanning process resumes Scanning may be programmed to start automatically on the station reset or under manual control from the console mm Scanning Receiver must be enabled on the Hardware Configuration screen The Scan List Configuration screen Figure 3 16 provides the parameters necessary to determine the channels in the scanning list set a priority channel and to set timing periods related to channel scanning 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE SCAN LIST CONFIGURATION DATA Scan On At Reset ENABLED v Scan Delay 300 Priority Channel FLOAT v Priority Scan Delay 300 msec Floating Priority Scan Sample Time 30 msec Channel Marking NORMAL Rx Qualify Time 250 msec Resume Scan Timer 500
77. 0 xj Servke Configuration Took Help 41 3 4 Configuration Hardware Configuration a Ste General Sie Timer Dand Patton Rado Modulsiion Partition Repeater Information Repeater Summary RF Configuration a a Paj Service x 2 Please Verl y Startup Chan 1 49 Serisi Number 537 CAX0049 Do you wish to continue LYes esse 4 Click Yes to start the codeplug write operation The progress of the write operation appears When the operation is complete an RSS message window asks whether you would like to reset the device SAVING COOEPLUG TO DEVICE SAVING COOFPLUG TO DEVICE T Do You Wish To Reset Al Stations This Ste Yes J No 5 Click Yes to reset all connected IntelliRepeaters to activate the codeplug message window appears stating that a reset is in progress 3 50 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN A SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 OR 4 1 SYSTEM Device Reset In Progress When Front Panel Returns To Normal The Reset Command Is Complete Check Status Report For New Alarms 6 Click Continue On reset the following window appears The Codeplug Has Been Successfully Programmed Into The Connected Device 7 Click Continue The display returns to the main RSS window
78. 008 josie poseg ZHN 008 oguenp 9 seg OSHN GaLYOddNS SNOILVLS Saunivad 3HVALLdOS lt 1 3HvMLJOS Figure 7 23 Release R7 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 44 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 LSVOTNINIS ONDINAYL 15 6089 OHLSV V3HV ONDINnH L 6089 L3N3Hh103S LSVOTANIS 688X 888 LSVOTNINIS 539 686 08157 ONDINAYL 15 6089 J3NOZLUVIIS Auigedeo dr jeiq Sjeuueu zpx 521 688X seumnbog ONDINNYL 6089 888 Dd 1Svo1nWis 69x O2VI VH IO23dS aav OH1SV 31IS 315NIS ONDINNYL OULSV 6089 202 LANLYVNS 6072 ANOZLYVNS Autiqedeo dn IeIq uonosjoJd PIOMSSEd 5 5 SSH ejoueH yiiqedeo illqedeO 8 6 2 sepniour yose 21529 OSHN 58801 83 JHVMLJOS 58801 83 SYVMLIOS QuvaNvis TWNOILdO LSVOTANIS ONDINNYL 6089 3N3Hn123S IAIM SNPINnH L 6089 966 1 5 ALIS 319NIS ONDINNYL 6089 692x sepnioul X LSVOTNINIS SOTVNV dav
79. 008 Boot2 PC5091002000010008 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010008 EXC 020 09 005 WL SZ3 0 U134 PC5095204000010812 U134 PC5095204000010812 U135 PC5095104000010812 U135 PC5095104000010812 App Sftwr PC509500100010014 App Sftwr PC509500100010014 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_058 SCM SCM IR_020_10_552 R10 06 00 R10 06 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_018 573 0 651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_018 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010058 Boot B2_020_10_012 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010552 Boot B2_020_10_012 Boot2 PC5091002000010012 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010012 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010018 App Sftwr PC509500100010018 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_066 SCM SCM IR_020_10_560 R10 07 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_021 573 0 651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL_020_10_021 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010066 Boot B2_020_10_016 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010560 Boot B2_020_10_016 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_066 SCM SCM IR_020_10_565 R10 07 00 R10 08 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_
80. 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F 104000013001 EXC 020 09 017 App Sftwr PC509F02N000013002 SZ4 1 AppSfiwr PC509F02N000013002 EXC PC509E02M000009017 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC_020_13 022 SCM SCML IR_020_12_551 R13 02 00 R13 02 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 13 002 523 0 P651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL 020 13 002 App Sftwr _ PC509F10300013022 _ Boot B2 020 13 001 and AppSftwr 509 104000012551 Boot B2 020 13 001 Boot2 PC5091002000013001 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000013001 EXC 020 09 017 App Sftwr PC509F02N000013002 SZ4 1 App Sftwr 509 02 000013002 EXC PC509E02M000009017 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC_020_14_Oxx SCM SCML IR_020_14_501 14 00 00 R14 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_14_Oxx 523 0 P651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL_020_14_001 App Sftwr PC509F103000140xx Boot B2_020_14_001 and App Sftwr PC509F1040000145xx Boot B2 020 14 001 Boot2 PC5091002000014001 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000014001 EXC 020 09 017 App Sftwr PC509F02N000014000 SZ4 1 Sftwr PC509F02N000014501 EXC PC509E02M000009017 EXC PC509E02M000009017 Notes 1 The software versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu or by selecting Status Panel Software Version Set Date and Time from the Service menu 2 Stations in systems running SZ2 0 3 are not software download capable 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION CO
81. 07 018 0652 5191020126 016 07 001 0652 5191022034 EXC 16 06 001 U653 5191020L27 U653 519102235 U65 5191020128 1654 5191022 36 WL WL U134 5191013H99 U134 5191013H99 U135 5191013H98 U135 5191013H98 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 SCM IR 16 08 503 R8 0 572 03 519102237 WL 16 07 018 U652 519102238 EXC 16 06 001 U653 519102239 U654 5191022041 WL U134 5191013H99 U135 5191013H98 EXC U3701 5191012P14 SCM SCM 016 08 004 SCM IR 16 08 508 R8 U651 5191020L37 WL 016 08 002 522 03 5191022C46 WL 16 08 002 U652 5191020L38 EXC 016 07 001 U652 5191022C47 EXC 16 06 001 U653 5191020L39 U653 5191022C48 U65 5191020L40 U654 5191022C49 WL WL U134 5191013L28 U134 5191013L28 U135 5191013L27 U135 5191013L27 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 R8 2 SCM SCM 016 08 006 U651 5191020L88 WL 016 08 002 U652 5191020L89 EXC 016 07 001 U653 5191020L90 U654 51910201 91 WL U134 5191013L28 U135 5191013L27 EXC U3701 5191012P14 SCM SCM 016 08 008 SCM IR 16 08 508 R8 3 U651 PC5091104000008008 WL 016 08 003 2Z2 0 3 5191022646 WL 16 08 003 0652 PC5091204000008008 EXC 016 07 001 U652 5191022647 16 06 001 0653 PC5091304000008008 U653 5191022648 0654 PC5091404000008008 U654 5191022C49 WL WL U134 PC5095104000008003 U134 PC5095104000008003 U135 PC5095204000008003 U135 PC5095204000008003 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 SCM SCM 016 08 010 SCM IR 16 08 511 R8 5 U651 PC50911
82. 11 1 PREREQUISITES CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Prerequisites Only QUANTAR and Quantro stations ASTRO TAC comparators and ASTRO TAC receivers that are equipped with FLASH memory allow software downloading Verify that the Motorola model numbers for the station control board wireline interface board and wireline power supply board are as follows The model number is printed on an adhesive label on the component side of the board along with a bar code as follows e QUANTAR Quantro Stations Station control board ntelliRepeater CLN6960 Conventional 6809 CLN6961 Data base station CLN6962 Wireline interface board 4 wire North America CLN6955 8 wire North America CLN6956 4 wire International CLN6957 8 wire International CLN6958 e ASTRO TAC Receivers Wireline power supply board TTN5041 Station control board CLN6873 ASTRO TAC Comparator Flash Capable Comparator Control Board CLN7361 Flash Capable Wireline Board CLN7343 mm If your station receiver is equipped with a model different than those listed above the station operating software is contained in EPROMs you may not use the Software Download feature unless the module has been upgraded with FLASH memory Refer to FLASHport Upgrades Ordering Guide for details 11 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS Preparing PC for Software Downloa
83. 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 OF FIGURES RSS Window OvVverview Ro epicuri pla exe of nrd idein 2 2 RSS E ENS 2 3 assidue 2 3 Null Modem Cable Wiring 6 2 13 RSS Cable a 2 13 Connection Screen 2 16 RSS Information and Function Screens 2 21 Codeplug Size Information Window 2 2 22 Accessing the IP Address 3 6 Accessing the MAC Address 441 2 1 3 7 Set Date and Time 3 8 Wireline Configuration Screen Examples Analog Only Station Type 3 9 Wireline Configuration Screen Tab Examples ASTRO Capable or ASTRO CAI Capable Station 3 10 Access Code Table Screens 3 13 Access Code Table Screens 3 15 Multi Coded Squelch Table 3 16 Save Report Button to Save MCS
84. 2800 Hz measurements are equal If the preceding procedure does not produce an optimally equalized phone line repeat the procedure using five evenly spaced alignment tones such as 2200 2350 2500 2650 and 2800 Hz Procedure E Aligning TX Wireline Procedure 3 66 1 If present disconnect the phone line connected at the orange screw terminal otherwise proceed to the next step If phone line connections have been made through the 50 pin Telco connector disconnect it otherwise proceed to the next step Click the TX Wireline tab The TX Wireline screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL M Reference Mock ntion Compensation Battery Squeich Acgust W Rx reine 2 Retererce Oscilstor TX Devestion B Power RSS B 2 OR AVRE TX VMRELINE INPUT CALIBRATION Currert Stored Tx Wireline Level Line 1 1 2 10 dBm Level Line 3 1KHz dm gue Current Tx Vareline Syunich Treeshokt d m Hysteresis dem Transmit Frequency MHIX Calibration Procedure In 4 wire configuration input 1 Tone to Line 1 In 2 wire configuration inpur a 1KHz Tone ro Line 2 The input level 0 to 35 dBm is selected by the installer After calibration this input level will result in 60 of TX Rated Deviation To perform and store the calibration press rhe Tx Wireline Calibrati
85. 31 Programming the Scan List Configuration Data on page 3 32 Programming the IntelliRepeater on page 3 35 3 1 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 6 Save the updated configuration data to a file on the RSS computer as an archive of the device s current configuration as outlined in Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File on page 2 23 7 Savethe updated configuration data to the device s codeplug as outlined in Writing Codeplug Data to the Device on page 2 21 8 Perform the following alignments on the device Rx Wireline Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure on page 3 57 Tx Wireline Procedure E Aligning TX Wireline Procedure on page 3 66 RSSI Calibration Aligning Radio Signal Strength Indicator RSSI on page 3 68 Squelch Adjust Aligning Squelch Adjust Procedure on page 3 71 Battery Equalization if battery equipped Equalizing Batteries on page 3 73 Reference Oscillator of UHSO Calibrating Reference Oscillator Procedure on page 3 75 ASTRO Alignment and Test if required Setting ASTRO Tx Align and Test Procedure on page 3 82 ASTRO Pattern Generator Generating ASTRO Test Patterns on page 3 85 TDATA Calibration if required TDATA Calibration 6809 Trunking Station Only on page 3 88 ASTRO Bit Error Rate Reports ASTRO only ASTRO Bit Error Rate Reports on page 3 90 9 Perform tests to verify that optimi
86. 50 kHz of Channels VHF and UHF trunking spectrum is divided by FCC into 380 possible Rx channels and 380 possible Tx channels per band 0 380 As determined by the Station Configuration Programming the Site General Parameters 6881085E35 AG Click Site General in the navigation pane to access the Site General screen Figure 3 19 See Table 3 14 for the screen s data fields Information System D 0000 Sie D 1 Ste REMOTE Repeaters Sie 01 Full Spectrum Scan Support DIAPRED w Minima Repenters To Trunk 1 Token Repeater Number 1 Connect Tone 0 105 9Hz V ASTRO Fodlx Access Code 000 on Controt Maximum Control Channel Range 75 25 Intertace interface 24 Ddemsi Check OIGAPLED Zone Controller Link Party V 24 HYBRID Figure 3 19 Site General Screen 12 30 2006 3 37 PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Table 3 14 Site General Screen Data Fields CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION eR Range Recommended Setting if Data Field Description selections Default any System ID A four digit field for entry of the system ID 0001 FFFF hex 0000 As determined by the system number configuration must be the same as TCMS system ID Site ID A two digit field for entry of the repeater 1 to 64 1 As determined by the system site ID number used to inform zone
87. 5191022C32 WL WL U134 5191013H66 U134 5191022H66 U135 5191013H65 U135 5191022H65 EXC EXC U3701 5191013P13 U3701 5191013P14 SCM SCM 15 06 009 SCM IR 16 06 521 R6 01 U651 5191020L01 WL 15 06 011 572 0 3 0651 5191022C33 WL 16 06 011 U652 5191020L02 EXC 13 05 002 U652 5191022634 13 05 002 0653 5191020103 0653 5191022635 0654 5191020104 0654 5191022636 WL WL U134 5191013H68 U134 5191013H68 U135 5191013H67 U135 5191013H67 EXC EXC U3701 5191013P13 U3701 5191013P14 SCM SCM 16 06 018 SCM IR 16 06 521 R6 02 U651 5191020L05 WL 16 06 013 572 0 3 0651 5191022C33 WL 16 06 013 U652 5191020L06 EXC 13 05 002 U652 5191022034 EXC 13 05 002 U653 5191020L07 U653 5191022C35 U65 5191020L08 U654 5191022C36 WL WL U134 5191013H70 U134 5191013H70 U135 5191013H69 U135 5191013H69 EXC EXC U3701 5191013P13 U3701 5191013P14 7 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 7 2 4094 and TRN7900 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility continued RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Conventional 6809 Trunking RSS IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE Version 5 Firmware IC Firmware Release IC Part No a Release Release Version Part No Version SCM SCM 016 07 015 SCM IR 16 06 521 R7 00 R7 00 U651 5191020L13 WL 016 07 008 572 0 3 0651 5191022C33 WL 16 07 008 U652 5191020L14 EXC 16 06 001 U652
88. 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 Figure 7 36 Figure 7 37 Figure 7 38 Figure 7 39 Figure 9 1 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 LIST OF FIGURES Release R3 00 R3 01 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 40 Release R4 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 41 Release R5 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 42 Release R6 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 43 Release R7 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 44 Release R07 02 02 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 45 Release R09 00 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 46 Release R09 02 01 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 47 Release R09 03 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking Release R09 05 00 R09 06 00 R09 07 00 R10 00 00 through R10 08 00 R10 11 00 R10 12 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 2 ier geo 7 49 Release R12 01 00 through R12 03 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 eire etra o iei bei vo sued ted bes c dus 7 50 Release R13 00 00 through R14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities C809 7 51 Release 522 0 Features and
89. ANALOG SINGLE SITE SECURENET X997 X996 ADD SPECTRA TAC ADD X269 CONSOLE PRIORITY ADD SPECTRA TAC INTERFACE X269 C115 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG SINGLE 5 pem WIDE AREA SECURENET Figure 7 18 Release R2 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 39 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES STATIONS SUPPORTED STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz Basic TRC QUANTAR VHF R1 and R2 Battery Revert Quantro UHF R1 through R3 12 5 kHz Channels QUANTAR 900 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz External Reference Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 UHSO Failsoft z requires optional hardware 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING SINGLE SITE ANALOG SINGLE SITE SECURENET X997 X996 ADD SPECTRA TAC X269 ADD SIMULCAST X777 Includes X269 ADD SIMULCAST X777 Includes X269 ADD CONSOLE PRIORITY ADD SPECTRA TAC INTERFACE X269 C115 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG SUM WIDE AREA SECURENET 6809 TRUNKING 6809 TRUNKING SIMULCAST SIMULCAST WIDE AREA ANALOG WIDE AREA SECURENET Figure 7 19 Release R3 00 R3 01 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 40 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SOTWNV LSVOTNNIS 6089
90. As determined by system Malfunction service after a carrier malfunction is detected 254 time delay is infinite configuration Carrier Sets the time a station waits for radio handshakes 100 6300 msec 500 As determined by system to be established before leaving the assigned channel configuration 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 39 PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Table 3 15 Site Timer Screen Data Fields continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Message Trunk Sets the time the station waits before dekey after 100 6300 msec 1000 As determined by system receiving the disconnect tone configuration Fade Sets the wait time before deassigning a channel 100 6300 msec 1200 As determined by system after handshakes are lost but no disconnect tone is configuration received Programming Radio Modulation Partition Screens Click Radio Modulation Partition in the navigation pane to access the Radio Modulation Partition screen See Figure 3 21 for these screens See Table 3 17 for the screen s data fields ID Block HEX ID Low HEX ID High Modulation 1 0000 FFFF Figure 3 21 Radio Modulation Partition Screen Table 3 16 Radio Modulation Partition Screen Data Fields ID Block A sequential number that represents a given ID range Depends on system design Hex ID Low This represents the low byte of the ID range Depends on system design Hex ID High This represents the high byte of the ID range Depends on syst
91. Base Radio 3 3 Configuration 20000900009 6 6 Hardware Configuration Wireline Configuration Access Code Table Channel Information TRC Command Table RF Configuration WildCard Input Meterin Screen Status Regort Screen Test And M amp asurement Screen Status Panel Screen X Wireline line 4 B TX Wireline B TDATA Calibration B Reference Modulation Compensation B Battery Equalization B Squelch Adjust B RX Wireline line 2 B Reference Oscillator B TX Deviation 18 Power Output B RSSI Calibration Rated Power Out 20 WATTS Power Read Wattmeter 0 01 WATTS 853 9125 MHz Transmit Frequency l Press the P INIT button 2 KEYUP the Station 3 Enter power read on the wattmeter 4 Press the ADJUST button and wait for Station response 5 If the Station is at desired power press the SAVE button 6 If the station is not at desired power repeat steps 3 and 4 Note If an error occurs during adjustment press the P INIT button to clear the error and set the P to an initial value Restart the alignment process PA INIT KEYUP ADJUST SAVE DEKEY Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS DISABLED Station Status Not Keyed 5 Click KEYUP 6 Read the power output as displayed by the wattmeter 7 Enter the value displayed by the wattmeter into the Power Read on Wattmeter field 8 Click ADJUST The station automatically adjusts its output power N
92. Calculate the mathematical average of the three voltmeter readings and compare the result to the value measured in step 13 of Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 Example 2200 Hz Level 21 9 dBm 2500 Hz Level 22 8 dBm 2800 Hz Level 23 7 dBm Total 68 4 dBm 68 4 3 22 8 dBm 3 65 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 10 11 12 13 14 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Because 22 8 dBm is equal to the value measured in step 13 of Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 the equalization may be considered optimally set and no further action is required However if the result in the above calculation is different than the value measured in step 13 of Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 the Hi Boost Adjust Level proceed to step 10 Subtract the average as calculated above from the value measured in step 13 of Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 Add the value from the previous step to the value currently displayed in the Hi Boost Adjust Level field In this case 23 2 dBm 22 8 dBm 0 4 dBm 0 4 dBm 4 7 dBm 5 1 dBm Enter 5 1 in the Hi Boost Adjust Level current field Click Save Repeat steps 3 through 13 until the value measured in step 13 of Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 and the average of the 2200 2500 and
93. Connector located on the station backplane For normal operation without WildCard Option many of these outputs have pre defined functions as described in the Backplane section of the appropriate QUANTAR or Quantro Station Functional Manual However with the WildCard Option available and enabled through the RSS the function of each pre defined output as well as each undefined output may be customized usually to implement one or more WildCard Functions An additional feature is the ability to select pre defined combinations of outputs binary groups When used with a properly programmed WildCard Function this feature allows the station to report to external equipment such as a console the current station operating channel Access Code Table or MCS user For example Binary Group 1 is comprised of station outputs 1 2 3 and 4 and may be used to allow the station to report the current operating channel to external equipment such as a console For example 0010 reports that the station is currently operating on Channel 2 10 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION AUXILIARY OUTPUTS Programming the Wildcard Output Screen This screen is available when the WildCard Option is set to either Basic or Enhanced on the Hardware Configuration screen To access the WildCard Output screen click WildCard Output in the navigation pane see Figure 10 2 See Table 10 2 for the screen s data fields
94. Data Fields Description Selections Default if any Failure Specifies the key wordin N A No Dialtone Default is Hayes compatible modem status message Otherwise refer to modem that indicates no dial tone user guide on phone line Failure Specifies the key wordin N A Error Default is Hayes compatible modem status message Otherwise refer to modem that indicates some form user guide of communications error has occurred Failure Specifies the key wordin N A Time out Default is Hayes compatible modem status message that indicates exceeded time out threshold internal to modem occurred between dialing and carrier detect Otherwise refer to modem user guide 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PC MODEM CONFIGURATION 9 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CHAPTER 9 REMOTE DIAL UP 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 WildCard Operation 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER 10 This chapter describes the operation of the WildCard option and how to make the various settings to implement custom WildCard functions The WildCard option is a purchasable option that can be enabled on any QUANTAR or Quantro station or QUANTAR or ASTRO TAC receiver The WildCard option provides a powerful user friendly tool that is used to initiate specific functions whenever certain specific conditions are met The relationship between the function that is executed and the conditions that initiate it is specified in the WildCard Action Table which conta
95. Delays Save Link Delays Help Local Control Toggle Force Vote Toggle Vote Disable Figure 5 5 Status Panel Screen Example Primary Comparator an Expanded Configuration 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Current Chassis Number PRIMARY diut kile STATION Failed STATION2 RCVRI ke ____ rd 7171 BEEN EIER 9919119171 Voted Port Chassis Previous Comperator Next Gomgaralor GetLink Delays Link Delays Local Control Toggle Force Vote Toggle Vote Disable Figure 5 6 Status Panel Screen Example Standard Comparator After clicking Status Panel Screen in the navigation pane various comparator operating and maintenance information appears The buttons on the screen are described in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Comparator Status Panel Screen Buttons General Buttons Next Comparator Changes comparator incrementally Prev channel Changes comparator decrementally Get Link Delays Save Link Delays Help Context sensitive help Local Control Toggle Force Vote Toggle Vote Disable Check Boxes Vote Port Force Vote 5 29 SETTING DATE AND TIME CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Station Comparator Software Version The Version Screen provides the currently installed sof
96. Description Selections Default if any Drop to Specifies whether modem Enabled Enabled System dependent hang up pulls RS 232 DTR line Disabled low when hanging up Wait for Specifies the maximum 1 to 999 seconds 60 seconds Determined by user Ensure Connect length of time modem value is less than time to wait attempts to successfully for carrier after dial S connect to a remote register setting internal to modem before RSS hangs modem Refer to the modem up and retries see Pause user guide between Calls Pause Specifies the amount of 1 to 999 seconds 5 seconds Determined by user between time before RSS redials CAlls after an unsuccessful connection attempt Modem Response Strings for Connect Specifies the key wordin N A Connect Default is Hayes compatible modem status message Otherwise refer to modem that indicates a successful user guide connection Busy Specifies the key wordin N A Busy Default is Hayes compatible modem status message Otherwise refer to modem that indicates called user guide modem phone is busy Failure Specifies the key wordin N A No Carrier Default is Hayes compatible modem status message that indicates no carrier signal from called modem Otherwise refer to modem user guide 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 9 1 RSS PC Modem Configuration Data Fields continued Valid Range PC MODEM CONFIGURATION Recommended Setting
97. Detect and Undetect states by assigning up to eight station commands per current level When the tone is generated by a tone remote console the commands are performed in sequence 3 27 PROGRAMMING DC REMOTE COMMAND DATA CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Program the DC remote command data as directed by the system designer as follows 1 Click DC Command Table in the navigation pane The DC Configuration Table screen appears Figure 3 13 12 5 Detect gt Undetect 5 5 ma Detect CHN 001 KEY ON Undetect KEY OFF 2 5 Figure 3 13 DC Command Table Screen 2 Click the cursor in the desired field to start entering commands through the keyboard vu 1 2 p 3 4 5 6 7 _p 8 Undetect 3 For any displayed tone in the DC Command Table screen enter the desired command from Table 3 8 in the cells for that current level up to six commands per current level Repeat step 2 for all other current levels if required The only command that does not apply to DC Remote Commands Data is KEY 3 28 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE RF CONFIGURATION DATA SCREEN Programming the RF Configuration Data Screen The RF Configuration screen allows you to specify operating parameters and system timing values for the station The default values programmed into this screen at the factory represent standard typical values and in most case
98. IP Address field as follows leaving the rest blank Ifthe connection being configured connects to the front port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 5 If the connection being configured connects to the back port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 4 Click Advanced The following window appears Advanced TCP IP Settings General DNS WINS This checkbox only applies when you are connected to a local network and a dial up network simultaneously When checked data that cannot be sent on the local network is forwarded to the dial up network Use default gateway on remote network Uncheck the Use default gateway on remote network check box Click OK on all windows until you reach the Network Connections screen When you finish clicking OK on all windows a Connect window appears offering you the opportunity to connect to the device Click Cancel to close the Connect window mm You cannot connect to the device using the Connect window a successful connection can only be made using the RSS 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS You are now ready to perform the SWDL procedure to upgrade the device s software See Serial Direct Connection on page 11 47 Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional To connect to the station or comparator to perform Software Download using a remote co
99. Modem 37 dBm V 24 Link System dependent and the device Modem 28 dBm Internal V24 Link Internal Transmit Transmit Clock Clock e V 24 Link External Transmit Clock Hybrid Link Internal Transmit Clock Hybrid Link External Transmit Clock Digital Input Specifies the amount of time required fora digital 0 to 999 msec 0 msec System dependent Delay signal to travel from the station s wireline port to the comparator s input wireline port 4 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING COMPARATOR ALIGNMENT Table 4 5 Port Control Screen Data Fields nee Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default M Setting if any DIU Rank For a port connected to a DIU only Specifies the to 15 0 System dependent rank among all connected DIUs that this port is given Data Site Steering Specifies the port number of the transmitting base 1 to 16 1 System dependent Port stations that is closest to this port s receiver Modem Fields conventional systems only Input Level Specifies the numerical difference between the 20 to 3 dB 0dB System dependent Differential port s modem or idle tone input signal level and the port s analog voice input signal level Analog Output Specifies the output signal level used when 0 to 20 dBm 14dBm System dependent Level transmitting an analog signal Modem Output Specifies the signal level leaving the c
100. NOT_INSTALLEO NOT NGTALLEO NOT INSTALLED INOT INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NSTALLED MOT MSTALLED INSTALLED PGTALLEO NOT STALLED NOTINSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT MSTALLED INSTALLEO NOT INSTALLEO INO INSTALLED MOT MGTALLED NSTALLID NOT INSTALL NOT NSTALLID 8 NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED WOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED Primary Comparator in an Expanded Standard Comparator or Secondary Comparator in Configuration an Expanded Configuration Performing Upgrades There are two possible upgrade paths Upgrading a station s codeplug to R14 firmware Upgrading an archived codeplug file of a previous version of firmware to R14 firmware Upgrading the Station s Codeplug You can upgrade the station s current codeplug to that of this RSS codeplug version 1 Check the current version of the station s codeplug loaded in the RSS See Verifying the Device s Configuration Data on page 3 3 2 Check the RSS s codeplug version by clicking Help then About The About window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 19 PERFORMING UPGRADES 7 20 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES About Radio Service Software MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Version 0 9 7 July 2005 Codeplug Version 12 Warning This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or a
101. P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 028 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 028 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009042 Boot B2 020 09 016 App Sftwr 5091103000009542 _ Boot B2 020 09 016 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 001 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095101000009028 App Sftwr 5095101000009028 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 R9 04 SCM SCM 5 020 09 044 SCM SCM IR 020 09 544 P651 SIMM 0180706252 WL WL_020_09_028 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 028 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009044 Boot B2 020 09 016 App Sftwr 5091103000009544 Boot B2 020 09 016 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 003 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 003 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095101000009028 App Sftwr 5095101000009028 EXC PC5093104000009003 EXC PC5093104000009003 R9 04 03 SCM SCM 5 020 09 044 SCM SCM IR 020 09 544 i P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 028 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 028 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009044 Boot B2 020 09 021 App Sftwr 5091103000009544 Boot B2 020 09 021 Boot2 PC5091002000009021 EXC 020 09 003 Boot2 PC5091002000009021 EXC 020 09 003 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095101000009028 App
102. SCM P651 SIMM App Sftwr Boot2 WL U134 U135 EXC Software IC Part Numbers 0180706F47 KC509024000100400 PC509 1002000010004 PC5095204000010008 PC5095 104000010008 PC5093 104000009005 0180706F47 KC509024000100500 PC509 1002000010007 PC5095204000010012 PC5095104000010012 PC5093104000009005 0180706F47 KC509024000100600 PC5091002000010012 PC5095204000010018 PC5095104000010018 PC5093104000009005 0180706F47 KC509024000100700 PC5091002000010016 PC5095204000010021 PC5095104000010021 PC5093104000009005 Software Version 1 LQ 020 10 703 WL 020 10 008 B2 020 10 004 020 09 005 LQ 020 10 708 WL 020 10 012 B2 020 10 007 020 09 005 LQ 020 10 712 020 10 018 B2 020 10 012 020 09 005 LQ 020 10 717 WL 020 10 021 B2 020 10 016 020 09 005 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP 7 15 RSS PROGRAM VERSIONS COMPATIBILITY CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 6 CLN7462 Station Control Boards Limited QUANTAR RSS Version Compatibility continued RSS Software IC 2221 Version Release Software Version Part Numbers Release R10 11 00 R10 11 SCM LQ 020 10 731 0180706 47 WL WL_020_10_025 KC509024000101100 Boot 2 020 10 022 5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 009 5095204000010025 5095104000010025 5093104000009009 R10 12 00 R10 12 SCM LQ 020 10 737 0180706F47 WL WL 020 10 025 PC509F02H0000
103. STATION RECEIVER MEMORY CONVENTIONAL AND 6809 CONTROLLER SYSTEMS OR ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR MEMORY CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 5 From the File menu select Software Download Service Configuration Tools Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl 5 Save As Read From Device Ctrl R Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Merge Wildcard h Exit Alt F4 1 The following window appears Software Download Legacy Devices Note Functionality is supported for Quantar Quantro and AstroTAC 3000 Comparator stations only r Timestamp Date 8 2005 08 124 Program Firmware Time HH MM SS 092508 Erase Flash r Station Settings Quantar Quantro BR Family Normal Mode AstroTAC 3000 Comparator Save Status Connection Settings Connection Type Ethernet O Serial Modem Serial Port Baud Rate 9600 Station Port Front Port Device IP Address Modem Properties Phone Book Modem Configuration Phone Number Firmware Directory ks Enter today s date in yyyyh nmidd format 6 Setthe date and time in the Timestamp fields 7 Select the appropriate station type in the Station Settings field 11 54 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO STATION RECEIVER MEMORY CONVENTIONAL AND 6809 CONTROLLER SYSTE
104. Sd5 aay NIANNYL 6089 2 688X 888X 1Svo1nWis oe 69zx sepnioui 2219 GLLO 1SYOTNNIS SO1WNY 6 2 1229 2V1 VH123dS 1Svo1nWis pci d I3SA 266 aav SOTWNY ady 268 OHLSV OHLSV ALIS 315NIS ONDINNYL ONDINNYL OULSV 6089 15 6089 ANOZLEVNS 0 LINLYYNS 207 LINLYYNS jeuondo 0 SNOZLYVWS 02 INOZLYYNS pJoMsseg sepnpour SSY OHISV pieOpi A Aljiqede 8 eje jos eouaiejeg 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S Sjeuueuo zp 91 Honey yosieJ seg OSHN Saunivad AYVMLIOS lt 1 3HvVMLJOS 16 TWNOILdO 3GIM LSVOTNWNIS SNDINIH L 6089 Idd M L3N3Hh123S IAIM OO1VNY ALIS ONDINNYL 6089 5O1VNV 6089 692 OVL VeLoadsS QAY 966 1 5 ALIS 319NIS 166X ALIS ONDINIH L 6089 LY AHA 046 oguenc 2 006 oguenc ZHW 006 Bueno LY AHN Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking M 001 bY MOL
105. Sepnioul SLLO 39VJH3 1NI ALIHOIHd 310SNOO aav 692X Ovi vHlO3ds aav 66 ALIS 315NIS ONDINNYL 6089 PU LY AHA M OSE ogueno ZHN 006 ZHW 006 J amp juenc uBnolul Lu 4Hno4ueno M 001 YH M OLL EH M OLL Zd LH M Se AHN 4eueno ZY LY JHA ZHIN 008 ZHN 008 onueno aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 29 Release R12 01 00 through R12 03 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 50 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES OHLSV LSVOTNAINIS SNDINNYL OuHLSV SNDINRH L 6089 15 6089 LSVOTANIS 6089 7 51 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 688X 888X 165 21 5 M Sd5 3LIS 319NIS ONINNNUL 6089 ONDINNYL 6089 euondo 0 LANLYVWS 576 076 3NOZLHVINS Aujiqede 10 SS IYO 16 pieOpi AA Auiqedeo yosireJ OSHN S3univad SYVMLIOS TWNOILdO Ayiqeded aemyos 1X3 ZHN OL ZHW S Sjeuueu ZHY 21 Hanoy
106. Sftwr 5095101000009028 EXC PC5093104000009003 EXC PC5093104000009003 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 7 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 3 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 and CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility continued RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE Version Bae 9 Release Software IC Software Release Software IC Software elease Part Numbers Version Part Numbers Version SCM SCM 5 020 09 055 2 SCM SCM 020 09 552 R09 05 00 R9 05 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 033 572 0 3 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 033 App Sftwr PC5091 10300009055 Boot B2 020 09 022 and App Sftwr PC509110300009552 Boot B2 020 09 022 Boot2 PC5091002000009022 EXC 020 09 004 Boot2 PC5091002000009022 EXC 020 09 004 WL SZ3 0 U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC509500100009033 App Sftwr PC509500100009033 EXC PC5093104000009004 EXC PC5093104000009004 SCM SCM 5 020 09 062 SCM SCM 020 09 558 R09 06 00 R9 06 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_09_034 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_09_034 App Sftwr PC5091 10300009062 Boot B2_020_09 025 App Sftwr PC509110300009558 Boot B2 020 09 025
107. Site General Screen Data Fields continued PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER ing if Data Field Description 2 ge Default econ TEA EJ Selections any V 24 External Specifies whether external synchronization Disabled Disabled Customer determined Transmit Clock is required for transmit signal Typically in Enabled installations where station and console are connected through a microwave link RS232 Wireline Interface is used Zone Controller This defines the parity used to detect Odd Odd Customer determined Link Parity communication error with the zone Even controller Programming the Site Timer Screen Click Site Timer in the navigation pane to access the Site Timer screen Figure 3 20 See Table 3 15 for the screen s data fields Timeout Timers Link Recovery Lu Carrier Malfunction 50 Carrier 500 Message Trunk 4 000 Fade 1200 Figure 3 20 Site Timer Scree Table 3 15 Site Timer Screen Data Fields sec msec msec msec n Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default PC 9 Setting if any Link Recovery Sets the delay time before noting the loss or 15 99 seconds 15 As determined by system recovery of the data link between the station and configuration zone controller and the time before exiting failsoft operation after a link recovery Carrier Sets the delay time before taking a station out of 1 254 seconds when setto 50
108. System Capabilities IntelliRepeater diss ipee 1 52 Release SZ2 3 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater TEBEIKITIGE DE OR e CER Fari aM ori erry 7 52 Release SZ2 7 2 7E Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater AP ud D AD da Ld 7 52 Release 12 00 00 through 12 02 00 Features System Capabilities IntelliRepeater 522 0 3 7 53 Release 12 00 00 through 12 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1 Trunking 7 53 Release 13 00 00 through 13 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1 Trunking 7 54 Release 14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1Trunking iei ee ee EE to i et iid 7 54 Release 14 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1Trunking es e ioa o ives ee pr Rin me ree Re ets 7 54 Release 14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 2 0 3 Trunking ooh odore rk men adt ob trade 7 55 Remote Dial p ConhectlOHn eode retenue urea piene tte 9 1 WildCard Input Screen Enhanced Shown 10 3 WildCard Output Screen Enhanced Shown
109. Temporarily connect the station s modem to the RSS PC 2 Launch the communications program such as ProComm or Hyperterminal See the program s manual or help file if required 3 Enter the following command to program the modem settings for the factory defaults AT amp F lt return gt 4 Enter the following command string to program the modem for the recommended configuration settings ATE0Q1 amp D0 amp KONO0S37 9S0 1 lt return gt Where Attention Character echoing disabled 9 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PC MODEM CONFIGURATION QI Result code transmission disabled e amp DO0 Ignore amp K0 XON XOFF disabled RTS CTS disabled N0S37z980z1 9600 bps connections only e 50 Auto answer after 1 ring 5 Enter AT amp WO amp YOcreturn command to store the configuration settings in modem memory and to instruct the modem to load these settings on modem power up PC Modem Configuration 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Programming the configuration settings for the PC modem is accomplished using the RSS program release 5 00 or higher The RSS provides a modem configuration screen that includes an initialization string sent to the PC modem on initiation of a remote session with a station This string programs the PC modem for proper operation The screen also contains additional fields to allow related modem configuration parameters to be programmed
110. This verifies all operating functions of the station that are included in the RF link such as the receiver power amplifier exciter and antenna system and certain audio circuits in the station control module Place Call to Console For analog only conventional stations that are connected to a remote console establish communications using the intercom pushbutton located on the front panel of the station control board and a handset or microphone This test verifies proper operation of the wireline circuitry phone lines and certain audio circuits in the station control module 3 93 POST OPTIMIZATION CHECKOUT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 3 94 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Optimizing the ASTRO TAC Comparator ASTRO TAC comparators must be optimized after they are initially installed and after maintenance actions such as retuning or replacing modules Optimization includes tasks such as verifying the comparator hardware configuration performing alignment and programming the comparator s codeplug The general process for optimizing a base comparator is as follows 1 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Connect the RSS computer to the comparator See Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 Read the comparator s codeplug See Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 Verify that the co
111. Transient Settle initial portion of an analog call is excluded from the signal quality measurement Analog Voting Ensures that ports with signals of imperceptible 0 to 12 0 dB 1 1 dB System dependent Hysteresis difference in noise content are not alternatively selected as the voted port Programming the Port Control Screen Click Port Control in the navigation pane to access the Port Control screen Figure 4 6 See Table 4 5 for the screen s data fields 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 4 7 PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Port Number Port Type Port Alias NONE Link Type 24 LINK EXTERNAL TRANSMIT CLOCK v Digital Input Delay msec Data Site Steering Port 1 R Previo ito Previous Port Next Port 8 parator mi Figure 4 6 Port Control Screen Table 4 5 Port Control Screen Data Fields Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any Port Number This specifies the comparator port currently being 1 through 16 1 System dependent configured Port Type This specifies to which device the port is Disabled Disabled System dependent connected Station Receiver DIU conventional systems only AEB Smartzone systems only Port Alias This identifies the alias name that is assigned to Up to 10 alpha numeric None Customer determined the port characters Link Type This specifies what type of link connects the port
112. WL WL 020 10 001 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 10 001 App Sftwr PC509F10300010013 Boot B2 020 10 001 App Sftwr PC509F10400010513 Boot B2 020 10 001 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC509100200001 0001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 App Sftwr PC509500100010001 App Sftwr PC509500100010001 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_021 SCM SCM IR_020_10_520 R10 02 00 R10 02 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_007 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 10 007 App Sftwr PC509F10300010021 Boot B2 020 10 001 App Sftwr PC509F10400010520 Boot B2 020 10 001 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010806 U134 PC5095204000010806 U135 PC5095104000010806 U135 PC5095104000010806 App Sftwr PC509500100010007 App Sftwr PC509500100010007 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_030 2 SCM SCM IR_020_10_527 R10 03 00 R10 03 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 10 008 572 0 3 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 10 008 App Sftwr PC509F10300010030 Boot B2 020 10 002 and App Sftwr PC509F10400010527 Boot B2 020 10 002 Boot2 PC5091002000010002 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010002 EXC 020 09 005 WL SZ3 0 U134 PC5095204000010807 U134 PC5095204000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 App Sftwr PC509500100010008 A
113. account name and password then write down this information and store it in safe place If you have forgotten an existing account name or password contact your ISP User name Password Confirm password C Use this account and password when anyone connects to the Internet from this computer C Make this the default Intemet connection 17 Leave all the fields blank and uncheck all checkboxes 18 Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Completing the New Connection Wizard You have successfully completed the steps needed to create the followana connection RSS SLIP MDM FP 9600 COM3 Share with all users of this computer The connection wall be saved in the Network TAdd shortcut to this connection to my desktop To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish 19 Click Finish The following window appears Leave the area code and phone number fields blank 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 41 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING RSS_SLIP_MDM_FP_9600_COM3 User name Password C Save this user name and password for the following users only Anyone who uses this computer 20 Click Properties The following window appears Leave the area code and phone number fields blank RSS SLIP FP 9600 COM3 General Options
114. allow the station to serve as a community repeater and allows you to track subscriber access for billing purposes The Multi Coded Squelch Table screen is only accessible when the following settings on the Hardware Configuration screen are true Multi Coded Squelch field is Multi PL Only System Type is Conventional Station Type is Analog Only When these conditions are not met the Access Code Table screen is accessible mm For accurate billing information to be available configure the station s date and time as outlined in Setting the Device s Date and Time on page 3 8 Station Serial Number 448CAX0252 Station Date Station Time User Tables x Rx Type Rx Freq Code Tx Type Tx Freq Code User Access Total Time Used Number of Calls 1 PL 103 5 14 PL 103 5 1 ENABLED 2 Save Report Modify User Clear Accounting Figure 3 8 Multi Coded Squelch Table Screen Subscriber radios are identified by their PL or DPL code and their usage time is logged and saved in station memory This information may be retrieved displayed and saved as a text file for printing or incorporating into a report This type of information is typically used for billing or other accounting purposes On the initial access of the Multi coded Squelch Table screen a default User 1 appears with the default data The Total Time Used and Number of Calls fields are empty From this initial screen up to 13 total users may be entered
115. any Connect Tone 1 Specifies one of eight frequencies to be used as connect 0 through 7 0 Determined by system tone 1 by the station configuration Connect Tone 2 Specifies one of the eight frequencies to be used as 0 through 7 0 Determined by system connect tone 2 by the station configuration Rx ASTRO Access Defines receive ASTRO network ID hex 000 FFF hex 293 Depends on system design Codes Tx ASTRO Access Codes Defines transmit ASTRO network ID hex 000 FFF hex 293 Depends on system design Smart Connect Tone Specifies one of the two methods of minimizing time Mute Tickle Mute Customer determined Decoder between subscriber request for service and conversation Unsquelched Tickle heard by receiving subscribers Disabled Smart Connect Tone If Smart Connect Tone Decoder is enabled it specifies 0 1000 msec 700 msec Customer determined Disable Delay the amount of time allowed for 6809 controller and station to detect connect tone before dropping the call 1 Rx ASTRO Access Code fields are displayed only if the station type is set as ASTRO capable in the Hardware Configuration screen 2 Tx ASTRO Access Code fields are displayed only if the station type is set as ASTRO capable in the Hardware Configuration screen 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PROGRAMMING THE MULTI CODED SQUELCH TABLE SCREEN CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Programming the Multi Coded Squelch Table Screen The multi coded squelch feature is typically used to
116. device Naming Convention for Dial Up Modem install A Windows RSS SLIP connection name has three items which depend and describe some physical parameters of the connection A typical RSS SLIP connection name is RSS SLIP FP 9600 COMI and breaks down is as follows RSS SLIP MDM This part of the connection name is fixed All RSS SLIP dial up modem connections must start with this string FP This part of the name describes the device port the connection is capable of connecting with Possible values are FP front port and BP back port 9600 This part of the name describes the connection s baud rate This value must match the actual baud rate of the connection e COMI This part of the name describes the PC communications port that is used to establish the connection AM wama RSS SLIP connections must be created in pairs For a given baud rate PC communications port combination create one connection for the device front port and one for the back port Example If the name CSS_SLIP_FP_9600_COM1 is created then the following must also be created CSS_SLIP_BP_9600_COM1 This meets the requirement that a name be created for both the front and back port on the device 11 46 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE Connecting to the Device There are four methods for connecting the PC to the station for downloading software Use the one appr
117. device on your computer Select the devices to use in this connection A 97 Modem 22 amp Modem Agere System 0 28 Modem Bluetooth Modem 8 Select the modem device that you use for this connection 9 Click Next The following window appears 11 38 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 10 11 12 13 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS New Connection Wizard Internet Connection How do you want to connect to the Intemet This type of connection uses a modem and a regular or ISDN phone line Connect using a broadband connection that requires a user name and password This is a high speed connection using either a DSL or cable modem Your ISP may refer to this type of connection as PPPoE Connect using a broadband connection that is always on This is a high speed connection using either a cable modem DSL or LAN connection It is always active and doesnt require you to sign in ues Select Connect Using a dial up modem Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Connection Name What is the name of the service that provides your Internet connection the name of your ISP in the following box ISP Name RSS SLIP MDM FP 9600 COM3 The name you type here will be the name of the connection you are c
118. had been used to silence the alarm alert tones for a currently active alarm issuing the SEALARM ON command allows the tones to be routed normally over the air and or over the wireline as defined on the Channel Information screen TXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate transmitter squelch code as programmed in Channel Information screen for the affect channel Includes CSQ PL and DPL TXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate transmitter squelch code as programmed in Channel Information screen for the affect channel Includes CSQ PL and DPL WAIT XXXXX Commands station to wait XXXXX msec before executing the next command Range is 0 10000 10 sec Programming 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 DC Remote Command Data QUANTAR and Quantro stations in conventional systems are capable of being controlled by a remote console through a DC current level when Remote Control Type on Wireline Configuration screen is set to DC Wireline Option on Hardware Configuration screen is set to any valid wireline configuration in the selection list The station contains decoder circuitry that can interpret detection and undetection of up to six DC current levels 12 5 mA 5 5 mA 2 5 mA 12 5 mA 5 5 mA 2 5 mA Each current level may represent up to eight station commands that are performed sequentially by the station The DC Commands screen allows you to define any or all of the six DC currents in both
119. installation operation and maintenance of your computer and OS First time users should read Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 before using the RSS program to perform actual tasks Chapter 2 serves as a basic tutorial guiding you through loading and launching the RSS program and allowing you to investigate the various GUI screens Users experienced in using RSS can refer to the appropriate chapter to perform a specific task Organization of this Guide This guide is written in a task oriented format providing you with the most efficient and productive means of using the RSS program in real world applications The guide is divided into logical chapters each one concentrating on a particular general topic This method of organization allows you to quickly find the information you need to perform a certain task without having to read the entire guide or flip back and forth between chapters The content of each chapter is summarized below Chapter 1 Introduction provides general information regarding this guide including a profile of the intended audience and typographic conventions used throughout this guide Chapter 2 RSS Overview provides step by step instructions for loading the RSS software launching the program common practices such as saving data and navigating through the GUI Chapter 3 Optimization provides step by step instructions for using the RSS program to optimize a newly installed station and includes codepl
120. is set to a value derived by the following formula If Tx Rx and the frequency is divisible by 6 25 kHz with no remainder then Tx idle Tx frequency 112 5 kHz Result must be higher than lower limit for band or range If less than lower limit Tx idle frequency is calculated as follows Tx Idle Tx Frequency 112 5 kHz If Tx Rx and is not divisible by 6 25 kHz Tx idle is calculated using previ ous two formulas with 112 5 kHz replaced with 90 kHz If you change either the Rx of Tx frequency and it results in making the two frequencies equal a pop up window appears providing you with the opportunity to let the RSS program calculate the proper Tx idle frequency 3 24 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE TRC COMMANDS DATA Programming the TRC Commands Data The QUANTAR stations installed in conventional systems are capable of being controlled from a remote console through function tones transmitted over the wireline when the Wireline option is set to the installed wireline module other than None The station is capable of detecting a high level guard tone HLGT and up to 15 different function tones Up to eight commands can be associated with the HLGT and each of the 15 function tones The commands associated with a particular tone are queued for execution after that tone is detected The station decodes up to two function tones after HLGT is detected Program the function tones as direc
121. screen s data fields Failsoft Enable j Failsoft Mode DIGITAL Channel Number NONE Vote Priority FIRST IN Figure 4 4 Smartzone System Screen Table 4 3 Smartzone System Screen Data Fields Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default FERES p 9 Setting if any Failsoft Enable This specifies whether the comparator operates in Enabled Disabled System dependent failsoft mode Disabled Failsoft Mode This specifies whether the comparator operates in Digital Digital System dependent digital or analog mode while in failsoft mode Analog Channel Number This specifies the channel number for the None None System dependent comparator 1 through 28 Vote Priority This specifies the high priority source Analog gt Digial First In System dependent Digital Analog First In Programming the Analog Voting Screen Click Analog Voting in the navigation pane to access the Analog Voting screen Figure 4 5 See Table 4 4 for the screen s data fields 4 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Analog Voting Sample Period 50 msec Analog First Settle Time 40 iz msec Analog Vote Vote And Hold Operation DISABLED First Vote Hold Time 250 msec Voting Hold Time 250 i msec Analog Signal Quality Debounce Time 150 __ msec Analog Line Transient Settle 20 B msec Analog Voting Hysteresis 14 dB Fig
122. send failed V TX DATA RDY DURING IDLE V TX EEPROM CHECKSUM FAILED V Realign Exciter TX FREQ NOT DIV BY 5K 6250 Verify Programming TX LOCK ALARM Incorrectly Exciter programmed transmit frequency on Channel Information Screen TX POWER LEVEL ALARM Exciter Power Amplifier TX SPI RECEIVE BUFF FULL V TX SYNTH NOT PROGRAMMABLE Incorrectly programmed transmit frequency on Channel Information Screen TX TO HOST CHKSUM ERR V UHSO ALARM UHSO COLD 4 5 24 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectly TONER Status Message System Programmed TED Status RSS UHSO MANUAL OVERRIDE lt UHSO_WARM UNABLE ALLOCATE MEMORY UNABLE TO CALLOC MEMORY UNABLE TO OPEN FILE UNDEFINED ERRO Unexpected DBS subsystem source target UNEXPECTED ELSE Unexpected event Unexpected frame Unexpected loopback result message Unexpected message UNEXPECTED MSG RESP UNEXPECTED OPCODE UNEXPECTED TERMINATION UNEXPECTED TIMER MSG Uninitialized error UNKNOWN EVNT RECEIVED unknown host or dl cmd Unknown idle option UNKNOWN MODEM TRAIN TYPE Unknown SCCE event UNKNOWN SIMULCAST STATE UNKNOWN TX SPI ERROR CODE Unrecognized base station alarm UNSUPPORTED IN
123. station from the Tools menu select Enable Disable Station The Enable Disable Station window appears Tools Help Enable Disable Station Connection configuration This screen will allow you to permanently enable or 1 Set device date and time permanently disable the station Set IP and MAC address f Set device password The Station Enable and Station Disable commands will reset the station Remember that if the station resets 10 times within 10 minutes the station will go into 255 only mode To recover from this send another Station Enable command Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Station Enable Station Disable Help Station Status Enabled 2 Depending on its current status the three buttons at the bottom of the window you can either enable or disable the station disable Click Station Disable The station resets and commences RSS Only operating mode To enable Click Station Enable The station resets and commences normal operating mode ASTRO TAC Diagnostics The comparator diagnostics screen verifies that the cooling fan functions properly The fan turns on when the comparator s temperature reaches a predefined set point To verify that the fan functions perform the following procedure 1 Click Fan On See the example below 5 34 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ASTRO TAC DIAGNOSTICS Fan Test 1 Tu
124. stations running release R10 05 00 or later with stations running release R10 04 00 or later you must add 208 us to the offset value entered in step 7 in each station running release R10 05 00 or later This compensates for an internal 208 us transmit delay in earlier stations and allows newer and older stations to operate within the same ASTRO simulcast system Generating ASTRO Test Patterns The station is capable of generating any of the following four test patterns e Standard transmitter symbol rate STD DEV Standard transmitter low deviation LOW DEV V 52 Deviation Standard transmitter C4FM modulation CAFM By causing the station to generate these tones and then viewing them on an R2670 analyzer you may verify that the station is compliant with ASTRO Project 25 signaling specifications 1 Connect the station and R2670 analyzer as shown in the following figure 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 85 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION TO RECEIVE ANTENNA h N FS TATION TRANSMIT SS Z OUTPUT eZ 2 A RECEIVE INPUT Disconnect cable from trans mit antenna to upper N type connector on bracket R2670 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER A STATION TRANSMIT INPUT transmit input and RF In Out connector 2 Connect N to N cable between station on R2670 2 Launch the RSS pro
125. systems with subscriber in repeater applications MDC ID to prevent ID from being repeated Hear Clear Compander Determines whether companding Disabled Disabled Customer determined compression and expansion is Enabled employed for transmit receive signals Noise Canceller Determines whether receiver noise Disabled Disabled Customer determined cancellation is employed Enabled Advanced MRTI Operation Specifies whether MRTI phone patch Disabled Disabled Customer determined feature is enabled or disabled for this Enabled channel Receive Signal Allows polarity of receive signal to be Disabled Disabled Customer determined Inversion inverted Enabled PTT Priority Specifies priority order of three types of See help W gt R gt L Customer defined PIT requests W wireline e R repeater L local Examples W gt R Wireline has priority over repeater R L Repeater and local PTT requests have equal priority Whichever occurs first takes and maintains PTT control Analog Repeater Specifies whether received signal is Enabled Enabled Customer defined Boost boosted prior to transmission by Disabled repeater Boost 150 3 dB Example 2 kHz deviation receive signal 1s repeated at 3 kHz deviation 1 If Tx and Rx frequencies are different as in repeater application the Tx idle frequency equals the Tx frequency If the Rx and TX frequencies are equal as in base station application the Tx idle frequency
126. the launch time from one specific transmitter site or a combination of sites can be used to fill in these null zones Fine launch time adjustments can also be used to compensate for GPS 1 pps propagation variations due to factors such as cable lengths Because the launch timestamps permit only 20 us resolution the ASTRO Alignment and Test alignment screen is provided to allow you to specify a value with 0 1 us resolution that is added to the arriving timestamp value to provide an adjusted launch time The specified ASTRO simulcast launch time offset value applies only to ASTRO simulcast systems and is considered optional The factory default offset value is 0 zero causing no adjustment to the launch time specified by the arriving timestamp value 1 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 2 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 3 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 4 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane 3 82 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT T rr Y 5 Click Yes to continue When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears 688108
127. transferees accept these programs as is and without warranties of any kind This warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose In no event shall Motorola be liable for special incidental or consequential damages including without limitation loss of use time or data inconvenience commercial loss and lost profits or savings to the full extent that such may be disclaimed by law even if Motorola has been advised of the possibility of such damage against licensee by any other party Repair of Defects The classification of defects in Motorola supplied software shall be the responsibility of Motorola Remedy of defects is at the sole discretion of Motorola If Motorola agrees to remedy a software defect the new software will be warranted until the end of the original limited warranty period Replacement of any software defect shall constitute Motorola supplying the Licensee with the appropriate software media and authorization key Field installation and configuration are not included Field software updates upgrades and new enhancement option software will be warranted for ninety 90 days from the date of initial shipment All warranty service will be performed at service locations designated by Motorola Travel and associated expenses of the Licensee or such expenses incurred by Motorola for visits to Licensee
128. 0 00 MiBoostfrequeney 2500 Hr 2500 Current Stored Staus Tone Level Below Peak Audio 130 oS 130 Alert Tone Level Below Peak Audio 100 100 Tone Ort L zave Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS DISABLED Station Status Not Keyed 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 9 Inthe Rx Wireline Level 1 kHz field Enter the wireline level desired for a received RF signal at 60 of the rated system deviation Typically the wireline level is defined in your system s design document The allowable range is 20 to 0 dBm 10 Click Save The station automatically adjusts for the Rx wireline level you entered and stores the value in station memory Y mm Pressing the Enter key does not save the entered value to the station 11 Repeat this procedure for Rx Wireline Line 4 if applicable Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 This procedure applies only for a station that is part of a receiver voting system such as Spectra TAC Digi TAC or ASTRO TAC To adjust for Rx Wireline equalization perform the following procedure J9 mm If the comparator and station are not collocated then two technicians are required to perform this procedure one at the comparator and one at the station 1 At the comparator connect a high impedance AC voltmeter across the phone line input corresponding t
129. 00 15 47 AC1 Fatal Internal Software Error 044 2 9950 22 23 58 54 1995 10 22 23 58 54 PORT 01 L1 Link Initializing CD Timeout 7 1995 10 22 23 58 54 1995 10 22 23 58 54 PORT 01 WL1 Illegal CD Transition 5 995 10 28 18 05 22 2005 12 06 10 36 04 OS date reset via RSS 40 2005 1 2 06 18 05 23 2005 1 2 06 10 36 04 AC1 OS time reset via RSS 40 E Figure 5 3 Comparator Status Report Screen Example Station Comparator Generated Status Messages Table 5 1 lists status messages generated within the station comparator Many of the station comparator generated status messages do not indicate that service is required They merely indicate that an event has occurred These events provide the technician with status information that can be useful in debugging other issues should they arise These status messages may be grouped into three categories Internal System Status Messages Status messages resulting from incorrect RSS programming Hardware Generated Status Messages 6881085E35 AG Recommendations for interpreting and responding to these status messages are provided below and in Table 5 1 5 5 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Internal System Status Messages These messages are reported by the station and provide a highly detailed account of the internal operation of the station Status messages of this type are often associa
130. 0100000006 6 WildCard Intu t 2 Click Hardware Configuration to display the device s retrieved configuration data as shown in the example below R Radio Service Seliwarn Hase Nadie Cowan Tek p Sorat 446490242 Crip Mittin CANT AM Canta p ater ONY en type oc Re Freq Darat t w 051470 ort a aen 6009 Trursung PA Power Metre 2 Vets Booster Powe Cun AC LOW v BateryType LEAD ACD UN EMHANCED w pune Lem eo w Unilin Arrow heys Te System You can now read the device s configuration data as programmed at the factory 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 3 DEVICE TYPE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 3 Review the device data shown onscreen to verify that it matches the equipment and the system requirements In most cases it matches the vend ticket but there are circumstances where there may be discrepancies such as information missing on the original sales order thus requiring the factory to leave certain fields at default values The Hardware Configuration screen provides Validate Configuration to make sure that the hardware in the device matches the hardware specified on the Hardware Configuration screen Differences are reported by the RSS through popup screens 4 Click Version Screen in the Servic
131. 020 09 813 572 03 651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 813 App Sftwr PC509110300009062 Boot B2 020 09 025 App Sftwr PC509110300009558 Boot B2 020 09 025 Boot2 PC5091002000009025 EXC 020 09 004 Boot2 PC5091002000009025 EXC 020 09 004 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 EXC PC5093104000009004 EXC PC5093104000009004 SCM SCM 5 020 09 068 2 SCM SCM IR 020 09 564 R09 07 00 R9 07 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 813 572 03 651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 813 App Sftwr PC509F10300009068 Boot B2 020 09 026 App Sftwr PC509F10400009564 Boot B2 020 09 026 Boot2 PC5091002000009026 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000009026 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 006 2 5 SCM 020 10 506 R10 00 00 R10 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 813 572 03 651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 813 App Sftwr PC509F10300010002 Boot B2 020 10 001 App Sftwr PC509F10400010502 Boot B2 020 10 001 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM 5 020 10 013 2 SCM SCM 020 10 513 R10 01 00 R10 01 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 813 572 03
132. 04000008010 WL 016 08 003 572 03 PC5091104000008511 WL 16 08 003 U652 PC5091204000008010 EXC 016 07 001 U652 PC5091204000008511 EXC 16 06 001 U653 PC5091304000008010 U653 5091304000008511 065 PC5091404000008010 065 5091404000008511 WL WL U134 PC5095104000008003 U134 5095104000008003 0135 PC5095204000008003 U135 PC5095204000008003 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 Notes 1 No further development for these control boards 2 The firmware versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu IR and Exciter firmware version numbers IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE are not displayed 7 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Table 7 3 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE RSS Version Rel Release Software IC Software Release Software IC Software Part Numbers Version Part Numbers Version R9 00 SCM SCM SC 020 09 017 573 0 5 SCM 020 09 519 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 015 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 015 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009017 Boot B2 020 09 012 App Sftwr 5091103000009519 Boot B2 020 09 012 Bo
133. 06 ZHIN 006 4Ejuenp SSH LH 4 Ayiqedeg aemyos IVD OH1SV eoueuejeu 1X3 ZHN OL ZHW S illqedeo peop SUM OD FFE SM M OLL Zu LH M SZ ZYY dH D Sjeuueu ZHY 521 Auiqedeo 8 a OuLolseg OSHN ZHN 008 ojueno S3univad 3HvML14OS S3univad 3HvM140S QuvaNvis TVNOILdO aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 26 Release R09 02 01 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 47 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES ouisv LSVOTNINIS SNDINNYL 15 6089 O LSV SNDINnH L 6089 LSVOTANIS 13N3unO3S LSVOTANIS 6089 5 6089 p1eog p1eog vz 688X 688x s pnioul 888X 888X 1229 15 21 5 1svo1nWis 1SVO InWIS 549 aay 692 sepnioul aav 220 697X 1Svo1nWis d13SA 686X IVL VYLIAdS SOTVNV d13SA 266X aav 268 08157 08157 ALIS ONDINNYL 15 6089 966X 1 5 ALIS 319NIS ONDINNYL 6089 ONDINNYL Ou SV 6089 ANOZLYVINS 0 L3N1HVINS 202 I3N1HVWS 0 3NOZ1HVINS 02 3NOZIHVINS
134. 085E35 AG 12 30 2006 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 7 Version Compatibility and Upgrades Prior to Release H07 02 02 wii bane Wate Waa Reale A 7 1 Beginning with Release 7 02 02 7 2 RSS Program Version and Station Firmware 7 2 RSS Program Versions 1 7 16 Retrieving Station Software Versions 1 7 17 Retrieving Comparator Software Versions and Backplane 1 7 18 Performing Upgrades 7 19 Upgrading the Station s Codeplug 7 19 Upgrading an Archived Codeplug 7 21 Features and System Capabilities lille 7 22 Chapter 8 Password Protection How Password Protection Works 8 1 Password Tir e oUt oi ees ke eee cR e RE uqu ex DE REO MEN Ge RO RR en 8 1 Activating Password Protection 1 4 8 1 Special Password Protection 8 2 Creating the Station s
135. 09 544 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 809 P651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 809 App Sftwr PC5091103000009044 Boot B2 020 09 016 App Sftwr PC5091103000009544 Boot B2 020 09 016 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 003 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 003 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009809 U134 PC5095204000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 EXC PC5093104000009003 EXC PC5093104000009003 R9 04 03 SCM SCM SC 020 09 044 SCM SCM IR 020 09 544 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL_020_09_ 809 P651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 809 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009044 Boot B2 020 09 021 App Sftwr PC5091103000009544 Boot B2 020 09 021 Boot2 PC5091002000009021 EXC 020 09 003 Boot2 PC5091002000009021 EXC 020 09 003 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009809 U134 PC5095204000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 EXC PC5093104000009003 EXC PC5093104000009003 SCM SCM 5 020 09 055 2 SCM SCM IR 020 09 552 R09 05 00 R9 05 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 812 572 03 651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL_020_09_812 App Sftwr PC5091 10300009055 Boot B2_020_09 022 App Sftwr PC5091 10300009552 Boot B2_020_09 022 Boot2 PC5091002000009022 EXC 020 09 004 Boot2 PC5091002000009022 EXC 020 09 004 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009812 U134 PC5095204000009812 U135 PC5095104000009812 U135 PC5095104000009812 EXC PC5093104000009004 EXC PC5093104000009004 SCM SCM SC 020 09 062 2 ScM SCM 020 09 558 R09 06 00 R9 06 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL
136. 10737 Boot 2 020 10 022 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 009 PC5095204000010025 PC5095104000010025 PC509E02M000009010 Notes 1 The software versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu or by selecting Status Panel Software Version Set Date and Time from the Service menu RSS Program Versions Compatibility In general each new version of the RSS program is backward compatible with previous versions The following describes specific backward compatibility issues associated with the RSS program release version covered in this guide for RSS version R14 R14 is 10096 backward compatible with conventional 6809 trunking and IntelliRepeater station firmware as shown in the Table 7 1 through Table 7 6 with the following exceptions The new RSS is a graphical user interface GUI and so the information is presented in a more intuitive and familiar Windows format Due to added fields and screens you may notice that these new fields are filled with default values Similarly you may receive error messages if you try to access these new fields Ignore the default values and close the error message window Operation of the RSS or station is not affected Beginning with Release 12 Securenet was cancelled Codeplugs configured for Securenet cannot be upgraded beyond version 10 7 16 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RETRIEVING STATION SOFTWARE VERSIONS Beginn
137. 10_021 573 0 651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_021 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010066 Boot B2_020_10_016 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010565 Boot B2_020_10_016 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_080 SCM SCM IR_020_10_578 R10 09 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 10 021 573 0 651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL_020_10_021 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010080 Boot B2_020_10_016 App Sftwr PC509F 10400010578 Boot B2_020_10_016 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010016 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL 013 5095204000010816 0134 5095204000010816 0135 5095104000010816 0135 5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_086 SCM SCM IR_020_10_584 R10 08 00 R10 10 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_021 SZ3 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_021 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010086 Boot B2_020_10_019 App Sftwr PC509F 104000010584 Boot B2 020 10 019 Boot2 PC5091002000010019 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010019 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010021 App Sftwr PC5095001000100
138. 12 5 Inputs 5 8 Access Code Table Binary Used to select one or e None None System dependent Group None of the pre defined 1 Inputs 1 4 binary groups used to 2 Inputs 1 8 report Access Code Table 3 Inputs 9 10 4 Inputs 9 12 5 Inputs 5 8 Aux Output Station Aux Outputs listed 1 12 for enhanced N A Dependent on whether here correspond to AUX basic or enhanced 1 9 for basic WildCard is selected OUT outputs shown for 50 pin System Connector in backplane section of appropriate QUANTAR or Quantro Station Functional Manual for example AUX OUT 7 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 10 5 STATE ACTION TABLES CHAPTER 10 WILDCARD OPERATION Table 10 2 WildCard Output Screen Data Fields continued EMT 5 Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default 3 Setting if any HW Input Type Specifies hardware Basic and Basic and Dependent on whether ircuitry located basic or enhanced 2 ry Sii Enhanced Enhanced WildCard is selected wireline interface board 1 3 Transistor 1 3 Transistor associated with output Basic Basic 7 Relay 7 Relay Enhanced Enhanced 7 10 Relay 7 10 Relay Active Level Indicates current active Hi Transistor Lo System dependent level for each output may Lo be set for HI or LO Relay Lo Group Definition Defines binary bit ranking for binary groups Bit 0 is LSB and Bit 1 is MSB
139. 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Programming the 6809 Trunking Interface Data PROGRAMMING THE 6809 TRUNKING INTERFACE DATA The 6809 Trunking Interface screen allows you to specify operating parameters and system timing values for stations installed in 6809 trunking systems as set in the System Type selection list The default values programmed into this screen at the factory represent standard typical values and in most cases need not be changed However all fields are fully editable to accommodate unique system requirements or customer specified values Click 6809 Trunking Interface in the navigation pane to access the 6809 Trunking Interface screen see Figure 3 15 See Table 3 10 for the screen s data fields RSTAT Mode Failsoft Failsoft ENABLED v Line TRC Encode DISABLED gt Failsoft Carrier Squelch DISABLED v Dual CT Failsoft Only DISABLED Modulation Type Tickle Source Trunking Tickle Source TX DATA LINE iN Trunking Tickle Source TOT 1 sec Rx Discriminator Type IGUANTAR MICOR Figure 3 15 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Table 3 10 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Data Fields is Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default EA Setting if any RSTAT Mode Specifies the conditions for RSTAT to go Normal receiver Normal Depends on system active unsquelch configuration Dual CT dual connect tone trunking Failsoft Specif
140. 21 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_095 SCM SCM IR_020_10_593 R10 1 1 00 R10 11 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_025 573 0 651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_025 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010095 Boot B2_020_10_022 App Sftwr PC509F 104000010593 Boot B2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010025 App Sftwr PC509500100010025 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_101 SCM SCM IR_020_10_599 R10 12 00 R10 12 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_025 SZ3 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL L_020_10_025 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010101 Boot B2_020_10_022 App Sftwr PC509F 104000010599 Boot B2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509500100010025 App Sftwr PC509500100010025 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 9 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 3 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 and CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility continued
141. 30 2006 Figure 7 8 Release R07 02 02 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES IAIM SS399V 3N3HA23S 1SVO1nWIS OHLSV 17207 ou1svvauv 1SVOTnWIS IVNOILN3ANOO IVNOILLN3ANOO IVNOILNJANOO IVNOLLN3ANOO 2270 15 5 Gav O2vl1 vulOddS aav 888X c 6x SS320V H31V3d3aH 15 21 5 aav ive ddv SS399V H31V3d3H 3N3unoas AIM 5 1V201 IVNOLLN3JANOO TIVNOLLN3ANOO 692X OVvi VHlO3dS 5O1VNV 869X LSVOTANIS 13N3Hh23S AAY 4WNOLLN3ANO9 ze6x SS309V H3lv3adau WYS aav 692 sepnioul 222X z OTNNIS aav jeuondo OH SV V3HV 1V201 utiqede dry jeig IVNOILNJANOO ony SSH qpuelS uleW eoedsepiM uojenbs pepoo niniw 692X 226 LN 1 10345 AAY 55300 H31v3ddH WYS illqedeO 8 qav OSHN SSH900V ua1v3ad3H HLIM LINFUNIASVAYV 17001 V3HV 1v207 ANNO LENSANO TWNOLLN3ANO9 S3univa3d 3HVAL4OS WNOLLdO ou 1 jJ ti 1X3 ZHI OL ZHIN S 96SX sleuueuO zpp 9 1 66 lt
142. 5191022C34 EXC 16 06 001 U653 5191020L15 U653 5191022C35 U654 5191020L16 U654 5191022C36 WL WL U134 5191013H74 U134 5191013H74 U135 5191013H73 U135 5191013H73 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 SCM SCM 016 07 026 SCM IR 16 06 521 R7 01 U651 5191020L17 WL 016 07 013 572 0 3 0651 5191022C33 WL 16 07 013 U652 5191020L18 EXC 016 06 001 U652 5191022C34 EXC 16 06 001 U653 5191020L19 U653 5191022C35 U654 5191020L20 U654 5191022C36 WL WL U134 5191013H76 U134 5191013H76 U135 5191013H75 U135 5191013H75 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 SCM SCM 016 07 030 SCM IR 16 06 521 R7 02 U651 5191020L21 WL 016 07 014 572 0 3 0651 5191022C33 WL 16 07 014 U652 5191020L22 EXC 016 06 001 U652 5191022C34 EXC 16 06 001 U653 5191020L23 U653 5191022C35 U654 5191020L24 U654 5191022C36 WL WL U134 5191013H78 U134 5191013H78 U135 5191013H77 U135 5191013H77 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P14 U3701 5191012P14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 5 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 2 TTN4094 and TRN7900 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility continued RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE eise Release IC Part No Release ic Firmware Version Part No Version SCM SCM 016 07 034 SCM IR 16 06 521 R07 02 02 R7 03 U651 5191020L25 WL 016 07 018 572 03 9 5191022033 WL 16
143. 5E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 83 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 3 84 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION enine Retererce Modulation Compensation Bstery Egusizsbon SquichAgut MI RX Weeine ire 2 Reference Orco Hix Denson Power Output BE Cattraticn Reference Oscillator Frequency C Frequency 9539125 MHz AUTO NET 5 MHz AUTONET 10 MHz Statinn Station Currertty ACCESS Aston Not Keyed Click the ASTRO Simulcast Test Patterns tab The ASTRO Simulcast Test Patterns screen appears Reterence Modulation Compensation W Battery Equalization MEL AX ine 2 Reference Oscilslor BB TX Deviation MB Power Opt Wi RSS Calibration Bl Astro Smulcast Test Pattern Current Tranismit Frequency MHzy 8539125 Currert ASTRO Larch Time Offset us Desired ASTRO Launch Time Offset usy Station Note Station Currently ACCESS DISABLED Ratus Not Keyed 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 7 Enter the desired offset value 0 1 us resolution in the Desired ASTRO Launch Time Offset us field The current value is shown in the Current ASTRO Launch Time Offset us field 8 Click Save Offset 9 Click Reset Station to activate the new offset value 57 mm Within a particular ASTRO simulcast system in order to operate
144. 6 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY Click Modem Configuration to configure the modem The following window appears Modem Configuration Strings Line Conditioning Initialization ATE0Q0M0V1X48K0S0 0 To access an outside line dial Dial Prefix To disable call waiting dial 70 Hang Up ATH0 r Modem Response Strings Drop DTR to Hangup ENABLED x Connect CONNECT Busy BUSY Wait for Connect 80 seconds Faure NO CARRIER Failure NO DIALTONE Pause between Cals 5 seconds ERROR Failure TIMEOUT Control String h If required dial into the IntelliRepeater by either Entering the phone number in the Phone Number field or Click Phone book and select a preconfigured phone number The following window appears Phone Book Base Station Description Phone Number aa 111 011 1111111 Phone Book Operations 11 59 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 11 60 9 Click Browse to locate the upgrade software and then navigating to the file s location on your hard drive 10 Click Program Firmware to start the software download process The RSS program attempts to establish communications with the station 17 mam If problems are encountered an error message appears 11 After communicatio
145. 651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 813 App Sftwr PC509F10300010013 Boot B2 020 10 001 App Sftwr PC509F10400010513 Boot B2 020 10 001 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009813 U134 PC5095204000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 U135 PC5095104000009813 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 7 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Table 7 4 Factory Shipped Upgrade Kit RSS Compatibility for stations without Software Download Capability Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE RSS Version Software Software Software IC Software IC Release Release Version Release Version Part Numbers Part Numbers Note 1 Note 1 SCM SCM SC_020_10_021 2 scm SCM IR_020_10_520 10 02 00 R10 02 BST sina 0180706F47 WL WL_020_10_806 822 03 Best SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 10 806 App Sftwr 509 10300010021 Boot 2 020 10 001 App Sftwr 509 10400010520 Boot B2 020 10 001 Boot PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 Boot PC5091002000010001 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010806 U134 PC5095204000010806 U135 PC5095104000010806 U135 PC5095104000010806 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC 020 10 030 2 scM SCM IR 020 10 527 R10 03 00 R10 03
146. 6809 trunking systems 3 15 programming for conventional systems 3 13 ACKONYMS Undelete eae US UR D 1 Alignment Alignment Procedures 6 2 ASTRO Bit Error 3 90 ASTRO Test Pattern Generation 3 85 ASTRO Tx Align and Test 3 82 AstroTAC Comparator Battery Equalization 4 10 Reference 4 10 Astro TAC comparator OVELVICW san st wa wa ed 4 9 Battery Equalization 3 73 Overview 3 54 Post Repair Alignment Overview 6 1 Backplane ID Reading from 7 18 Codeplug 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 INDEX Power Output Alignment Procedure 6 4 Power Output Alignment Procedure 350W VHF 6 7 Reference Modulation Alignment Procedure 6 14 Reference 3 75 Lin tess tek et teed Peat Kd 3 68 Rx Wireline 3 55 Squelch Adjust 3 71 3 88 Tx Deviation Alignment Procedure 350 Stations 6 11 Tx Wirelin y eae AES da eed 3 55 Archive File Opening ss ul eee ea ees 2 25 Archive Saving 10 2 23 ASTRO Bit Error Rate 3 90 A
147. 7 005 First Occurrence Count Codeplug Version 38 Message 1995 08 19 20 41 53 1995 08 19 20 41 53 1 Fatal Internal Software Error 044 2 1995 08 19 20 41 53 1995 10 28 18 01 35 1995 08 19 20 42 07 1995 10 28 18 01 49 1 Comparator Heartbeat function enabled 2 995 08 19 20 42 07 1995 10 28 18 01 49 PORT 01 WwL1 Link Initializing Box Reset 7 1995 08 19 20 42 22 1995 10 28 18 02 04 PORT 01 Link Failure 7 995 08 19 20 50 36 1995 08 19 20 50 36 AC1 Fatal Internal Software Error 018 2 1995 08 19 20 50 47 1995 09 19 20 50 47 AC1 No wirelines present in comparator 1 995 08 19 20 50 47 n 995 08 19 20 50 47 AC1 1 missing 1 or more ports enabled 1 995 08 20 1 4 56 36 1995 10 28 18 01 35 AC1 Reset ordered by RSS 40 1995 08 20 14 56 51 1995408 20 15 04 41 PORT RS 1 Link Initializing Box Reset 39 1995 08 20 14 57 06 1995 08 20 15 04 56 PORT RS AC1 Link Failure 39 1995 08 20 15 34 04 1995 08 21 20 35 23 AC1 1 present All ports disabled 1 1995 08 21 20 35 12 1995 08 21 20 35 12 AC1 Fatal Internal Software Error 046 49 1995 08 21 20 53 36 1895 08 21 20 53 36 Fan state set to AUTO via RSS 1 MN N 2 2 2 m1 2 m N 1 9 0 3950 07 00 15 46 1995 10 07 00 16 01 PORT 01 41 Link Initializing Cleared 7 995 1 0 07 00 15 46 1995 10 07 00 15 46 PORT 01 WL1 Link Failure Cleared 7 1995 10 07 00 15 47 1995 10 07
148. 7 14 Release R09 07 00 R10 00 00 through R10 08 00 R10 11 00 R10 12 00 Features and System igure F Capabilities Conventional 7 35 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES 1 MOVETIVA LSVOTANIS IWNOILNSANO9 Lv3d3H 8VO NI 55422 H31V3d3H OHL1SVV3HV 1 207 1VNOILN3ANOO 1 92 1V3d3u 989 Ul MOVaTIVA aav jeuondo dn ey 1524 IVO 21 OH1SV dn Ieiq uonoelo1d UOLIS SSH yeadoy jeuiqe u jseonus Buiuueog jauueyo gpueis urey eoedsepiMw pieOpi A yojenbs pepoo ninw 49ed ILYN Aitiqede OSHN O LSVVAYV LSVOTANIS IVNOILN3ANOO Saunivad SYVMLAOS TWNOILdO LSVOLOATSS Ayiqedeg peojumog asemyos 1X3 ZHN OL ZHW S ZHY 6721 Bue N 9 3 Seuo uue v Aieneg yojanbs Ou peoueuu3 9 seg Saunivad3uvALdos 1 r9 n 1V3d3u aav 65300 ua1vadau OHL1SVV3HV 1V907 WNOILNSANO9 OH1SW3UV TVNOILN3ANOO 226 SS322V
149. 881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 53 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Quantro HF R1 through R4 Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W R3 110 W R4 100 W Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG X999 SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 10 MHz External Reference UHSO Full Sub Band Partition ASTRO CAI CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES SOFTWARE FEATURES Remote RSS includes Station Password Protection Remote Dial Up Capability SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 4 1 requires optional hardware SMARTZONE ASTRO CAI INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ASTRO CAI X898 Figure 7 36 Release 13 00 00 through 13 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1 Trunking STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Quantar R1 and R2 Quantro UHF R1 through R4 Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W R3 110 W R4 100 W Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG X999 SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 10 MHz External Reference UHSO Full Sub Band Partition ASTRO CAI SOFTWARE FEATURES Remote RSS includes Station Password Protection Remote
150. AND STATUS Source pube ele Internal Incorrectly tatus Message System Programmed ae Status RSS CROSSLOAD_CODEPLUG_ERROR 4 CTS ASSERTED CTS or CD were lost on loopback CTS REMOVED CU one minute update CURR ACK SEMA V FAILED CURRENT ACK SEMAP4 CREATE FAILED CURRENTLY ACK P FAILED CURRENTLY ACK V FAILED DAMQ FLUSH Data block timeout DATA READY ALREADY DATA READY TIMED OUT DATA UNDERRUN dbs bs abort tx failed dbs bs change busy failed dbs bs config failed dbs bs console read failed dbs bs console write failed dbs bs read eeprom failed dbs bs send mid failed dbs bs set st id failed dbs bs write eeprom failed 1 5 A 57 5 5 5 5 575 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 DBS_NVM_PTTN_ERROR Station Control Debug Queue create failed Debug Task creation failed Debug Task start failed Default in switch DETECTED_MODEM_RESET SESE SE STS 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectl Status Message y System Programmed Status RSS Hardware Failure DETERMINE STATION MODE lt DIAG_TEST_RESULT_MISMATCH DIU_ACK_MSG_NOT_MATCH DIU_NACK_MSG_NOT_MATCH
151. AST WITH REPEATER ACCESS WIDE AREA ANALOG Figure 7 10 Release R09 00 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 31 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES oH1SV aqIN 1svolnWis 888X LSVOTNWIS aav SOTWNY jeuondo IVO 15 L1 OHISV uonels SSY Buluueds jouueyD Aqpueis urey pug eoedsepiM uojenbs papoo ninyy uored uoud LYN illqedeO 8 OSHN SS399V HLIM 3N3Hn23Ss aqIN oH1Svv3uv OHLSV 1 207 1SvoT1nMWis 1VNOILN3ANOO 1VNOILN3ANOO 69 ISVOINWIS aav 5589 VL VYL19JdS QAY 66422 H3alvadaH WYS aav 3N3HD23S SS355V 5 1 207 TWNOILNSANO9 TVNOILN3ANOO 226 LSVOTNINIS S 3909V tadlVadati WYS IVNOILNJANOO 866 692X qav LINIYNIAS AAV oOvi vulogds aav 5530207 ualvadad 0515 1 207 5 1 207 TVNOLLNJANOO IVNOILLNJ3ANOO V3HV 17207 IVNOLLN3ANOO IVNOILNJ3ANOO Saunivad 3HVALLdOS TW
152. B of free space is required on the PC hard drive to accommodate the station receiver software files 1 Insert the Station Software disk into the appropriate disk drive If auto launch is enabled then the installation utility launches and window appears 2 Click OK or Next An instruction screen appears that prompts for the location to install the software files The default location is c MRSS Quantar lt release_name gt It is recommended to accept the default However if another location is preferred change to that directory 3 Click OK The installation process provides an indication of the progress Downloading Software to Station Receiver Memory Conventional and 6809 Controller Systems or ASTRO TAC Comparator Memory 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Conventional and 6809 controller based systems and ASTRO TAC comparator stations require that the new software be downloaded to each device individually This procedure must be performed for each device in the system With the device operating software files copied to the PC hard disk you are now ready to download the software to the device non volatile memory firmware 1 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 2 Connect to the device 3 Read the current configuration from the device 4 Verify the currently installed software version by clicking Versions under Service in the navigation pane 11 53 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO
153. Conventional conversation CSQ Carrier Squelch CTCSS Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System DOS Disk Operating System DPL Digital Private Line coded squelch DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency DVM Digital Volt Meter EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory FREQ Frequency FTR Field Technical Representative ID Identification kHz kilohertz 1000 Hz LED Light Emitting Diode D 1 CHAPTER D ACRONYMS LLGT Low Level Guard Tone typically 2175 Hz MHz Megahertz 1 000 000 Hz MRSS Motorola Radio Service Software MSS Motorola Service Station NSO National Service Organization NST National Service Training PC Personal Computer PL Private Line coded squelch PROM Programmable Read Only Memory Push To Talk Random Access Memory RSS Radio Service Software Receive TOT Time Out Timer TPL Tone Private Line squelch TX Transmit D 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Access Modem Requirements 9 2 Modem PC Configuration 9 3 Modem RSS PC Configuration Fields 9 5 Modem Station Configuration 9 2 Remote Dial Up 9 1 Access code table 6809 trunking field definitions 3 15 Conventional field definitions 3 14 programming for
154. DINNYL 6089 04157 6089 13N3unO3S AIM LSVOTNNIS 6089 LSVOTNINIS SNDPINnH L 6089 190 M 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG L3N34n23S ALIS 3TONIS 6089 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES tZ A 688X 688X seumbeg 888X egex 692 692 sepniour LSVOTNNWIS ISVOINWIS GLLX Sd5 1svoldnWis 2VLI VH1O3dS LSVOTNINIS aav 5O1VNV aav 5O1VNV aav 686x OHLSV v3uv ONDINNYL 15 6089 ANOZLYVINS xd ZHN OL ZHIN S zp 921 z66X 09157 ALIS 315NIS ONDINNYL 15 6089 0 c ANOZLYVNS Alljigede dni Ieiq uonoejoJd SSY L3N3Hf193S ALIS 319NIS 6089 ONDINNYL 6089 6089 ALlHOIBHd 3 1OSNOO aav 692 5 aav 266 ALIS SNDPINnH L 6089 2H PU LY AHA M OSE ZHW 006 Lu M 001 YH M OLL SH M OLL M SZ Zu LH 4Ejuenc ZH pue t SHA Jelueno ZHN
155. Dial Up Capability SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 4 1 requires optional hardware SMARTZONE ASTRO CAI INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ASTRO CAI X898 Figure 7 37 Release 14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1Trunking STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Quantro UHF R1 through R4 Quantar UHF R1 R2 25 W RO R1 R2 110 W R3 110 W R4 100 W Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 SMARTZONE INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG X999 SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 10 MHz External Reference UHSO Full Sub Band Partition ASTRO CAI SOFTWARE FEATURES Remote RSS includes Station Password Protection Remote Dial Up Capability SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 4 1 requires optional hardware SMARTZONE ASTRO CAI INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ASTRO X898 Figure 7 38 Release 14 02 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 3 0 3 5 4 1Trunking 7 54 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED STANDARD OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Remote RSS includes Quantar R1 and R2 Station Password Protection Quantro R1 through R4 12 5 kHz Channels Remote Dial Up Capabilit
156. E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL IMPORTANT DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY If the station enters a frozen or locked state the software modules have not been FLASHed properly To recover click Erase Flash then repeat the download procedure Click Erase Flash only if you have the software on hand to download to the station Erasing FLASH renders the station inoperable until software is downloaded Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater Memory 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 IntelliRepeaters allow software to be downloaded to one IntelliRepeater and then that IntelliRepeater loads the software to all other connected IntelliRepeaters This is called cross loading With the station operating software files copied to the PC hard disk you are now ready to download the software to the station non volatile memory firmware 1 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 2 Connect to the device 3 Read the current configuration from the device 4 Verify the currently installed software version by clicking Versions under the Service branch in the navigation pane 5 From the File menu select Software Download Service Configuration Tools Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Save As Read from Device Ctrl R Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Se eed erge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 Hele
157. External Reference Oscillator Calibration on page 4 11 Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure 1 Connect the output of a stable 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference source to the BNC connector located at the bottom of the comparator control module front panel Set the frequency source for 1 0 0 5 V RMS output Click either Auto Net 5 MHz or Auto Net 10 MHz depending on the reference in use to begin the calibration process using the test reference source The status area of the screen displays the progress Reference Oscillator Frequency wa AUTO NET 5 MHz AUTO NET 10 MHz When the process is complete close the Completed Successfully message window The oscillator adjustment data is saved to the comparator codeplug and the comparator dekeys External Reference Oscillator Calibration 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 This procedure is required only if the comparator reference oscillator does not lock The accuracy of this procedure depends on the accuracy of the external source Ensure that the 5 MHz or 10 MHz source provides the required accuracy as defined in Table in the Routine Maintenance section of the relevant functional manual for the comparator 1 Connect the output of the stable 5 MHz or 10 MHz external reference source to either the BNC connector located at the bottom of the comparator control module front panel or the BNC connector located on the comparator backplane Click either Auto Net 5
158. H3l1V3daH aav 888X 1SY TNNIS aav 692X SO1VNV LSVOTANIS TWNOILNSANO9 SS3959V H31V3d3u OH1SVv3uv 1 207 T1VNOILN3ANOO aqIN IVNOILN3JANOO 226 55322 WYS aav 692 sepniour 220 ASVOINWIS aav 692X VL YYL9JdS QAY 908X yO d 13SA 669X 09157 aav 66 1V201 1VNOILN3ANOO WNOILNSANO9D PU LY HHA M OSE ZHN 006 ogueno ZHIN 006 4ejueno LH AHN o4ueno M 001 011 PH EY SHNYVLNVNO M 001 VY M OLI EY M OLL eH LH Od M Se eu Ld AHN Jejueno u LH AHA ZHN 008 Jejueno ZHN 008 ogueno aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 15 Release R12 01 00 through R12 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 36 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 MOVETIVA aqIA LSVOTANIS IVNOILN3JANOO 1Lv3d3u ANY SS322V ualvadau OHL1SVV3HV 1 207 1VNOILN3ANOO n r9 n 1V3d3u aav jeuondo dn y 1524 IVO 21 OH1SV illqedeO dr jeiq
159. HAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 6 7 10 11 12 11 24 Select Don t detect my modem I will select it from a list check box Click Next The following window appears Manufacturer Models 6 Standard Modem Types Standard 33600 bps Modem EF Standard 55000 bps Modem Communications cable between two computers Parallel cable between two computers A This driver is not digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important Click Have Disk On the screen that appears browse to the directory that contains the mdmmotcss9x inf and mdmmotcssnt inf files Generally these files are found in the default installation directory C Program Files Motorola Radio Service Software Click Open The following window appears Add Hardware Wizard Install New Modem ya asi ey Select the manufacturer and model of your modem If your modem is not listed or if you have an installation disk click Have Disk Manufacturer Motorola CSS 9x Motorola CSS NT A This driver is not digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important Select the following Motorola CSS NT from the Manufacturers list CSS SLIP Connection NT from the Models list Click Next The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS Ed On which ports do you want to install it C All ports Selected po
160. ICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE MAC ADDRESS Programming the MAC Address The MAC address is generally hardcoded into the network interface and does not require changing unless another device on the network has the same MAC address a very low probability This can be treated as a read only field in most cases To set the device s MAC address if necessary perform the following procedure 1 To set the device s MAC address from the Tools menu select Set IP and MAC Address as shown in Figure 3 2 The Set IP and MAC Address window appears Set IP and MAC Address guration Help and MAC Address Settings E Connection configuration Stored Set Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address 4454460200 Crean h Device IP Address 1451 160 200 1454460200 Set IP Address Set device password A onfigurat 3 3 5 eis Tad Show CodePlug size Physical Address 08003 504 8 08003 504 8 Set Physical Address CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Please reset the device for the stored value to take effect iformeatior Enter each Component of the IP Address from 0 to 255 No leading zeros required Figure 3 2 Accessing the MAC Address Field 2 Enter the MAC address in accordance with your system s network documentation 3 When done click Set Physical Address The following message appears RSS Information se i Ethernet physical
161. K INDEX 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006
162. L EH MOLL SM Sz ZENO ZH pue LY SHA Jelueno ZHIN 008 Bueno ZHN 008 5 SNOILVLS Figure 7 28 Release R09 05 00 R09 06 00 R09 07 00 R10 00 00 through 10 08 00 R10 11 00 10 12 00 7 49 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES oH1SV LSVOTANIS SNDINNYL 5 6089 15 6089 pZ A p1eog 688X 688X 888 888X LSVOTNWIS LSVOTNWIS 589 aav jeuondo 0 L3N1HVINS 56 076 3NOZLHVINS dn IeIq Uu0l 09 01d pJoMsseg uonelis SSH d 13SA 686X d14SA 266 Ayjiqede 268 Ailiqede e1M 8 094157 O8LSV yose4 v3uv 315 315NIS OSHN ONINNNYL ONDINNYL Saunivad SHVMLAOS 15 6089 TYNOLLJO 15 6089 ANOZLYVINS aemyos X3 ZHIN OL ZHW S Sjeuueu ZHY 21 Haney Ajeneg 215 9 S3univad 3HVALLdOS 15 SOTWNY 15 5 SNDINNUYL 6089 697X sepnioul LLLX LSVOTNINIS 5O1VNV dav 182 M SOTVNV ILIS 319NIS SNDINIH L 6089 501VNV SNDINNUYL 6089 Ayjiqedeg 9J1A 8
163. LE PRIORITY 6809 REMOTE CONTROL TYPE TRC INPUT OUTBND ANALOG LNK TIMER COMPARATOR FALL BACK IN CABINET FALL BACK TIME STATUS TONE STATUS TONE FREQ WIRELINE SQUELCH SQUELCH THRESHOLD SQUELCH HYSTERESIS RX SECURENET ASTRO TO WL EQUALIZATION TRC HLGT FREQUENCY AUTO LINE CTRL BASE STATION PRODUCTS Codeplug Report 08 31 2005 12 13 28 PM CONVENTIONAL 448CAX0252 BOSTON FIRE 43 QUANTAR 800 806 825 NONE 800 851 870 20 Watts B WIRE ENHANCED AC LOW LEAD ACID LIN ANALOG ONLY NONE INTERNAL STANDARD ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED 1 DISABLED DISABLED 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX DISABLED TRC LINE 1 120 sec SPECTRA TAC ENABLED 400 msec ENABLED 2175 Hz DISABLED 50 dBm 1 dB ENABLED ENABLED 2175 Hz ENABLED Figure 5 8 Example of a Saved Codeplug Report This feature is typically used to remotely disable and subsequently enable a station through an RSS dial up connection When disabled the station operates in RSS Only mode and cannot transmit receive or respond to console commands The station remains in this mode even during power cycles and resets until an Enable command is issued 5 33 ASTRO TAC DIAGNOSTICS CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Disabling and enabling a station can also be performed locally through the RSS Perform this procedure while either locally connected to the station or connected remotely through a dial up connection 1 To enable or disable a connected
164. Lest Active Charret DISABLED Startup Channel 1 CASTRO ROLAP Repeal DISABLED v Delay 0 sec ASTRO Tx Fer PULSE 6809 Trunking Analog Repeater Operation ZEN Max Deviation 2 Low Speed Deviation 170 Antenna Reisy DISABLED Cal Sign interval 00 mn Startup On Last Active Charret DISABLED v Startup Charret ASTRO Fade Tolerance 3FRAMES V ASTRO ROLAP Repeat DISABLED Wrelne Deisy 0 sec 3 ASTRO Tx Fiter WOEPULSE 6809 Trunking ASTRO RF Configuration Screen IntelliRepeater and 6809 Trunking Stations 3 45 PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO A CONVENTIONAL OR 6809 STATION OR ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Table 3 19 RF Configuration Data Fields CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION m Range Recommended Data Field Description Default ERA p Selections Setting if any Repeater Operation This specifies whether the station is Base Base Depends on system used as a base station or repeater Repeater configuration Max Deviation Limits the station transmit deviation 0 100 92 92 recommended to a percentage of maximum as set on the Channel Information screen Low Speed PL Deviation Specifies deviation for low speed 0 25 17 for 25 kHz Use value shown for the TDATA for 6809 trunking 18 for 12 5 kHz bandwidth in use applications Antenna Relay This specifies whether the antenna Enabled Disabled Dep
165. MHz or Auto Net 10 MHz depending on the reference in use to begin the calibration process using the test reference source The status area of the screen displays the progress PERFORMING COMPARATOR ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Reference Oscillator Frequency ww 3 When the process is complete close the Completed Successfully message window The oscillator adjustment data is saved to the comparator s codeplug and a success message appears to the user 4 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Diagnostics and Status The RSS provides tools for troubleshooting and maintaining the station equipment These include a status report log a status panel display screen diagnostic metering and the ability to print a text version of the codeplug data to either a printer or a file Status Report Log The station reports status conditions resulting from operational or software malfunctions Additionally each of the diagnostics has associated with it a corresponding status A status log maintained in station memory accumulates all status event data since the last station turns on This status log may be retrieved displayed and used to aid in troubleshooting the station Status Panel Display The status panel display provides an instrument panel that displays station operating information and status messages The Status Panel menu also provides selections to display the current station software version D
166. MPARATOR MEMORY CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Phone Book Base Station Description Phone Number qq 11 11 1111111 Phone Book Operations 9 Click Browse to loacte the upgrade software and then navigating to the file s location on your hard drive 10 Click Program Firmware to start the software download process The RSS program attempts to establish communications with the station 17 mm If problems are encountered an error message appears 11 After communications have been established the RSS and the station control module s front panel LEDs indicate the software download progress Inthe RSS Progress appears at the bottom of the Software Download window On the station control module All LEDs slowly flash indicating that the station is in download mode The LEDs flash sequentially up and down marquee style as the station downloads the data from DRAM memory to FLASH memory on the station control module The station resets when the DRAM to FLASH download is complete If the station also has new wireline software then following reset the station control module downloads the wireline operating software to the wireline interface module This is indicated by the two flashing LEDs on the wireline interface module Otherwise the stations completes its boot process and the station control module s Station On LED lights 12 success message appears on successful software download 11 56 6881085
167. MPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 4 Factory Shipped Upgrade Kit RSS Compatibility for stations without Software Download Capability Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE RSS Version Software Software Software IC Software IC Release Release Version Release Version Part Numbers Part Numbers Note 1 Note 1 SCM SCM SC 020 09 031 2 SCM 020 09 533 R09 02 01 R9 02 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 805 572 03 P651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 805 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009031 Boot B2 020 09 014 App Sftwr PC5091103000009533 Boot B2 020 09 014 Boot2 PC5091002000009014 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009014 EXC 020 09 001 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009805 U134 PC5095204000009805 U135 PC5095104000009805 U135 PC5095104000009805 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 SCM SCM SC 020 09 042 SCM SCM IR 020 09 542 R09 03 00 R9 03 P651 SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 09 809 P651 SIMM 0180706F50 WL WL 020 09 809 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009042 Boot B2 020 09 016 App Sftwr PC5091103000009542 Boot B2 020 09 016 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009016 EXC 020 09 001 WL WL U134 PC5095204000009809 U134 PC5095204000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 U135 PC5095104000009809 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 R9 04 SCM SCM SC 020 09 044 SCM SCM IR 020
168. MS OR ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR MEMORY Select the appropriate connection type in the Connection Settings area This determines the fields that are available For Ethernet connections Enter the station s IP address For serial connections Configure the following as required for your PC Serial Port Baud Rate Station Port For modem connection Configure the following as required for your PC and system Serial Port Baud Rate Station Port Click Modem Configuration to configure the modem The following window appears Modem Configuration Command Strings Initialization Dial Prefix Hang Up Drop DTR to Hangup Wait for Connect Pause between Calls rLine Conditioning ATEOGOMOV1X48K0S0 0 0 access an outside line dial ATDT 0 To disable call waiting dial r Modem Response Strings Connect CONNECT Busy BUSY ENABLED NO DIALTONE Failure Failure NO CARRIER seconds Failure ERROR TIMEOUT __ seconds Control String Send Control String 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 If required dial into the station by either Entering the phone number in the Phone Number field or Click Phone book and selecting a preconfigured phone number The following window appears 11 55 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO STATION RECEIVER MEMORY CONVENTIONAL AND 6809 CONTROLLER SYSTEMS OR ASTRO TAC CO
169. Modem install 11 46 Connecting to the 4 11 46 Serial Direct 11 47 Ethernet Connections 11 48 Remote Dial Up Connections 1 11 49 Zone Controller Link 11 49 Loading Station Software Files onto the 11 52 Downloading Software to Station Receiver Memory Conventional and 6809 Controller Systems or ASTRO TAC Comparator 11 52 Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater 11 56 Appendix A PL DPL Codes Appendix B dBm to Microvolts Conversion Appendix C Glossary Appendix D Acronyms 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 V TABLE OF CONTENTS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK VI 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 LisT List of Figures Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3
170. NDARD Simulcast Operation ENABLED Multi Coded Squelch DISABLED Phone Patch Interface DISABLED Scanning Receiver DISABLED Main Standby DISABLED Validate Configuration Select 350 Watts with No circulator in the PA Power Rating drop down list Click Channel Information in the navigation pane then click the Advanced tab The Advanced Channel Information screen appears Channel Number Basic Advanced lal CHANNEL 1 of 4 Tx Power Out Repeater Normal 350 Watts Battery Backup Watts Drop Out Delay 10 sec Prime Audio Hold Off 0 msec hu 7 rHear Clear Wireline 1 sec Local sec E Compander DISABLED Repeater 60 sec Phone Pa 0 pa Noise DISABLED r Alarm Tone PhoneP pera DISABLED Over Air DISABLED Over Wireline ENABLED r Audio Filters Rev Signal Inversion DISABLED Pre emphasis ENABLED _ aa jority gt gt gt 0 gt De emphasis ENABLED HiPassFiter ENABLED PTT VWW gt R gt M gt D gt L Analog Repeater Boost DISABLED Add Channel lt Previous Channel Next Channel E gt Delete Channel 6 9 ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE FOR A QUANTRO 350W VHF STATION CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT 5 Set the Tx Pow
171. NOILdO Ayiqedeog peojumog 1X3 ZHN OL ZHIN S Sjeuueu ZHY 521 Buikey N 9 3 S uo wey Hanoy ld uojenbs Sq agi 908X 6023 yO 10385 AAY d13SA 66SX 226 5 AAV 55300 Halv3adau WYS aav 69 sepniouj 866 LSVOTNNIS Gav J13Nd3unoas aav 2H LY AHA M OSE ZHIN 006 ZHN 006 LH AHN oJluenO M 001 YH M OLL OLL eu LH M Se ZH LH pue LY AHA 4 amp jueno ZHN 008 ZHN 008 6 lt 1 901 IVNOLLNJ3ANOO Saunivad SAYVMLAOS 5 daLYOddNS SNOILVLS Figure 7 11 Release R09 02 01 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 32 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Lv3d3H LSVOTNNWIS IWNOILNSANO9 9 1V3d3u 989 Ul MOVaTIVA aav O LSYWAYV jeuondo 0 IVO 41 OWLSV Auiqede dr jeiq 1 pJoMsseg UONEIS SSY jeedeu 1seoinuiis jouueyo gpueig urew pug
172. O DEVICE 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 Q Do You Wish To Reset The Device Click Yes to reset the device to activate the codeplug you just wrote to the device A message window appears stating that a reset is in progress 3 47 PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN A SMARTZONE 2 0 3 OR 2 7E SYSTEM CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Device Reset In Progress When Front Panel Returns To Normal The Reset Command Is Complete Check Status Report For New Alarms 4 Click Continue On reset the following window is opened The Codeplug Has Been Successfully Programmed Into The Connected Device 5 Click Continue The main RSS window appears Programming the Codeplug Data into an IntelliRepeater Station Installed in a SmartZone 2 0 3 or 2 7E System After saving the codeplug data to an archive file on the PC hard disk you must program the codeplug data into a conventional or 6809 station s codeplug 17 mm When programming the codeplug you may be asked whether you want to condition the codeplug Follow the instructions in the message window to perform this task Conditioning is required only once With the PC connected and the RSS program running perform the following to program data into the station codeplug 1 From the File menu select Write to Device or click Write to Device icon on the toolbar 3 48 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTI
173. OILN3ANOO 1VNOLLN3ANOO TVNOLLN3ANOS 1VNOILN3ANOO VS L OHLSV eyowey pJoMsseg uonelis SSH yojanbs pepoo niniw 26 euoud 55320 H3lV3d3H WYS illqedeO aav OSHN Saunivad AYVMLAOS TWNOILdO 669X 697X 869X 3vL VY19JdS aav 4 5 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S ZH S YO ZHY 521 ZY LY AHA M 092 ogueno uay W 9 3 66 006 uBnou LH AHN ogueno SOTVNV 1V901 1IVNOILNJANOO AOL UNO SUMEI LUAHAN JEO dd pue LY SHA ueno dd ZHN 008 215 ZHN 008 oguenp S3Hnivad 3HVALL4OS 5 SNOILVLS Figure 7 6 Release R6 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 27 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES SS399V 3N3Hno3s IAIM 5 17201 LSVOTNINIS IVNOILN3ANOO IVNOLLN3ANOO Z86X 2229 55300 H3l1V3d3H adv WYS aav SS300V taN3unoas JAIM 5 1 207 1svo1nuis 1VNOILN3ANOO IVNOILNJ3ANOO 692x sepnioul 2229 ISVOINWIS aav 692
174. ON MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN SMARTZONE 2 0 3 OR 2 7E SYSTEM Radio Service Software Base Radio File Write to Device File ervice Configuration Tools Help Save file icon Menu Item Ctrl O Save Ctrl S 8 Radio Service Software Base Radio Save 5 File Service Configuration Tools Help Read from Device Ro H Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Sys Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P RxF Save Codeplug Report Fx F Software Download Merge Wildcard PAF Exit Pow A confirmation window appears Confirmation Do you really want to save the current codeplug to the connected device Yes 2 Click Yes After a few seconds the following Please Enter the Start Up Channel window appears Please enter the Start Up Channel IR STARTUP CHANNEL Startup Channel Enter the Startup Channel for this IntelliRepeater Repeater Press Next when you are ready to reprogram the Codeplug of the Repeater connected to this RSS 3 Verify that the displayed channel is the start up channel Change if required Then click Next gt gt A message window appears asking for verification of the Startup Channel and the serial number 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 49 PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN A SMARTZONE 2 0 3 OR 2 7E SYSTEM CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION
175. OTE The power value displayed in the Rated Power Out field is determined by the PA Power Rating selection in the Hardware Configuration screen The value may differ from the rated station power if the station is equipped with a circulator s For example a 225W station equipped with the triple circulator option results in 170W in the Desired Power Out field and thereinafter the power amplifier is calibrated at 170W Refer to the Help screen for a listing of output power versus PA circulator combinations 9 Click KEYUP to verify that the station correctly adjusted its output power to its rated value If the PA FAIL LED turns on during the alignment procedure click PA INIT and proceed to step 5 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE FOR A QUANTRO 350W VHF STATION If the output power displayed on the wattmeter is not at the rated level proceed to step 6 If the output power displayed on the wattmeter is at the rated level proceed to step 10 10 Click SAVE to save the calibrated value in memory This may take up to 12 seconds Aligning Power Output Procedure for a Quantro 350W VHF Station This procedure is for Quantro 350W stations only To align the station s power output perform the following procedure 1 Connect the station as shown in Figure 6 3 17 mum The circulator is bypassed using a male N to male N bullet connector supplied with the station
176. Options Security Networking Sharing Select a device Configure Show icon in taskbar when connected 15 Select the device you just added from the dropdown list 16 Click Configure The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 19 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Modem Configuration 2 x Communications ca Enable modem er 17 Select the desired baud rate and uncheck all other check boxes You can only select baud rate values that are supported by RSS 57 mm Do not forget the dependency of the baud rate selected here and the connection name See RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 18 Click OK 19 Select Options tab and set the option selection 11 20 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS tween redial attempts Idle time before hanging up Redial if line is dropped 20 21 Select SLIP Unix Connection in the Type of dial up server I am calling list 22 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry 23 Click Properties The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 21 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 24 25 26 27 11 22 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties NEUE General fou can get IP se
177. PE V 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Station Generated Status Message Source Internal System Status Incorrectly Programmed RSS Hardware Failure BAD NVM MCS READ V BAD MCS WRITE BAD PENDULUM COMMAND BAD PRES MEM SIZE BAD V24 CONNECTION Base station alarm send failed NINE NINN BATTERY TEMP PROBE ALARM Battery Temp Probe Not Present BATT REVERT ALARM BTRY OVR ALARM buffer is empty Isr was called buffer is not last in frame but SCCE is RXF 4 5 NSN CALLSIGN_INVALID Verify Call Sign entered on Channel Information Screen Cannot allocate buffer CANNOT_GET_APP CANNOT_GET_BOOT2 lt CANNOT_LOCK_EXT_REF External Ref Not Present CD_LOST_TIMER_EXPIRED CD LOST WITH ANA START CD LOST WITHOUT ANA START CIRC TEMP ALARM s S S Circulator CIRCULAR_QUEUE_CLUSTERS Check system programming CONSOLE REQUEST INDV ID lt xxxx gt SAME AS RADIO ID lt COULD NOT OPEN FILE CP TIMEOUT CRC ERRO CRC LINK DEGRADATION 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 7 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS
178. PROC HEADER BYTE ERR V Psos error V Psos Event After failed V Psos event receive failed V Psos EventSend failed V Psos get buff failed V Psos no event V Psos PPartition create failed V Psos Receive failed 4 Psos RetBuf fail V Psos Send failed V Psos TaskDelete failed V 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 19 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectly Status Message System Programmed Status RSS Psos TaskResume failed V Psos task wake after failed V Psos Timer Cancel failed V PWR SPLY ALARM V Power Supply Exciter Power Amplifier Q RECEIVE TIMED OUT QUEUE AND COUNT MISMATCH Queue create failed RADIO REQUEST INDV ID lt xxxx gt SAME AS Misprogrammed CONSOLE ID system or subscriber radio RAW RX QUEUE CREATE FAILED V rawrxq create failed V RCVD BAD ADDR FRAME V RCVR Receiver RCVR_NOT_COMP Verify Programming Receiver READ_BYTE_COUNT_FAILURE V READ IP HDLC ERROR 4 READY TO SIMULCAST V RECEVIE FNAME ERR V RECV SOCKET DATA ERR V REFL PWR ALARM REGAINED CD WHILE OP PROP 4 REL DATA WHILE GOING DOWN 4 remote out q creation failed V remote partition create failed V RE SEARCH GPS FAILURE No 1 pps GPS input to station RESET 4 RESET DLM STATE VARIABLES V
179. PROGRAMMING THE CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Programming the Channel Information Screen The Channel Information screen allows you to specify frequencies operating parameters and time out timer settings for each channel supported by the station Up to 16 channels may be created with the data fields for each channel contained on two screen pages The number of channel information screens you create and the information programmed into each depends on the system design Before programming the information in the Channel Information screen s obtain the channel and access code information from the system designer This information typically recorded in a system design document defines the number of channels supported by the station and the particular frequencies timer settings and other system parameters applicable to the station See Figure 3 10 and Figure 3 11 for the Channel Configuration screens Channel Number 1 CHANNEL 1 of 4 Basic Advanced Rx1 Frequency 806 200000 MHz Tx Frequency 851 200000 MHz Tx Idle Frequency 851 012500 MHz Modulation Type ANALOG Tx Rated Deviation 5 000 kHz Receive Channel BW WIDE 25 30 kHz Channel Spacing Call Sign Call Sign KGAB47 Call Sign Over Wireline DISABLED Access Code Table 1 Carrier Squelch Transition Analog Rx Activation SC Carrier and PLIDPL Analog Rptr Activation SC Carrier and PLPL
180. Programming the Codeplug Data into an IntelliRepeater Station Installed in a SmartZone 3 0 3 5 or 4 1 System After saving the codeplug data to an archive file on the PC hard disk you must program the codeplug data into a conventional or 6809 station s codeplug y mum When programming the codeplug you may be asked whether you want to condition the codeplug Follow the instructions in the message window to perform this task Conditioning is required only once With the PC connected and the RSS program running perform the following to program data into the station codeplug 1 From the File menu select Write to Device or click Write to Device icon on the toolbar 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 51 PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN A SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 OR 4 1 SYSTEM CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Radio Service Software Base Radio Service Configuration Tools Help File Write to Device Save file icon Menu Item Save Ctrl S Save As 181 Radio Service Software Base Radio File Service Configuration Tools Help Read from Device Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 A confirmation window appears Confirmation Do you really want to save the current codeplug to the connected device Gl 2 Click Yes After a few s
181. R10 06 BST SIMM 0180706F47 WL WL 020 10 816 822 03 Best 0180706F50 WL WL 020 10 816 App Sftwr PC509F10300010058 Boot B2 020 10 012 App Sftwr 509 10400010552 Boot B2 020 10 012 Boot PC5091002000010012 EXC 020 09 005 Boot PC5091002000010012 EXC 020 09 005 WL WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCML IR 020 14 501 14 00 00 R14 00 522 0 3 Fest 0180708F51 WL WL 020 14 001 App Sftwr _ PC509F1040000145xx Boot B2 020 14 001 Boot2 PC509F104000014001 EXC 020 09 017 3 WL U134 PC5095204000010816 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr _ PC509F02N000014501 EXC PC509E02M000009017 Notes 1 No further development for these upgrade kits 2 The software versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu or by selecting Status Panel Software Version Set Date and Time from the Service menu 3 Stations in systems running SZ2 0 3 are not software download capable 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 13 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 5 CLN6960 Station Control Boards IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Version Compatibility RSS Version Release 10 00 00 545 0 SCM TR_005_01_500 R10 01 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 B2 005 01 001 Software IC Part Numbers Release Software Versi
182. RING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 25 Select the Networking tab The following screen appears RSS SLIP FP 9600 COM3 HR General Options Security Networking Advanced Type of dial up server am calling SLIP Unix Connection Settings This connection uses the following items QoS Packet Scheduler 0 25 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks CS Client for Microsoft Networks Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 26 Select SLIP Unix Connection in the Type of dial up server I am calling list 27 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry 28 Click Properties The following window appears Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address autom Use the following IP address IP address Obtain DNS server address auto 8 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server L Altemate DNS server J 11 44 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS SLIP CONNECTION NAMING CONVENTION
183. RVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 17 mm You cannot connect to the device using the Connect window A successful connection can only be made using the RSS You are now ready to perform the SWDL procedure to upgrade the device s software See Remote Dial Up Connections on page 11 50 Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional To connect to the station or comparator to perform Software Download using a direct connection you must 1 Add a null modem that uses your computer s serial port This is used to connect to the device See Adding a Null Modem in Windows XP Professional on page 11 23 2 Adda SLIP connection that uses the null modem you just added See Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Null Modem Connection on page 11 27 Adding a Null Modem in Windows XP Professional To add a null modem to connect to the device perform the following procedure 1 Openthe Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware 3 Click Phone and Modem Options z Phone and Modem Options 4 window that appears click the Modems tab Phone and Modem Options Dialing Rules Modems Advanced 5 Click Add at the bottom of the screen The following window appears Don detect my modem will select it from a list 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 23 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS C
184. Reorder Repeaters Figure 3 23 Repeater Summary Screen 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 41 PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Programming the Repeater Information Screen Click Repeater Information in the navigation pane to access the Repeater Information screen see Figure 3 20 See Table 3 15 for the screen s data fields Repeater Number 1 Repeater 1 of 1 Base Station Identification Control Channel Capability Dispatch Capability annel Rank Add Repeater Previous Repeater Next Repeater ED Basic Advanced Serial Number 1234BC6788 Base Repeater Rx Frequency 0 000000 3 MHz Rx Channeli 0 Base Repeater Tx Frequency 0000000 000000 MHz TxChanneli 380 DISABLED v ASTRO Failsoft Capabilty DISABLED v Failsoft Modulation ASTRO BSI Capability DISABLED v DFB Capabilty DISABLED w Secure Capability DISABLED Protect Capability DISABLED SubBand Capability DISABLED 3 Delete Repeate Figure 3 24 Repeater Information Screen Basic Tab Repeater Number 1 Repeater 1 of 1 Basic Modulation Type ANALOG Tx Rated Deviation 5 000 w kHz Receive Channel BYY WIDE 25 30 kHz Channel Spacing Tx Power Out 20 Watts Tx Power Out Battery Backup 10 Watts Rev Signal Inversion DISABLED Analog Repeater Boost ENABLED Compander DISABLED Noise Canceller DISABLED
185. S program s graphical user interface provides a menu a toolbar a function structure tree pane and a work area pane See Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 3 for examples and descriptions of the RSS window toolbar and menus Close application button Menu bar Resize window button Tool bar maximize restore Minimize button Radio Service Software hase Radio Service Tooke Help eH T GQ 96 ase Rete _ Configuration Navigation Information pane pane Status bar Connection Status Figure 2 1 RSS Window Overview 2 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL File Open File Save Read Configuration From Device Figure 2 2 RSS Toolbar Buttons E Radio Service Software Base Radio Senece Configuration Took pu USER INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Context Sensitive Help Open Connection Screen Open Codeplug Properties Write Configuration To Device The Service and Configuration menus shown in Figure 2 3 are fora QUANTAR codeplug The menus are slightly different if a comparator codeplug is loaded Radio Service Software Base Radio ervice Configuration Tools Help Ctrl O Ctrl S Open Save Save As Ctrl R Read from Device Write to Device Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 IB Radio Service Softwa
186. SLIP Connection NT Motorola CSS NT Have Disk 11 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 9 Select Motorola CSS NT from the Manufacturers list CSS SLIP Connection NT from the Models list 10 Click Next The following window appears On which ports do you want to install it All ports Selected ports Back Next gt Cancel 11 Configure the window as follows e Click Selected ports Select the PC port that you use to perform the serial software download to the device 12 Click Next If the operation was successful the following window appears Proceed to the next step Add Remove Hardware Wizard Install New Modem Modem installation is finished Your modem has been set up successfully If pou want to change these settings double click the Phone and Modem Options icon in Control Panel click the Modems tab select this modem and then click Properties lt Back Cancel If the operation was not successful you must troubleshoot your computer s serial ports 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 5 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 11 6 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Click Finish to exit The following window appears This window now displays the modem connection you just added IT Dial
187. SOFTWARE Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Setup Status Radio Service Software is configuring your new software installation InstallShield 11 The completion window shown below appears when the RSS software has been successfully installed Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Radio Service Software Click Finish to exit the wizard lt Back Cancel 12 Click Finish The InstallShield Wizard window closes The RSS program has been installed 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 9 REMOVING A PREVIOUS RSS VERSION CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Removing a Previous RSS Version Perform the procedure in this section if the installation routine has found a previous RSS version installed on your computer The following screen appears in this situation Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the Radio Service Software Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Modify m Select new program features to add or select currently installed features to remove Repair Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup Remove Remove all installed features InstallShield 1 Click Remove 2 Click Next The following window appears Radio Servi
188. STRO Test Patterns 3 85 ASTRO Tx Align and Test procedure 3 82 Auxiliary Input Programming 10 2 Auxiliary 1 10 2 Fields hued ease wed 10 3 Auxiliary Output Programming 10 5 Auxiliary 10 4 Fieldin desee R 10 5 Battery Equalization 3 73 4 10 Bit Error Rate 3 90 Getting SZe sse Rr pia 2 22 INDEX 1 Opening an 2 25 Printing a 5 31 Reading the Station 2 15 RepOFUS 2 5 CA nae par D 5 31 Reports Saving 5 32 Verifying Station Data 3 3 Writing to 2 21 Comparator Analog Voting System screen 4 6 Analog Voting System screen 4 7 Conventional System screen 4 5 Conventional System screen fields 4 5 Date and Time Nn 5 30 dBm to Microvolts Conversion Table B 1 Diagnostics AstroTAC Comparator Fan check de saus ew sua ede a 5 34 3 93 5 1 9 1 Enabling Feature Summary 58 2 1 File Maintena
189. Saunivad 3 1405 quvaNvis d 13SA 686X 268 08157 OSNDINNYL 15 6089 ANOZLYVINS 688X semnbog 888 LSVOTANIS Sd9 aay d13SA 266X 08157 ALIS ONDINNYL 15 6089 69 sepniouj X LSVOTNINIS dav Ayiqedeg 8 9119 39VJH3 NI 310SNOO aav 692 5 aav 66X SOTVNV ALIS 319NIS ONDINNYL 6089 PU LY SHA M OSE ZHN 006 ZHN 006 vH Lu AHN M 001 M OLL M OLL Zu LH M SZ dH ZH pUe LH AHA ZHIN 008 ZHIN 008 Jejuenp aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 30 Release R13 00 00 through R14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Quantro R1 through R3 Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 350W VHF R1 and R2 INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG X999 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES STANDARD I SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 MHZ External Reference requires optional hardware Figure 7 31 Release SZ2 0 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater Trunking STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro 800 MHz Qu
190. Signal Strength Indicator 561 3 68 Aligning Squelch Adjust Procedure 3 71 Equalizing Batteries 3 73 For QUANTAR Stations edad yd 3 73 For Quantro Stations 3 75 Calibrating Reference Oscillator 3 75 Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Manual Procedure 3 75 Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure 3 77 Reference Oscillator Calibration External Reference Oscillator 3 78 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator UHSO 3 78 Setting ASTRO Tx Align and Test 3 82 Generating ASTRO Test 3 85 TDATA Calibration 6809 Trunking Station 3 88 ASTRO Bit Error Rate Reports 3 90 Post Optimization 3 93 Chapter 4 Optimizing the ASTRO TAC Comparator
191. Station Status Panel 5 26 Comparator Status Panel Screen 5 28 Station Comparator Software 5 30 Setting Date and TIME sey 95 E e ON x eie 5 30 Godeplug Reponts sis ace ede ton does e Pa Eton RO dd De Rc do eR as 5 31 Printing a Codeplug 5 31 Saving the Codeplug Report to a 5 32 Remote Station Disabling Enabling 5 33 ASTRO TAC 1 5 34 Chapter 6 Performing Post Repair Alignment Overview of Alignment Routines 6 1 Test Equipment for Post Repair Alignment 6 4 Aligning Power Output Procedure 1 6 4 Aligning Power Output Procedure for Quantro 350 W VHF Station 6 7 Aligning Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Procedure 350 W VHF Stations 6 11 Aligning Reference Modulation Compensation 6 14 6881
192. Station must be set to Access Disable in order to start any pattern transmissior Station Note Access Enable Access Disable Reset Station Station Status Not Keyed 7 Select either V 52 or Project 25 from the Pattern Type list as applicable 8 Click either Start BER Measurement or Start RSSI Measurement as applicable One of the following screens appear with measurement values for the following Absolute RSSI dBm e Relative RSSI dB Bit Error Rate 96 3 92 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL POST OPTIMIZATION CHECKOUT Post Optimization Checkout 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 After optimizing the equipment at a new installation you should perform some basic tests to verify that the equipment is functioning properly within the system Perform Station Diagnostics Diagnostics are run continuously on the station If errors are detected they are logged to the Status Report Check the Status Report for errors Frequency Deviation and Output Power Using standard measuring methods verify that the station meets specifications for frequency deviation and output power Place Call to Subscriber Plug a handset with Push To Talk PTT into the handset RJ 11 jack located on the front panel of the station control module Place a call to a subscriber unit located a reasonable distance from the site You should be able to talk and listen in simplex mode using the handset and PTT switch
193. TEMP ALARM High Power QUANTAR Extrnl Circ Only EXT WM FWD PWR ALARM Quantro Only Exciter Power Amplifier EXT WM REFL PWR ALARM Quantro Only Exciter Power Amplifier EXT WM VSWR ALARM Quantro Only Exciter Power Amplifier FAILSOFT Trunking Failure FAN FAILURE ALARM Cooling Fan s FINISH NVM CONDITIONING First block in the middle of another frame V FORCE MODEM HARD RESET V FORCE MODEM LONG TRAIN V FORCE MODEM SOFT RESET Frame abort received frame_abort sending failed 4 FRAME LENGTH VIOLATION 5 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source MEE ated Internal Incorrectly tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS FRAMES_RCVD_DURING_IDLE V FREQUENT RESET 4 Check status log for cause of reset FRMR ARRIVED WITH FWD PWR ALARM GENERIC ALARM 1 thru 5 GET CP TIMESTAMP GCU start task failed GCU task create failed gmm task creation failed gmm task start failed GSM start task failed GSM task create failed HC11 BAD LENGTH HC11 COMM OK HC11 MSG RETRIES FAILED HC11_NOSPIF HC11_NO_RESP HC11_PORT_ACCESS_FATLURE hcl task create failed hcl task start failed hct task create failed hct task start failed HDLC FRAME ABORTED on Receive
194. TERRUPT Unsupported protocol type V52 LAUNCH TIME ERR 41515 SA 5 5 5 5 5 57 5 A A CNN LN CS GS GN VARIABLE OUT OF RANGE 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 25 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectl Status Message y System Programmed Status RSS VERSION MISMATCH V Hardware Failure WC PTTN ERROR Station Control WL ALARM Wireline DIG CON IS DIGITAL DIG CON IS MODEM WL LINK TYPE IS MODEM WL LINK IS V24 s WL_REQUESTED_RETRANSMIT WL_STARTUP_ERROR Verify RSS Wireline and or Programming firmware WRITE BYTE COUNT FAILURE WRITE FAILURE Station Control WRITE SOCKET DATA ERR WRITE TO PROTECTED TX EEP Wrong ack type Wrong MDC ack type _ Station Status Panel Screen The Station Status Panel Screen provides three screens that display station maintenance and operational status information and station software version Function keys allow you to control various station operating characteristics through the PC keyboard See Figure 5 4 for the Station Status Panel screen example 5 26 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUC
195. TION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Hardware Status Station Status Status Messages Serial Number Station Name Channel Number Exciter Tx Synthesizer Power Amplifier External Ref Control Wireline High Power Booster STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Station Configuration 448CAX0252 Rx 1 Frequency MHz BOSTON FIRE x3 Rx 2 Frequency MHz 1 Tx Frequency MHz Hardware Status Receiver 1 LOCKED Rx 1 Synthesizer INACTIVE Receiver 2 OPERATIONAL Rx 2 Synthesizer OPERATIONAL Power Supply remos 24 Link NOT INSTALLED Station is DeKeyed Access Disable Prey Channel Next Channel Figure 5 4 Station Status Panel Screen Example 806012500 N A 851012500 NOT INSTALLED N A N A To generate station status click Status Panel Screen in the navigation pane Station operating and maintenance information appears The buttons on the screen are described in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Status Panel Screen Buttons Button Description General Buttons Next Channel Changes station operating channel incrementally Prev channel Changes station operating channel decrementally IR Channel Enable Enables repeater mode IR Channel Disable Disables repeater mode KeyUp Turns on station transmitter Dekey Turns off station transmitter Reset Performs a warm station reset same reset as simultaneously pressing Vol Up Vol Dn and Intercom buttons on Station Control Module
196. TNINIS TWNOILNSANOD 226 X SS3025V H3lV3d3H LSVO1TnNWIS aav WYS aav SSA90V ualvad3H 3N3uno3s 5 1V907 TIVNOILN3ANOO TWNOILNSANO9 16 21 5 TWNOILNSANOD 869X 697X 13N3uHn23S 2VL VY19JdS ze6x SS300V WYS aav 69 sepniour X ISVOINWIS aav jeuondo sasinbas LL OWLS OHLSV 1V907 SSA00V ualvadad DOIVNV V3HV 3qIA a3Naunoasvauv 1 207 TWNOLLNSANOD TVNOILN3ANO2 VNOILN3JANOO s Don sepnpul SSH gpuejg urew 4 pug eoedsepiM uojenbs pepoo niniw 226 SS399V Halv3adau WYS illqedeo aav OSHN sauniva4d SYVMLIOS TWNOILdO eoueJe8jeu 1X3 ZHIW OL ZHW S Sjeuueuo 2 S zL 66SX 692 869X W 93 5 aav Ovi vHlOdds aav LANAYNIAS AAV Suo PU LY SHA M OSE M yeg ZHN 006 Jeluenp 6 lt PH ynos JHN ozuenp M 001 YY M OLL uojenbs M OLL Zu LH M SZ zH 1H 04002 Od LY AHA 4Ejuenp ZHW 008 ueno 081 215 9 ZHN 008 1V901 IVNOLLN3ANOO sSaunivad AYVMLAOS daLYOddNS SNOILVLS 7 29 12
197. TRUCTION MANUAL Table 3 2 Wireline Tab Parameters continued PROGRAMMING WIRELINE CONFIGURATION DATA 422 Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any Fall Back In Cabinet If enabled station automatically repeats Disabled Disabled Customer determined Repeat if voting device fails to return signal for Enabled transmission with the specified time limit see below Fall Back Timer See Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat 0 to 10 000 msec 0 msec Customer determined Status Tone Specifies whether status tone typically Disabled Disabled Depends on system design 2175 Hz is placed on wireline during Enabled station receiver inactivity Status Tone Specifies the status tone frequency 2175 Hz 2175 Hz Customer determined Frequency typically 2175 Hz placed on wireline during station receiver inactivity Wireline Squelch When enabled allows the user to Disabled Disabled Customer determined configure the Tx Wireline port to squelch Enabled the audio routed to the transmitter when the audio level fails below the threshold level as set by user The signal is unsquelched when audio level rises above threshold level plus hysteresis Threshold level and hysteresis value are set on Service Alignment TX Wireline Alignment tab Rx Securenet to Determines whether secure signals are Disabled Disabled Customer determined Wireline sent to console through wireline Enable
198. The following tables provide information about each tab s parameters e Wireline tab Table 3 2 on page 3 10 TRC tab Table 3 3 on page 3 11 e ASTRO tab Table 3 4 on page 3 12 Table 3 2 Wireline Tab Parameters I Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default MEE p 9 Setting if any Wireline Operation Defines the type of wireline 2 wire half duplex 2 wire half duplex Set as required by the communications that exist between the 4 wire half duplex console connection station and remote console 4 wire full duplex e 6 wire full duplex 8 wire full duplex Console Priority If enabled a console is connected to a Disabled Disabled Customer determined 6809 trunked repeater Enabled Remote Control Type Defines the type of remote control used ASTRO N A Determined by system This field is editable and is determined TRC configuration by the Station Type setting on the DC Hardware Configuration screen None TRC Input Specifies the wireline circuit connected Linel N A Display only to Tone Remote Control Line2 Outbound Analog Specifies time interval at which station 20 300 sec 120 sec Customer determined Link Timer reports to its connected device that station is receiving an analog call Comparator Specifies the type of comparator in a None None Determined by system voting system configuration SPECTRA TAC 3 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INS
199. The following window appears 11 57 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Software Download Legacy Devices Note Functionality is supported for Quantar Quantro and AstroTAC 3000 Comparator stations only Timestamp Date yyyyimmidd 2005 08 124 Program Firmware Time HH MM SS 09 25 03 Erase Flash r Station Settings Quantar Quantro BR Family Normal Mode AstroTAC 3000 Comparator Save Status r Connection Settings Connection Type Ethernet O Serial Modem Serial Port Baud Rate Station Port Device IP Address Modem Properties Phone Book Phone Number Firmware Directory Enter today s date in yyyyhmmidd format 6 Setthe date and time in the Timestamp fields 7 Select the appropriate station type in the Station Settings field 8 Select the appropriate connection type in the Connection Settings area This determines the fields available For Ethernet connections download Enter the station s IP address For serial connections Configure the following as required for your PC Serial Port Baud Rate Station Port For modem connection Configure the following as required for your PC and IntelliRepeater system Serial Port Baud Rate Station Port 11 58 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 200
200. The full power Refer to system design amplifier module This field is limited to a pre determined output power level if the station is equipped with the Limited Output Power option QUANTAR 25 to 110 of the station s power rating selected in PA Power Rating document for FCC licensed power rating Tx Power Out Specifies the output power from the station power Quantro 50 to 110 50 of value Customer defined Set to Battery Backup amplifier module when in battery backup mode QUANTAR 25 to selected in PA lower value to extend 110 Power Rating station operation in of the station s power battery backup mode rating Rev Signal Allows polarity of receive signal to be inverted Enabled Disabled Customer defined Inversion Disabled Analog Repeater Specifies whether the received signal is boosted Enabled Disabled Customer defined Boost prior to transmission by repeater Boost 150 3 Disabled dB Example 2 kHz deviation receive signal is repeated at 3 kHz deviation Compander Determines whether the companding compression Enabled Disabled Applies to 900 MHz and expansion is employed for transmit receive Disabled only Must be enabled signals for 900 MHz stations Noise Canceller Determines whether the receiver noise cancellation Enabled Disabled Must be enabled for 900 is employed Disabled MHz stations Customer determined Programming RF Configuration 3 44 Click RF Config
201. To configure the PC s modem through the RSS Modem Configuration screen perform the following procedure 1 Launch the RSS program 2 From the Tools menu select Configure Connection The Configure Connection window appears 3 Click Modem PC MODEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 9 REMOTE DIAL UP Connection Screen Connection Type O Serial Serial Settings Serial Port COM8 Nj Baud Rate 9600 b Modem Settings Phone Book Modem Configuration Phone Number 5143947964 Moscad Response Time Multiplier 1 Connect Dial Disconnect Hang Up The screen changes to provide modem configuration controls 4 Click Phone Book The Phone Book window appears Phone Book Base Station Description Phone Number qq 11 0121111111 Phone Book Operations 5 Enter the dial up phone numbers for the sites where the stations are installed and provide an obvious description for each number such as the site identifier 6 Click Save when done 9 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 9 1 RSS PC Modem Configuration Data Fields PC MODEM CONFIGURATION 7 Click Modem Configuration The Modem Configuration window appears Modem Configuration Command Strings Initialization Dial Prefix Hang Up Drop DTR to Hangup Wait for Connect Pause between Calls 0 1 48 050 0 ATDT
202. UCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure 1 Disconnect the station s receive antenna cable 2 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 3 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 4 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 5 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane Radio Service Software Base Radio xl File Service Configuration Tools Help x 4 Base Radio EH 24 Configuration Hardware Configuration Site Frequency Site General 9 Site Timer 9 Full Sub Band Partition 9 Radio Modulation Partition 99 Repeater Information Repeater Summary RF Configuration VWildCard Input VWildCard Output VWWildCard Tables EH Service Reference Oscillator Frequency confirmation e Meteri 9 5 statui The station will automatically be put into Access Disable mode station reset will be required to return the station to Access Enabled Do you want to continue 2 Status m TX Wireline Astro Simulcast Test Pattern TDA TA Calibration Cire 4 m Reterence Modulation Compensation m Battery Equalization squelch
203. Up Connection 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 9 1 MODEM REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 9 REMOTE DIAL UP Modem Requirements Two modems are required for a dial up connection One modem should have been installed at the station s location and is part of the system The other modem is connected between your RSS PC and the land line Although the figure shows a stand alone modem this modem can be installed in the laptop If the modem is part of the RSS PC the modem s drivers and communications program such as Hyperterminal must be installed on the PC and the operating system set up properly for modem operation See the documentation accompanying the modem and the operating system s documentation for information on installing and configuring the modem Listed below are the requirements for modems for use with QUANTAR and Quantro stations Hayes compatible computer interface V 32 9600 bps protocol If error correction and or data compression are desired all connected modems must employ the same scheme Station modem must be configured for auto answer Station Modem Configuration The station must be configured with the proper settings to allow communications with the PC modem Configuration requires that a PC running a communications program be connected to the modem and commands be entered to program the desired settings The following procedure provides the configuration for the communications program that is to control the modem 1
204. VD drive holding the RSS distribution CD 3 Double click setup exe to launch it The InstallShield Wizard sets up the system for RSS installation Wait until the initial installation Wizard window appears Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Radio Service Software The InstallShield Wizard will install Radio Service Software on your computer To continue click Next 4 Click Next The License Agreement window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 5 INSTALLING THE RSS SOFTWARE CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Attention Carefully Read This Important Document BEFORE You Install This Package Motorola Software License Terms AS USED HERE IN AFTER USER MEANS YOU YOUR EMPLOYEES AND AGENTS THIS IS 4 LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN USER AND MOTOROLA INC MOTOROLA SOFTWARE MEANS QUANTAR WINDOWS RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE TOGETHER WITH ANY ACCOMPANY DOCUMENTATION THIS CARD CONTAINS THE TERMS UNDER WHICH USER MAY USE THE SOFTWARE UNLESS USER HAS SIGNED SOFTWARE LICESNSE AGREEMENT WITH MOTOROLA THAT ATH TO THI FORA sern anre Hor anner ro s Timer I accept the terms of the license agreement 8 1 do not accept the terms of the license agreement nstallShield Cancel 5 Read the license agreement and click I accept the terms of the license a
205. Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system 80 MB free hard disk space for use by the RSS program Installing the RSS Software The RSS software is provided on a CD To install the RSS software perform the following procedure Before proceeding ensure that the system requirements are met as outlined above 1 Insert the RSS distribution CD into the computer s CD ROM or DVD drive In systems set up for self launching executables setup exe launches automatically If the installation program launches automatically proceed to step 4 Ifthe installation program does not launch automatically proceed to the next step Ifa previous RSS version is found to be installed then the following window appears 2 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTALLING THE RSS SOFTWARE Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the Radio Service Software Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Modify Select new program features to add or select currently installed features to remove Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup Remove all installed features Proceed to Removing a Previous RSS Version on page 2 10 When complete return to this section 2 Using either Windows Explorer or My Computer navigate to the CD ROM or D
206. YS aav O2V1 VHLO3dS aav SSA00V H31V3d3H 1 207 TWNOILNSANO9 5 17207 V3uv 5 1 207 IVNOILNJ3ANOO TVNOILN3ANOO IVNOILN3ANOO 66 lt 692 aav OVL VYLOFdS aav 869X 13N34N93S aav 226 55399 1 WYS qav 2H LY AHA M OSE 169X ZHN 006 JEluenO uBnouu LH JHnogueno M 001 YH M OLL ZH SZ bY cu pue LY AHA ZHN 008 JejUeND ZHN 008 oguenp 1V901 IVNOILLNJANOO aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 5 Release R5 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 26 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL OHLSV 1V907 LSVOTNINIS TWNOILNSANO9 IVNOILN3ANOO 226 242X SSA0OV H3lv3dadH WYS aav ISVOINWIS aav 65320 ualvadau L3NFHNIIS 4 5 1V907 IVNOILNHJANOO IVNOILNJ3ANOO 1svo1nWis T1VNOILN3ANOO 869X 697X J3N3Un23S aav 2V1 VHL23dS AAV 226 55300 WYS Gav 69 242X 1SYoTNNIS aav SS399V 3qIA L3N3uno3svauv 17207 DOIVNV 17201 jeuondo OHLSV v3iuv 1v201 TVN
207. a to an Archive File on page 2 23 or The comparator s codeplug as outlined in Writing Codeplug Data to the Device on page 2 21 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR Programming the Comparator The RSS program allows the user to set up the operating parameters for an ASTRO TAC comparator Figure 4 1 shows the ASTRO TAC comparator screens provided in the navigation pane that are discussed in this section 239 AstroTAC Comparator System Type CONVENTIONAL amp H Configuration Hardware Configuration Comparator Type STANDARD Conventional System Analog Voting Port Control Comparator Name G lt Version Screen Battery Em M Alignment Screen Simulcast DISABLED Status Report Screen 4 pw Status Panel Screen Simulcast Launch Time Delay 180 msec Diagnostics Screen Validate Configuration Figure 4 1 Comparator Configuration Screen Two ASTRO TAC comparator systems are supported The 3 6 version This is a standard 16 port comparator The 3 9 version Supports both standard and expanded comparator configurations The expanded comparator provides for a primary comparator with up to two ports for digital interface units DIUs and up to four expanded comparators which support up to 64 ports for stations and receivers Programming the Hardware Configuration Screen Clic
208. address is successfully set Click the restart button to put it in effect de 4 Click OK The window closes 5 You must reset the device to activate its MAC address to the value you entered If you do not reset the device at this point the MAC address you entered is not activated in the device To restart the device click Reset The device restarts and uses the MAC address you entered when it completes the restart process 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 7 SETTING THE DEVICE S DATE AND TIME CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Setting the Device s Date and Time To set the device s date and time perform the following procedure 1 From the Tools menu select Set device data and time See Figure 3 3 ko Help Connection configuration Set Date And Time Screen PC Date And Time Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address Set device password Date Time 2005 08 01 12 53 27 Show CodePlug size Device Date And Time CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Date Y Y Y Y MM DD 1900 01 01 Time HH MM SS 04 08 43 OK Apply Cancel Enter the device date in Y Y MM DD format Help Figure 3 3 Set Date and Time Screen 2 The read only portion of the window displays the RSS computer s current date and time Set the device s date and time in the appropriate fields 3 When done click either OK or Apply Programming Wireline Configuration Data The Wireline Configuration scr
209. adjust m RX Wireline line 2 8 Reference Oscillator m TX Deviation 8 Power Output m RSSI Calibration Station Note Station Status 6 Click Yes to continue NOTE When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 57 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 3 58 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION W Reference Mert trtion Crrspenantien NE ncn Aus Fx Wireline 2 WE Reterence Power Output RSS Reference Oscillator Frequency Tranamit Frequency 8530125 Met Sintion Note Sintion in Currer y ACCESS FO Statut Noc Keyed Click RX Wireline Line 2 tab a confirmation window appears Click Yes The Rx Wireline Line 2 screen appears Reterence TX Deviation Power M R55 Catenion W Reference Moduisbon Compensation Gattery Equatzetion E Squeich Adust RX Wireline ire 2 Current Stored RXWireline Level 1 KHz 50 60 Peak Audio Level 16 RX Wireline Equalization Spectra iglaASTRO TAC Current Stored LO Boost Adjust Levei 2400 Hz 00 oo Tone Hi Boast Adjust Levni 2504 10
210. al connection download times RS 232 Phone line Q PC modem Station modem Laptop with RSS Figure 11 4 Remote Dial Up Connection Zone Controller Link Connection For SmartZone IntelliRepeater systems system releases 3 0 and 3 5 you may download the software to a remote station using the zone controller link This link consists of a cable connected between the zone controller and a local channel bank typically connected to a remote channel bank through a T1 line or a local modem Note that this type of connection results in download times similar to a serial connection about 10 minutes The site remains in site trunking for the duration of the download or a maximum of 30 minutes The procedure for software download using the zone controller link depends on the parity required by the system s zone controller and whether channel banks or modems can be remotely configured Use the table below to determine your particular scenario and follow the corresponding procedures to perform the software download 11 50 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 11 1 Zone Controller Link Connection Scenarios CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE Zone Controller Parity Requirements Channel Bank or Modem Remotely Configurable Channel Bank or Modem Manually Configurable Only Zone Controller links that require ODD parity Zone Controller links that can operate wit
211. alization ENABLED ry Compar stor Comparator Undetect Time 150 Une 5 msec ircremerts Comparator NONE Comparator SPECTRA TAC Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat ENABLED v Fall Back Time 400 msec l Status Tore Status Tone Status Tone DISABLED Status Tone ENABLED v Status Tone Frequency 2175 Hz Wireline Squeich Samick Wireline Squelch Sq DABLED _ Wireline Squelch DISABLED v Analog Station Tone Remote Control Wireline Tab Analog Station one Remote Control TRC Tab Analog Station DC Remote Control Figure 3 4 Wireline Configuration Screen Examples Analog Only Station Type 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PROGRAMMING WIRELINE CONFIGURATION DATA CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Wireline Astro Wireline Wireline Operation 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX ASTRO ASTRO v Wireline Interface V 24 HYBRID v Outbound Analog Link Timer 120 sec Astro To Wireline ENABLED Analog Idle Link Check DISABLED Equalization DISABLED v Digital Idle Link Check ENABLED v SEUSS External Transmit Clock DISABLED E x Modem Input Level Tx WL 0 28 v dBm Modern Output Level 14 dBm RTRT Configuration DISABLED Status Tone Status Tone DISABLED Wireline Squelch Wireline Squelch DISABLED v Figure 3 5 Wireline Configuration Screen Tab Examples ASTRO Capable or ASTRO CAI Capable Station Type
212. an archive Click Continue 4 The Codeplug Has Been Successfully Saved To Disk Opening an Archive Codeplug File To open an archive codeplug file perform the following steps 1 To open an existing archive file perform either of the two as given below From the File menu select Open A browser window appears or 2 25 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 FILE MAINTENANCE Click Open on the toolbar Open Menu Item Radio Service Software Base Radio ervice Configuration Tools Help Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Seri Save As Read From Device Ctrl R RES Write to Device Ctrl Ww Open File Icon CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Radio Service Software Base Radio File Service Configuration Tools Help ARK 2 Open window appears Browse to the directory where you saved the archive file Look in My Recent Documents My Network Places lea system 1 Codeplug cp IR 1 site 1 cp Test Codeplug for Jeff cp File name IR 1 site 1 cp Files oftype cadeplug files cp lt lt Preview 3 Select the archive file you want to open If required select the file name and then click Preview This displays information about the archive file entered at the time the archive was created See the example below 2 26 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FILE MAINTENANCE Look in la system 1
213. antar VHF R1 and R2 Quantro UHF R1 through R4 Quantar 900 MHz Quantro 350 W VHF R1 and R2 INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA SECURENET STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels X998 5 MHZ External Reference requires optional hardware Figure 7 32 Release SZ2 3 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater Trunking STATIONS SUPPORTED Quantro Quantar Quantar Quantro Quantar Quantar Quantro 800 MHz 800 MHz VHF R1 and R2 INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG UHF R1 through R4 UHF R1 25W R2 110 W R4 100 W 900 MHz 350 W VHF R1 and R2 X999 INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA SECURENET X998 STANDARD SOFTWARE FEATURES Battery Revert 12 5 kHz Channels 5 10 MHz External Reference UHSO Full Sub Band Partition OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES Remote RSS includes Station Password Protection Remote Dial Up Capability requires optional hardware Figure 7 33 Release SZ2 7 2 7E Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater Trunking 7 52 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES STATIONS SUPPORTED STANDARD OPTIONAL SOFTWARE FEATURES SOFTWARE FEATURES Quantro 800 MHz Quantar 800 MHz Remote RSS includes Battery Revert Quantar VHF R1 and R2 Station Password Protection Quantro
214. area of the screen displays the progress Transmit Frequency 851 0 AUTO NET 5 MHz AUTO NET 10 MHz MA AUTO NET calibration at 5 MHz sag FES 11 When the process is complete close the Completed Successfully message window The oscillator adjustment data is saved to the station codeplug and the station dekeys If the internal reference oscillator has been calibrated proceed to the next step 12 Click Keyup to key the station 13 While observing the R2001 analyzer display adjust the station s reference oscillator using the left or right arrows until the R2001 displays the specified FCC transmit frequency 14 Click Save to save the setting in the station 15 Click Dekey to dekey the station 3 81 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Setting ASTRO Tx Align and Test Procedure This procedure applies only to conventional and 6809 trunking stations In an ASTRO simulcast system all station transmitters are synchronized to a pulse per second pps signal from a global positioning satellite GPS receiver The 1 pps signal provides a common time reference for each of the transmitters The ASTRO signaling information arriving at the station transmitter includes timestamps that specify the launch time for the voice and data transmissions In any simulcast system small zones of poor subscriber reception nulls may occur in the overlapping coverage areas from multiple transmitters Fine adjustment of
215. as operating frequencies output power and squelch type Repeater A type of station in which any signal received is subsequently transmitted This requires different frequencies for transmit and receive SECURENET Type of secure radio communications using Motorola proprietary signaling and encryption decryption protocol Simulcast Radio communications system in which voice data to be transmitted is sent to multiple sites and transmitted simultaneously to provide wide area coverage Squelch Methods of eliminating noise from the speaker when no received signal is present Three common types of squelch are carrier CSQ Pl and DPL Transparent Indicates that the station is equipped to operate in a digital system but is not capable of encryption or decryption Trunking Allocation of station resources by a central controller in accordance with configured rules This allows a relatively small amount of station resources to be dynamically shared amongst subscribers Wireline Typically a phone line connection between a console and a station 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Acronyms APPENDIX 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Acronym Definition AMSS Automatic Multiple Site Selection ASCII American Standard Code Information Interchange AES Area Systems Engineer COM Communications port COAM Customer Owned and Maintained CHAN Channel CONV
216. as R08 00 00 to RO9 00 00 minor releases resulting in the middle two digits being incremented such as RO9 01 00 and maintenance releases resulting in the last two digits being incremented such as 09 01 01 For this RSS the release number is printed on the RSS CD and appears in the About window 57 mm When contacting Motorola for RSS technical support be sure to provide the complete version information as displayed in the About window by clicking Version Details RSS Program Version and Station Firmware Relationship Each RSS program version is accompanied with a simultaneous upgrade release of the station software Table 7 1 through Table 7 6 describe the relationships between RSS program versions IC part numbers and conventional 6809 trunking and IntelliRepeater station software versions 7 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Table 7 1 TRN7475 and TRN7667 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SmartZone Version 5 Rel Release IC Firmware Release IC Firmware elease Part No Version Part No Version SCM SCM B011 01 009 SCM IR 8 14 R1 00 called RI 00 U653 5191020641 WL 011 01 006 572 0 U653 5191022C03 Comb WL 930504 R01 19 17 Conventional 654 5191020042 EXC B011 01 003 U654 5191022C04 EXC 7 11 WL WL Onl
217. ator is installed in a Enabled Disabled System dependent simulcast system Disabled Simulcast Launch Specifies the delay required for transmission in a 0 to 999 msec 180 System dependent Time Delay simulcast system Vote Scan Used by multicast channels Enabling allows for Enabled Disabled System dependent the addition of a preamble to all TSBK control Disabled messages in the TSBK Preamble Duration Field TSBK Preamble Accessible only when Vote Scan is enabled 0 to 999 msec 0 System dependent Duration Expanded Comparator Type This specifies the voting system that the Standard Standard System dependent comparator is installed in standard or expanded Expanded Chassis Number This specifies the comparator s chassis number Primary Primary System dependent for a comparator installed in an expanded system Secondaryl Secondary2 Secondary3 secondary4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR Programming the Conventional System Screen Click Conventional System in the navigation pane to access the Conventional System screen Figure 4 3 See Table 4 2 for the screen s data fields Voice Repeat Operation Voice Repest Operation Vote Priority FIRST IN Vote Priority FIRST IN 3 Source Based Priority CONSOLE Source Based Priority CONSOLE Analog Voice Repeat Hanctime 2 0 sec Voice Console Hangtim
218. attery Eousizston E Squeich W RX Weetne ire 2 Current Stored RX Wireline Level 1 KHz 50 80 Peak Audio Level 16 dBm RX Weelne Equniization 5pectrn DigUA STRO TAC Current Stored LO Boost Adjust Level 00 100 je Hi Boost Adjust Levei 8 26802 00 00 HiBoostFrequency 2500 Hz 290 Current Stored Tone On Status Tone Level Below Peak Audio 1930 430 Alert Tone Level Below Peak Audio 100 dB Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS Station Status Not Keyed 3 61 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 3 62 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Click Tone On to cause the station receiver to generate a 1 kHz test tone at the level specified in Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure on page 3 57 Measure in dBm and record the value as indicated on the AC voltmeter connected to the comparator Current Stored L 4 RX Wireline Level 1 KHz 6 dBm 6 dBm Press to turn on the 1 KHz tone Audio Level 1 6 dBm Click Tone Off near the bottom of the pane Local Oscillator Boost Equalization Optional 10 11 12 Click Tone On for Local Oscillator LO Boost Adjust Level 400 Hz in the Rx Wireline Equalization section to cause the station receiver to generate a 400 Hz alignment tone Measure in dBm and record the value RX Wireline Equalization Spectra Digi amp STRO TAC Current Stored LO Boost Adjust Level 2400 Hz 00 dB 00 dB mu e e m
219. ave Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 5 32 IB Save Save in My Recent Documents 2 Desktop Documents My Computer d My Network Places a My Documents D Adobe Corel User Files Creator My eBooks My Music a My Pictures 3 My Shapes m My Videos File name Files oftyp amp Codeplug report files txt 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Remote Station Disabling Enabling 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 example txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help REMOTE STATION DISABLING ENABLING If required browse to the directory where you want to store the codeplug data text file Name the file by typing the filename in the Filename field The file is saved as a txt file Click Save The RSS program formats and then saves the codeplug data text file to disk Figure 5 8 provides an example of a saved codeplug report opened using a text editor STATION CONFIGURATION SYSTEM TYPE SERIAL NUMBER STATION NAME HARDWARE PLATFORM RX FREQUENCY BAND 1 RX FREQUENCY BAND 2 PA EXCITER FREQ BAND PA POWER RATING WIRELINE WILDCARD POWER SUPPLY BATTERY TYPE STATION TYPE INTELLIREPEATER FREQ FREQUENCY REFERENCE SIMULCAST MULTI CODED SQUELCH MRTI INTERFACE SITE NUMBER SCANNING RECEIVER MA IN STANDBY WIRELINE CONFIGURATION WIRELINE OPERATION CONSO
220. b and set the options as follows Display progress while connecting Checked Prompt for name and password certificate etc Unchecked 20 Select the Networking tab The following window appears 11 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS General Options Security Networking Sharing Type of dial up server am calling w w tings R Components checked are used by this connection E Y Internet Protocol TCP IP File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks a Deterministic Network Enhancer EB Client for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Cancel 21 Select SLIP Unix Connection in the Type of dial up server I am calling list 22 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry 23 Click Properties The following window appears General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 193 E 8 Gbtain DNS server address automatically f Use the following DNS serv
221. cally in alphanumeric form and broadcast periodically during station operation Carrier Squelch One of several methods of opening the receiver path and unmuting the audio path to the speaker Other methods are PL DPL and ASTRO Channel A pair of frequencies transmit and receive used for a single communications path Codeplug The area of non volatile memory in the station that stores the station configuration calibration and personality profiles COMX The serial communications port s available on a PC Usually COMI through COM4 Defaults Data placed into RSS data fields either as a placeholder or as typical data for the particular field Default data may be edited as necessary Dekey Turn off the station transmitter Deviation The amount of variance or from the carrier frequency caused by audio or data modulation Typically expressed in or kHz C 1 Term Failsoft CHAPTER C GLOSSARY Definition A station operating mode entered when the trunking central controller is either unavailable or nonfunctional This provides basic operation until the trunking central controller is available or becomes functional Field Area on the display in which data may be entered or edited Full Duplex Simultaneous transmit and receive Key Turn on the station s transmitter Personality Set of parameters settings and features that define the operation of a station This includes specifics such
222. ccess Code Table For example Binary Group is comprised of station inputs 1 2 3 and 4 and may be used to allow the station operating channel to be set according to the binary state of the four inputs for example 0010 sets the station to Channel 2 Programming the WildCard Input Screen A common application of the station inputs is allowing external equipment usually a console to control the current station channel number and or the access code table number to be used by the station To facilitate these applications the WildCard Input screen provides the ability to select predefined groups of inputs whose binary values determine the station channel or access code table Alternatively in order to provide maximum flexibility in designing WildCard Functions the inputs may also be configured individually To access the WildCard Input screen click WildCard Input in the navigation pane Figure 10 1 shows representative WildCard screens Enhanced selected in the Hardware Configuration screen The figure shows two views one where the Binary Groups are set to None and the other when inputs are specified Table 10 1 provides descriptions of the provided fields 10 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION AUXILIARY INPUTS L I z ret Type Active Level Group i eei oa s J 3 Trievtietoe Vu L
223. ce Software InstallShield Wizard Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its Features 3 Click Yes to remove the previous version s program and features The uninstall process starts and a progress window appears 2 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL REMOVING A PREVIOUS RSS VERSION Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Setup Status The InstallShield Wizard is removing Radio Service Software InstallShield Cancel 4 When the uninstallation process completes the progress window automatically closes and the following window appears Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Uninstall Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished uninstalling Radio Service Software 5 Click Finish to close the window 6 Proceed to Installing the RSS Software on page 2 4 to install the latest RSS version 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 11 REPAIRING AN INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Repairing an Installation The installation program provides steps for repairing an installation Repair may be necessary if the RSS application does not function properly To repair your RSS installation perform the following procedure 1 Launch the RSS installation program 2 Click Repair Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the Radio Service Software Setup Maintenance p
224. configuration controller of the site identity Site Type This field allows two choices for the site Remote Remote As determined by the system type Stand alone configuration Minimum Repeaters This field specifies the minimum number 2through maximum 2 Set to half the number of repeaters at to Trunk of repeaters that must be operational before number of repeaters site and rounded to next integer value the site is allowed to trunk For example for a nine repeater site set this to 5 for an eight repeater site set it to 4 Token Repeater In the event that a site with an even number lthroughmaximum 1 As determined by the system Number of repeaters suffers a DLAN loss that number of repeaters configuration divides the site in half this field identifies the number of the repeaters and therefore the side that repeats The other side enters failsoft mode For example a site with six repeaters 1 6 and a DLAN loss between 3 and 4 divides the site into two sides 1 3 and 4 6 If the Token Repeater Number is set to 5 then side 4 6 repeats and 1 3 enters failsoft mode Connect Tone This field allows eight choices 0 through Use Help or refer to 105 9 As determined by the system 7 These correspond to a connect tone Appendix XXX configuration and must match the frequency 0 corresponds to 105 9 Hz 1 connect tone set in the subscribers corresponds to 76 6 Hz ASTRO Rx Tx This field defines receive transmit ASTRO 000 FFF hex 293 Depe
225. connected to the back of the chassis on connector 20 Working with the RSS Program Launching the RSS Program 1 Launch the RSS program by either e Double clicking the shortcut icon placed on your desktop or Selecting Radio Service Software from the Start All Programs Motorola Radio Service Software menu The splash screen appears as shown in the example below Radio Service Software stor R14 00 04 Part Number RVN5002 2 When the green progress bar completely fills its area click Continue The RSS window appears 2 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG I Radio Service Software Fie ev Too The RSS program is now ready to connect to the device to read its codeplug Exiting the RSS Program To exit the RSS program click X in the upper right corner of the RSS program window or from the File menu select Exit When the Exit message appears click Yes to close the RSS program Please make sure to save the codeplug before exiting Do you really want to exit To read the device codeplug perform the following steps 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 15 READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW 1 Launch the RSS program and connect to the device base station as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 2 Click either Tools then Connection Configuration or e Open Co
226. creen Metering Screen Status Report Screen Test And Measurement Screen Status Panel Screen Collapsed screen hierarchy Expanded screen hierarchy Clicking a screen name imports the information into the information pane 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 19 READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW 9 Base Radio 5 Configuration Hardware Wireline igurati Access Code Table Multi Coded Squelch Table Channel Information RC Command Table pC Command Tabl YF Configuration nfiguration 000000 Ai Radio Service Software Base Radio Sor Marier 445CAX0262 Sete FIRE 3 Hardware QUANTAR gt x Channel ntormabon RF Cortiguration TxFregBamd 800 851270 v 6809 terface Yaad get Vas Battery Type LEAD ACD LN Ser vee B vaxet ENMANCED Operation ENABLED fetch DISABLED Upton Arrow Heys To Select System Type Clicking another screen name opens that screen in place of the one currently displayed Unlike previous DOS based RSS versions this GUI version allows you to see the entire function list at one time Figure 2 7 shows the structure of the information or function presented in each RSS screen 2 20 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Writing Codeplug Da
227. ct to the device perform the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and double click the Phone and Modem Options icon 2 Phone and Modem Options 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 3 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 2 Select the Modems tab Phone And Modem ED Dialing Rules Modems Advanced 3 Click Add at the bottom of the screen 4 the window that appears select the Don t detect my modem I will select it from list check box Don t detect my modem will select it from a list lt Back Cancel 5 Click Next The following window appears Manufacturers Models NULL Modem Types Standard Modem Types 3Com Communications cable between two computers Standard 300 bps Modem Standard 1200 bps Modem Standard 2400 bps Modem Standard 9600 bps Modem xil Standard 14400 bps Modem Standard 19200 hne Madam 6 Click Have Disk 7 the next screen browse to the directory that contains the mdmmotcss9x inf and mdmmotcssnt inf files Generally these files are found in the default installation directory C Program Files Motorola Radio Service Software 8 Click Open The following window appears 1 Install New Modem 45 Select the manufacturer and model of your modem If your modem is not listed or if you have an installation disk click Have Disk Manufacturers Models Motorola CSS 9x CSS
228. cters this table Enter text using keyboard 14 alphanumeric characters max Table Indicates the current table number and Up to XX tables 1 System dependent shows total number of tables currently implemented Jump to Table Enter desired table number and press Up to the number of 1 System dependent Enter key to display corresponding configured tables table State Field Defines a station state that is used to Provided in selection Blank System dependent determine an action list Condition Field Determines the boolean operation AND Blank System dependent performed on the selected states AND NOT OR ORNOT Action Action list contains commands which Provided in selection Blank are executed sequentially top to list bottom when the state condition settings change from untrue to true Inaction Inaction list contains commands Provided in selection Blank which are executed sequentially top to bottom when the state condition settings change from true to untrue list 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 10 9 STATE ACTION TABLES CHAPTER 10 WILDCARD OPERATION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 10 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER 11 Software Downloading QUANTAR and Quantro stations ASTRO TAC comparators and ASTRO TAC receivers equipped with FLASH memory support the Software Download SWDL feature This feature allows service personnel to download the station operating software previously stored in firmware directly
229. ction Remote Dial Up Capability SMARTZONE 2 0 3 SMARTZONE 3 0 SMARTNET 2 0 2 requires optional hardware 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 LSVOTAINIS OHLSV SNDINQH L SNDINR L 6089 08157 6089 LSVOTANIS 1 5 ONDINNYL 6089 LSVOTANIS 6089 199 M DOWNY 3LIS3TONIS 9O1VNv vayy aam 6089 ONDINNYL 6089 3N3uno3s aqIN 6089 tZ A pyeog 688X 688 seinbeu 692 888X 888X 69230 LLLX Ayjiqedeg asvoinwis isvomnwis OV L VHLOJdS 8 5890 119 aav aay 69zX qus LLLX ALIHOIHd 3105102 2 12345 AAY 1SVO1TnWIS day 4136 686X 5SO1VNV dav 68 OH1SV d 13SA 266 16 ALIS 315NIS 966X SNDINQH L L3N3Hf193S ALIS 66 OHLSV 6089 ONDINNY L 6089 3LIS 319NIS SNPINQH L 6089 ONDINNYL 15 6089 ANOZLYVINS 0 I3NLHVINS 202 LINLYYNS 0 3NOZLHVIAS 0 3NOZLHVAS Aujigede dn Ieiq uonoejoJg uoneis jeuondo PU LH SHA M OSE ZHW 0
230. ction Options Which type of connection do you want to set up computer using your serial parallel or infrared port 6 Select Connect directly to another computer 7 Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Host or Guest To connect two computers your computer must be identified as either a host or a the role you want for this computer Hos This computer has the information you want to access This computer is used to access information on the 8 Select Guest 9 Click Next The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 29 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING New Connection Wizard Connection Name What is the name of the other computer you are connecting to Type the name of the other computer in the following box Computer Name CSS_SLIP_FP_9600_COM1 The name you type here will be the name of the connection you are creating 10 Enter the name of the connection in accordance with the rules provided in RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 11 Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection Select a device 12 Select the device you just added from the dropdown box 13 Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wiza
231. d Network and Dial up Connections The screen that appears contains at least the Make New Connection entry SCom 30920 Integrated 2 Double click Make a New connection 3 Click Next The following window appears Network Connection Wizard Network Connection Type You can choose the type of network connection you want to create based on your network configuration and your networking needs Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN Dial up to the Internet Connect to the Internet using my phone line modem or ISDN Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the Internet Accept incoming connections Let other computers connect to mine by phone line the Internet or direct cable Connect directly to another computer Connect using my serial parallel or infrared port lt Back Cancel 4 Select Connect directly to another computer 5 Click Next The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 17 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Network Connection Wizard Host Guest To connect two computers specify which one you are using A Choose the role you want for this computer Host This computer has the information you want to access Guest This computer will be used to access informat
232. d Equalization Specifies whether station is allowed to Disabled Disabled Determined by system equalize Rx wireline Enabled configuration 1 The wireline interface board is equipped with a 2 wire 4 wire jumper JU1010 Ensure that the jumper and Wireline Operation setting are correctly set Table 3 3 Tone Remote Control Tab Parameters 5245 Range Recommended Data Field Description Default SSMO p Selections Setting if any HLGT Frequency Specifies the frequency used for high level guard 1900 to 3000 Hz 2175 Hz Customer determined tone HLGT Automatic Level If enabled station automatically aligns Tx Enabled Disabled Customer determined Control ALC Wireline TRC systems only Disabled Tx Notch Filter Removes LLGT from Tx audio signal LLGT is Enabled Disabled Enabled in systems with same frequency as HLGT as specified above in Disabled TRC Disabled in all other HLGT Frequency systems Rx Notch Filter Removes HLGT from Rx audio signal Removal Enabled Disabled Enabled in voting or is performed when status tone decoder such as Disabled SECURENET systems SPECTRR TAC DIGI TAC or CIU connected to Rx wireline may provide false status tone detect due to high content of HLGT in audio signal LLGT Undetect Time Specifies the time interval between loss of LLGT 60 2000 msec 5 msec 150 msec Customer determined 6881085E35 AG and station dekey Allows for momentary dropout on wireline 12 30 2006 in
233. d Communications The serial software download SWDL feature can be installed and run on the following Microsoft Windows operating systems Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Configure your PC for connecting to the device depending on the Microsoft Windows operating system you are running and the method of serial communications you are using as outlined below Ifconnecting the PC s serial port directly to the station s RSS port See Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional on page 11 3 See Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional on page 11 23 fconnecting through a dial up modem See Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional on page 11 14 See Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional on page 11 35 Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional To connect to the station receiver or comparator to perform SWDL using a direct connection you must Add a null modem that uses your computer s serial port This is used to connect to the device See Adding a Null Modem in Windows 2000 Professional on page 11 3 Adda SLIP connection that uses the null modem you just added See Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Null Modem Connection on page 11 7 Adding a Null Modem in Windows 2000 Professional To add a null modem to conne
234. data The RSS allows the status log file to be retrieved and displayed providing useful diagnostics information to aid in troubleshooting the station This section describes how to access read and interpret the status report data 1 Connect the PC to the station as outlined in Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 2 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 3 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 4 The Service screens provide access to the following status screens Metering Screens see Station Metering Screens on page 5 2 Status Report Screen see Station Comparator Status Report Screen on page 5 3 Status Panel Screen see Station Status Panel Screen on page 5 26 Version Screen see Station Comparator Software Version on page 5 30 Station Metering Screens The RSS allows you to access various critical metering points throughout the station circuitry and display the current measurements or status in the Metering Screen The readings may be compared with accepted ranges to aid in troubleshooting The Metering menu screen allows access to critical test points for the following station modules e Station Control Wireline Interface Module Exciter Module Power Amplifier Module QUANTAR only Receiver Module Power Supply Module QUANTAR only Internal High Stability Oscillator Whe
235. design SC Carrier and PL DPL On Unsquelched Analog Repeater Specifies whether repeater is activated e None None Customer defined See help for Access by carrier detect PL DPL detect or MDC Tone details Depends on system subscriber generated tone DTMF MDC preamble or Singletone If set for MDC Tone SAM board must be programmed with corresponding tones design Tx Power Out Specifies the output power from the station power amplifier module This field is limited to a pre determined output power level if the station is equipped with the Limited Output Power option Approximately 5096 to 11096 Quantro or 2596 to 11096 QUANTAR of PA rating Value entered in Channel Configuration screen Refer to system design document for FCC licensed power rating 3 22 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 3 7 Channel Configuration Field Definitions continued PROGRAMMING THE CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN T Recommended Data Field Description Range Selection Default n Setting if any Ny IMPORTANT When setting the output power on a QUANTAR station with high power booster divide the desired station output power by 18 75 and enter this value in the TX Power Out field For example to set the station s maximum output power to 300W enter a value of 16 300 18 75 The output power appears with 7 of the desired value Do not s
236. dule recommended by the battery manufacturer Battery equalization is a process under which the charging voltage to the batteries is slightly boosted for a period of time typically 48 hours to 72 hours This slight overcharging causes the individual cells to regenerate equally and provide nearly identical output voltages For QUANTAR Stations 1 Click the Battery Equalization tab The Battery Equalization screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 73 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION ME Retererce Osctietor Tx Deviation Power Output BB TX Wreine B Reference Mocuistion Compensation MI Batlery Equalization Squech adust Rx vreine ine 2 In order ro maintain proper charge and capacity batteries require periodic equalization When equalization is turned ON the connected device will equalize for period of time and then it vill turn equalization OFF The user is Given the capacity to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in the connected device The timer is dependent on ithe type of battery selected Lead Acid Non Linear Nor Equalized Lead Acid Linear 3 72 Hours MICAD 48 Hours Equatzation is OFF Turn Equalization Station Note Station is Currenty ACCESS DISABLED Station Statusy Not Keyed 2 Click Turn Equalization On to start the process Equalization is OFF Turn Equalization OFF Turn Equalization Turn th
237. e 0 0 sec Digital Digital Voice Repeat Hangtime 5 0 sec Voice Repeat Hangtime 50 sec Voice Console 0 0 sec Voice Console Hangtime 0 0 sec Data Console Hangtime 0 0 sec Data Console Hangtime 0 0 sec Default Transmitter Steering Address 3F hex Default Transmitter Steering Address hex Hangtime HDLC Address 3F hex Hangtime HDLC Address 3F hex Standard Expanded Figure 4 3 Conventional System Screen Table 4 2 Conventional System Screen Data Fields Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default ne P 9 Setting if any Voice Repeat Specifies whether voice repeat operation is used Enabled Disabled System dependent Operation Disabled Vote Priority Specifies the high priority source Analog gt Digial First In System dependent Digital gt Analog First In Digital Voice Specifies the length of time a station connected to 0 0 to 15 0 seconds 5 0 seconds System dependent Repeat Hangtime a comparator remains keyed up and transmitting silence at the conclusion of a digital voice call sourced by a subscriber unit Digital Voice Specifies the amount of time a station connected 0 0 to 15 0 seconds 0 0 seconds System dependent Console Hangtime to a comparator remains keyed up and transmitting silence at the conclusion of a digital voice call sourced by a console Digital Data Specifies the amount of time a station connected 0 0 to 15 0 seconds 0 0 seconds System depende
238. e correspond 1 9 for basic whether basic or to AUX IN 1 12 inputs enhanced WildCard is shown for 50 pin selected System Connector in Backplane section of appropriate QUANTAR or Quantro Station Functional Manual or example AUX IN 7 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 10 3 STATION AUXILIARY OUTPUTS CHAPTER 10 WILDCARD OPERATION Table 10 1 WildCard Input Screen Data Fields continued Data Field Description Range Selections Default Recomme nded Setting if any HW Input Specifies hardware Basic and Enhanced Basic and Enhanced Dependent on Type circuitry located on 8 Transistor 8 Transistor whether basic or Wireline Interface Basic Basic enhanced WildCard is Board associated with 9 Opto coupler 9 Opto coupler selected Input e Enhanced e Enhanced e 9 12 Opto coupler e 9 12 Opto coupler Active Level Indicates current active e Transistor Hi Lo e Transistor Lo System dependent level for each input e Opto coupler Hi Lo e Opto coupler Hi may be set for HI or LO Group Defines binary bit Definition ranking for binary groups Bit 0 is LSB and Bit 3 is MSB Station Auxiliary Outputs Each QUANTAR and Quantro station and QUANTAR Receiver contains circuitry located on the wireline interface board that provides auxiliary outputs AUX Outputs to control miscellaneous external equipment Two types of outputs are provided e Transistor e Relay closure These are available through the 50 pin System
239. e in dBm and record the value RX Wireline Equalization Spectra Digi amp STRO TAC Current Stored LO Boost Adjust Level 2400 Hz 00 00 l Tone On Boost Adjust Level 2500 Hz 00 dB 0 0 dB Set Freq Press to turn on the HI Boost tone Frequency 2500 Hz 2500 Hz 15 Click Tone Off near the bottom of the pane 16 Subtract the absolute value measured in step 13 from the absolute value measured in step 14 and enter the result in LO Boost Adjust Level 400 Hz Current field Example 22 8 dBm measured in step 13 27 5 dBm measured in step 14 27 5 22 8 4 7 if the result is negative use 0 Enter 4 7 in HI Boost Adjust Level 2500 Hz Current field 17 After all equalization settings have been entered click Save at the bottom of the pane to save the values to non volatile memory in the station Procedure C Status Tone Level Alignment Procedure This procedure is required only for stations in the following configurations SPECTRA TAC voting systems Digi TAC voting systems IntelliRepeater stations Status tone level alignment is used to set the analog monitor tone level for ASTRO systems using hybrid links 57 mm 0 dB status tone is not supported by QUANTAR and Quantro stations 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 63 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Although status tones are not used in IntelliRepeater systems status tone level equalization must be performed to allow syst
240. e screen or refer selected type PL or DPL to tables in PL codes typically below Appendix A 200 Hz of this guide Tx Squelch Type Defines the type of sub audio tone transmitted by station PL CSQ Depends on system design DPL CSQ Tx PL DPL Code Defines the access code corresponding to PL or DPL type Use Help CSQ Must be valid code for specified above screen or refer selected type PL or DPL to tables in PL codes typically below Appendix A 200 Hz of this guide Digital Carrier Squelch Specifies whether or not the RX ASTRO Access Code is Enabled Disabled Depends on system design used to qualify RX Audio When enabled all access codes Disabled are accepted and repeated audio goes out with Access Code 293 Rx ASTRO Access Code Defines receive ASTRO Network ID in hex 000 FFF 293 Depends on system design Tx ASTRO Access Code Defines receive ASTRO Network ID in hex 000 FFF 293 Depends on system design Channels Using This Identifies channel number s of station channels that use 1 256 1 Status only non editable Table current access code table Last Received Determines whether the station transmits using the last Enabled Disabled Depends on system design received NAC Disabled Last Received NAC Accessible only when Last Received NAC is enabled The 1 30 minutes 5 minutes Depends on system design Expiration Time timer defines how long the last RX NAC is used for transmissions after the last received call Each received call
241. e A Equalization is optional because the station is not in a voting system 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 55 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Example 2 For a station programmed for 4 wire operation ALC enabled and in a voting system Table 3 20 shows that Line 1 requires no alignment and that Line 2 requires alignment procedure A The Equalization Matrix shows that Line 2 also requires alignment procedures B D and C if needed Example 3 For a station programmed for 8 wire operation and ALC enabled Table 3 20 shows that Line 1 requires alignment procedure E Line 2 requires alignment procedure A Line 3 requires no alignment and Line 4 requires alignment procedure A Table 3 20 RX TX Wireline Alignment Matrix 2 wire Off Note 2 A and E N A N A On A and E 4 wire Off E A N A N A On None A 6 wire Off E A E N A On E A None 8 wire Off E A E A On E A None A Notes 1 The 2 4 6 and 8 wire configurations provide direct connection to a console Stations in voting systems must be configured for 4 wire configuration 2 For 2 wire configurations Rx and Tx alignments are both performed on Line 2 Table 3 21 RX TX Wireline Equalization Matrix Voice N A B N A None C if required Status Tone N A D N A None Table 3 22 RX Wireline ASTRO Link Management Tone Alignment Matrix Link Management Tone N A F N A N A 3 56 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTR
242. e Battery Equalizer ON The station power supply boosts battery charging voltage slightly for a period of time determined by the type of batteries being used as specified in the Hardware Configuration screen A timer in the station controls the length of time that the boosted charging voltage is applied and automatically sets the charging voltage to its normal level when the timer expires 3 Ifyou must stop the process manually click Turn Equalization Off Equalization is ON Turn Equalization OFF Turn the Battery Equalizer OFF 3 74 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT For Quantro Stations Battery equalization for Quantro stations is performed manually To equalize the batteries in a Quantro station perform the following procedure 1 Toggle the Float Equalize switch located on the power supply control board to the Equalize position 2 Time the boosted charging period yourself 3 When the appropriate time has expired toggle the switch to the Float position Calibrating Reference Oscillator Procedure The circuit device s that set the station s reference frequency exhibit slight variations in operating characteristics over time Approximately 90 of these variations occur in the first year whether the station is in service or in storage and non operational Therefore it is necessary to calibrate the reference oscillator during optimization It is reco
243. e all running the same version of software 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 61 DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE TO INTELLIREPEATER MEMORY CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 11 62 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 APPENDIX PL DPL Codes Table A 1 Tone Private Line PL Codes Frequency Hz Motorola Code Frequency Hz Motorola Code 67 0 XZ 136 5 47 69 3 WZ 141 3 4A 71 9 XA 146 2 4B 74 4 WA 151 4 5Z 77 0 XB 156 7 5A 79 7 WB 162 2 5B 82 5 YZ 167 9 6Z 85 4 YA 173 8 6A 88 5 YB 179 9 6B 91 5 ZZ 186 2 72 94 8 ZA 192 8 97 4 2 203 5 MI 100 0 1Z 206 5 8Z 103 5 1A 210 7 M2 107 2 1B 218 1 M3 110 9 22 225 7 M4 114 8 2A 229 1 97 118 8 2B 233 6 M5 123 0 3Z 241 8 M6 127 3 3A 250 3 M7 131 8 3B 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER A PL DPL CODES Table A 2 Digital Private Line DPL Codes 023 143 315 532 025 152 331 546 026 155 343 565 031 156 346 606 032 162 351 612 043 165 364 624 047 172 365 627 051 205 371 631 054 223 411 645 065 226 412 662 071 243 413 664 072 244 423 703 073 245 431 712 074 251 432 723 114 261 445 731 115 263 464 732 125 265 466 734 131 271 503 743 132 306 506 754 134 311 516 A 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 APPENDIX dBm to Microvolts Conversion
244. e between the PC and either a single station or to the access point of an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network 11 48 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE Laptop PC hos lt lt IESIRSESZ 52625252 Qe CAO SOS XO Se XE e 22 ESESESESES e lt 525252525 CSE Xe C Xe YA Ae e SES OE XC XE Y 525252 mco ce lt 052 2 BRO om 2 Transceiver Terminator Terminator Figure 11 2 Ethernet Connection to a Single Station Ethernet access point Connect directly to 3Com i 2 transceiver 5 Figure 11 3 Ethernet Connection to IntelliRepeater Ethernet Network wv IMPORTANT For IntelliRepeater networks ensure that each IntelliRepeater station is programmed with a unique IP address IP addresses are set using RSS If two IntelliRepeater stations have the same IP address the network does not work properly Also disconnecting any of the IntelliRepeaters Ethernet cables on a functioning system causes the stations to reset 11 49 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Remote Dial Up Connections Using the RSS remote dial up feature see Chapter 9 Remote Dial Up you may establish a modem connection to a remote station and download the software through telephone lines This type of connection results in download times comparable to seri
245. e results in a transmitted signal at 60 of rated system deviation RSSI Calibrate Calibrates the receiver circuitry used to derive the level of the received RF signal Squelch Adjust Provides the capability to set the level at which the receiver unsquelches Battery Equalization Maintains proper charge and capacity for storage batteries Reference Oscillator or UHSO Calibrates the station reference oscillator circuit located in the station control module to within the required frequency tolerance ASTRO Alignment and Test Provides the capability to set the amount of delay unique to each site before transmission for station in an ASTRO simulcast system ASTRO Pattern Generator Allows the station to generate one of four ASTRO Project 25 test patterns for display and analysis on an R2670 analyzer TDATA Calibration Calibrates deviation for low speed data signal from 6809 central controller Power Output Calibrates the output power at the PA rated level On Quantro stations it calibrates the wattmeter if installed 6 1 OVERVIEW OF ALIGNMENT ROUTINES CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Calibrates deviation limiting hardware and software for transmit linearity over entire Tx frequency range Reference Modulation Compensation Calibrates for low frequency transmit deviation linearity for DPL and data including ASTRO signals r 8 Reference Modulation Compensation B Bat
246. e source The status area of the screen displays the progress Transmit Frequency 851 0 AUTO NETSMHz AUTO NET 10 MHz 3 When the process is complete close the Completed Successfully message window The oscillator adjustment data is saved to the station codeplug and the station dekeys Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator UHSO This procedure is required only if the station transmitter and or receiver do not lock as indicated by the Tx Lock LED being off or the Rx Fail LED lit when the UHSO source is present and on The accuracy of this procedure depends on the accuracy of the external source Ensure that the 5 or 10 MHz source provides the required accuracy as defined in Table 1 in the Routine Maintenance section of the relevant functional manual for the station 1 Setupthe station and R2001 analyzer with an external frequency standard to measure the station s transmitter frequency 2 Turn the station on and allow it to warm up for about 60 minutes 3 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 4 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 3 78 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 5 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 6 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane
247. e tree to review the device s current operating software versions The information pane displays the current version information as shown in the example below Station Control Firmware R020 12 034 2003 07 23 11 37 Station Wireline Firmware R020 12 008 2003 07 23 11 37 Station Exciter Firmware R020 09 010 Station Boot2 Firmware RO20 10 022 2003 04 02 10 40 Station Boot1 Firmware RO20 10 009 0000 00 00 00 00 Codeplug version 12 Help 5 Change the data as required and when done save the configuration data to either e An archive file as outlined in Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File on page 2 23 or The device s codeplug as outlined in Writing Codeplug Data to the Device on page 2 21 Device Type Programming Overview After reading the device codeplug data into the RSS computer it must be reviewed and edited as appropriate to match the system and user requirements specific to the particular device Table 3 1 provides the relevant screens for each supported device type 3 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL DEVICE TYPE PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW Table 3 1 Device Types and Applicable Screens Device Type Conventional Applicable Screens Hardware Configuration screen Wireline Configuration screen Access Code Table or Multi Coded Squelch screen Channel Information screen TRC Command Table screen DC Command Table screen RF Configuration screen Scan List Confi
248. econds the following crossload message window appears 9 Do You Wish To Crossload 4 The Codeplug To Other Stations At The Site 3 Click Yes to write the codeplug to the connected IntelliRepeater station and then have that station load on each IntelliRepeater connected to it with the codeplug The following Please enter the desired time and date window appears Please enter the desired time and date IMPORTANT MAKE SURE TO ENTER DATE AND TIME BEFORE DOWNLOADING CODEPLUG Current PC Time 16 06 50 Current PC Date 09 30 2005 Time 24 Hour Time Date MMIDD Y Y Y Y 3 52 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO AN INTELLIREPEATER STATION INSTALLED IN A SMARTZONE 3 0 3 5 OR 4 1 SYSTEM 4 Enter the current date and time 5 When complete click Next The following Please Enter the Start Up Channel window appears Please enter the Start Up Channel IR STARTUP CHANNEL Startup Channel Enter the Startup Channel for this IntelliRepeater Repeater Press Next when you are ready to reprogram the Codeplug of the Repeater connected to this RSS 6 Verify that the displayed channel is the start up channel Change if required Then click Next gt gt 7 Click Yes to start the codeplug write operation The progress of the write operation appears When the operation is complete an RSS message window asks whether you would l
249. eens allow you to set wireline parameters for device operation To access the Wireline Configuration screen click Wireline Configuration in the navigation pane The appearance of the Wireline Configuration screen Figure 3 4 is dependent on the hardware configuration as configured in the Hardware Configuration screen If the Station Type is ANALOG ONLY then the following applies to the Wireline Configuration screen If the Remote Control is Tone Remote Control TRC then the TRC tab is provided for configuration see Figure 3 4 TRC Command Table is provided in the navigation pane to set the TRC commands 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING WIRELINE CONFIGURATION DATA If the Remote Control Type is DC then the Wireline tab is the only tab provided in the Wireline Configuration screen DC Command Table is provided in the navigation pane to set the DC commands If the Station Type is ASTRO CAPABLE or ASTRO Common Air Interface CAT CAPABLE then the Wireline Configuration screen provides the Wireline and Astro tabs see Figure 3 5 Wireli TRC Vireine TEC Wreine Wireline Operation 4WRE FULL DUPLEX TRC Wireline Operation AVARE FULL DUPLEX Remote Control Type TRC HOT Frequency 217 He Use 5 Hz incrementis Remote Control joc Y EN Automatic Level ENADLED Tx Notch Filter ENABLED Eaualizeli DISABLED Equ
250. el Information screen for the affected channel Includes CSQ PL and DPL RPT ON Enables repeater mode if repeater capable Station repeats when qualifiers as programmed in analog Rx Activation field in the Channel Information screen are met RPT OFF Disables repeater mode if repeater capable Station repeats when qualifiers as programmed in analog Rx Activation field in the Channel Information screen are met 3 26 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING DC REMOTE COMMAND DATA Table 3 8 TRC Commands continued Command Function SCAN ON Commands station to begin receiver scanning operation beginning with first scan enabled channel in the Channel Scan List This requires purchase of Scanning Receiver option SCAN OFF Commands station to cease receiver scanning operation Station remains on the current channel SCAN RESUME If receiver scanning has been suspended this command causes the station to resume receiver scanning operation SCAN SUSPEND If station is in receiver scanning operation this command stops the scanning process and places the station on the current channel SELALARM OFF Commands station to stop sending alarm alert tones for current active alarm over the air and or over the wireline as defined on the Channel Information screen Alarm alert tones for any subsequent alarms are routed normally SELALARM ON Cancels SEALARM OFF command If SEALARM OFF
251. em design Modulation Specifies which ASTRO Analog Modulation to use for the Analog selected block Depends on system design 3 40 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Programming Full Sub Band Partition Screens To access the Full Sub Band Partition screen click Full Sub Band Partition in the navigation pane See Figure 3 22 for these screens See Table 3 17 for the screen s data fields ID Block HEX ID Low HEX ID High Block Range 1 0000 FFFF Figure 3 22 Full Sub Band Partition and Radio Modulation Partition Screen Table 3 17 Full Sub Band Partition Screen Data Fields npn Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any ID Block A sequential number that Depends on system design represents a given ID range Hex ID Low This represents the low Depends on system design byte of the ID range Hex ID High This represents the high Depends on system design byte of the ID range Block Range Full Band Full Band Depends on system design Sub Band Programming Repeater Summary Screen This screen allows you to reorder the IntelliRepeaters at the site To access the Repeater Summary screen click Repeater Summary in the navigation pane See Figure 3 23 Current New Serial Receive Transmit Repeater Repeater Number Frequency MHz Frequency MHz 1 123ABCB788 806 012500 851 012500
252. em line tests 1 Click Tone On to generate a 2175 Hz alignment status tone Measure in dBm and record the value 2 Click Tone Off near the bottom of the pane 3 Subtract the absolute value measured in step 13 of Procedure B from the absolute value measured in step 1 of this procedure and subtract 21 6 for 13 dB status tone system from the result Enter the result in Status Tone Level Current field Example 22 8 dBm measured in step 13 31 9 dBm measured in step 1 31 9 22 8 9 1 9 1 21 6 12 5 Enter 12 5 in Status Tone Level Current field 4 After all equalization settings have been entered click Save to save the values to non volatile memory in the station Procedure D Optional Hi Boost Fine Tuning Procedure The voting algorithm in a receiver voting system depends on the flatness of the received audio signal between 2000 Hz and 3000 Hz This flatness is affected by the frequency and amplitude response of the phone lines between the receiver and the comparator There may be some cases where the Hi Boost equalization procedure Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment Procedure on page 3 59 does not result in the optimum boost setting This is usually indicated by a high amount of wrong site voting resulting in poor audio quality If the system exhibits a significant amount of wrong site voting first check the phone lines and ensure that they meet the required specifications If w
253. ends on system relay is in use Disabled configuration Call Sign Interval Specifies time intervals at which 1 60 minutes 60 min Set time less than or equal FCC assigned station call sign is to the time specified by the broadcast FCC Startup on Last Active Specifies that the last active channel Enabled Disabled Depends on system Channel is used as the current startup channel Disabled configuration if enabled Otherwise the startup channel is specified in the Startup Channel field Startup Channel Specifies the channel selected as the 1 to 16 1 Depends on system Startup Channel after reset configuration ASTRO Fade Tolerance Specifies the number of missed 1 3 frames 3 frames Customer defined frames before ASTRO message is considered ASTRO Tx Filter Selects the ASTRO transmit Wide Pulse Wide Pulse System dependent modulation filter to be used Narrow Pulse Analog Simulcast Reverse Specifies the appropriate simulcast Internal Internal System dependent for Burst reverse burst External conventional simulcast only Repeat Specifies whether ASTRO RDLAP Enabled Disabled System dependent data is repeated Disabled Wireline Drop Out Delay Specifies the amount of hang time 0 999 seconds 0 sec System dependent added to the end of an RDLAP and ASTRO CAI WL transmission Programming the Codeplug Data into a Conventional or 6809 Station or ASTRO TAC Comparator 3 46 After saving the codeplug data to an archive file on t
254. ent 3 71 State Action 10 6 Fields iiu beats eR DERE de 10 9 OVerVI WL cua es betes ee ed eee qun 10 7 10 8 Station Retrieving Station ID 7 17 Status Astro TAC Comparator Panel S r n coat w aca daa 5 28 MeSSageSu aa u a au kasa qas wanpu puasa 5 1 Messages Station Generated 5 6 Metering Screens 5 2 Overview dea usu le uber oes Ms 5 1 Panel Button Definitions 5 27 Panel Screen xy sete ER 5 26 Reports Screen oie Ux eu acer as 5 3 Station Software 5 30 Tx Wireline Alignment 3 55 Performing 7 19 User Interface Description 2 2 Auxiliary gt 10 4 Auxiliary Output 1065 10 5 Auxiliary Output Programming 10 5 OVENVICW arx es mco uude qut Ex 8 10 1 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 State Action Tables 10 6 Wireline State Action Tables Fields 10 9 Configuration 3 8 State Action Tables Overview 10 7 Configuration Fields 3 10 State Action Tables Programming 10 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 INDEX 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLAN
255. eoedsepiM illqedeO uojenbs pepoo niniw x euoug ILYN Aujiqede 8 LSVOTANIS TWNOILNSANO9 Saunivad 3HVALLdOS TWNOILdO Ayiqede peojumog aemyos eoueJejeu 1X3 ZHW 0L ZHN S Sjeuueu ZHY 921 W 9 3 wey yojanbs Ionuoo Oq OuL 21529 1 3HVALdOS Lv3d3H 8VO NI 2 11 ANY 55329 H3 1V3d3H Lv3d3H MOVETIVS 1 5 OH1SVV3HV 1V201 1svo1nWis 1VNOILN3ANOO 1VNOILN3ANOO 94 v94 1V3d3u qeo ui0vaTiv4d aav 1V3d3u 989 Ul MOVaTIVA aav 13Nauno3svagv IAIM 1SVOTnMWIS 1VNOILN3ANOO S300V ualvadau OHL1SVV3HV 1 207 1VNOILN3ANOO OH1SV IAIM IVNOILN3ANOO ze6x 692 222 55300 H3lV3d3H Sv 1 Vd193dS 1Svo1nwis aav Wvs aav SS300V ualvadaH LINFHNIS 1 207 1VNOILN3ANOO G3N3uno3sv3uv AGIM IVNOILN3ANOO 226 697x SS399Y ualvaddu aav IVL V LIAdSs AAW SO1VNV 157 0115 1VNOILN3ANOO 869 J13N3uHno3saav 55399 u3l1V3d3u 1v201 1VNOILN3ANOO 5 1V907 3N3Hh23S 1 207 IVNOLLN3JANOO SO1VNV IAIM TVNOILN3ANOO 69 sepniour 222 LSVOTNNIS aav c 6x SS300V 1
256. equen mu ILN3AN 50 20 O oo ZHW 008 Jeueno ZHN 008 ogueno aardoddns SNOILVLS Figure 7 13 Release R09 05 00 R09 06 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 34 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Lv3d3dH MOVETIVA LSVOTNINIS IVNOILNJ3ANOO Lv3d3H 8VO NI 2 811 SS309V ua1V3d3H OHL1SVV3HUV 1V201 1 MOVETIVA J13N3Hfh 3S LSVOTNINIS 1 v940 1 qeo uiovarivd aav 5 aqIA jeuondo seJinboi dn y 1524 IVD OHISV Z OH1SV Autiqede dry jeiq uonoejoJd pJoMsseg 15 SSY jeedeu jeuiqeo u jseonuurs Buiuueog Aqpues urey eoedsepiM Ayqedeg pieOpi A uojenbs pepoo ninw euoug LLY illqedeO 8 OSHN lt 1 3HVALLdOS TWNOILdO LISVOLOATAS aemyos eoueJejed 1X3 ZHN OL ZHIN S 269 S ZL Burkey W 9 3 wey Aieneg ld uojenbs Ionuoo OG 21529 3HVALLdOS 15 5 IVNOLLN3ANOO 888X LSVOTNNIS aav
257. equired Receiver module Station control module Routine maintenance only OVERVIEW OF ALIGNMENT ROUTINES Location Aligning Squelch Adjust Procedure on page 3 71 Equalizing Batteries on page 3 73 Reference Oscillator or UHSO Station control module Calibrating Reference Oscillator Procedure on page 3 75 ASTRO Alignment and Test Station control module Setting ASTRO Tx Align and Test Procedure on page 3 82 ASTRO Pattern Generator Station control module Generating ASTRO Test Patterns on page 3 85 TDATA Calibration Station control module TDATA Calibration 6809 Trunking Station Only on page 3 88 Power Output Power amplifier module Aligning Power Output Procedure on page 6 4 or Station control module Aligning Power Output Procedure for a Quantro 350W VHF Station on page 6 7 Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Exciter module Station control module Aligning Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Procedure 350W VHF Stations on page 6 11 Reference Modulation Compensation Exciter module Station control module Aligning Reference Modulation Compensation Procedure on page 6 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 IMPORTANT Before performing any of the station alignment procedures you must dekey the station transmitter Click Access Disable from any alignment screen to access disable the station When finished with alignment click Access Enable
258. er Out value to the desired station output power plus 40W For example if the desired output power is 250W then you enter 290W in the Tx Power Out field This compensates for the fact that the output power alignment measurement point is changed from after the circulator to before the circulator Although you can enter 350W in the Tx Power Out field the maximum output power after the circulator is limited to 310W 6 Click Alignment Screens under Service in the navigation pane The Alignment screen appears 7 Click the Power Output tab The Power Output screen appears T Base Radio B TX Wireline Astro Simulcast Test Patte TDATA Calibration 3 H Configuration Hardware Configuration B Reference Modulation Compensation B Battery Equalization B Squelch Adjust N RX Wireline line 2 B Reference Oscillator B TX Deviation 8 Power Output i B RSSI Calibration Channel Information TRC Command Table 3 5 Rated Power Out 20 WATTS 2 dina d Power Read on Wattmeter 001 WATTS WidCard Input Transmit Frequency 853 9125 MHz WildCard Output Wildcard State l Press the P INIT button 73 Service 2 KEYUP the Station Version Scree 3 Enter power read on the wattmeter Alignment Scr 4 Press the ADJUST button and wait for Station response Metering Screen 5 If the Station is at desired power press the SAVE button Status Report Sc
259. er Output Procedure for a Quantro 350W VHF Station on page 6 7 This procedure is for QUANTAR stations with and without the high power booster option because it is the power amplifier module internal to the QUANTAR station that requires alignment not the high power booster module To align the station s power output perform the following procedure 1 Connect the station as shown in Figure 6 2 17 mm An R2001 communications analyzer may be used as a wattmeter 6 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE 1 Remove N type connector from PA output 2 Connect cable from wattmeter Note For Quantro stations connect wattmeter to output of low pass filter ur Note Keep this cable as short as possible 5 o 5 e NN 000 8 8 In line wattmeter NS 32 22 adapter and element NN O OO o C 99 e 19 To TX antenna R2001 communications analyzer or dummy loa Figure 6 2 Power Output Alignment Setup 2 Setthe R2001 analyzer Display to Monitor mode 3 Click Alignment Screens under Service in the navigation pane The Alignment screen appears 4 Clickthe Power Output tab The Power Output screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 ALIGNING POWER OUTPUT PROCEDURE CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT S
260. er addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server OK Cancel 24 Set the IP Address as follows leave the rest blank e Ifthe connection being configured connects to the front port of the device set the IP address to 193 0 0 5 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 13 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Ifthe connection being configured connects to the back port of the device set the IP address to 193 0 0 4 25 Click Advanced The following window appears General DNS WINS Options This checkbox only applies when you are connected to a local network and a dial up network simultaneously When checked data that cannot be sent on the local network is forwarded to the dial up network Use default gateway on remote network r SLIP link Use IP header compression Frame size 1006 b Cancel 26 Uncheck the Use default gateway on remote network checkbox 27 Click OK on all screens until you return to the Network Connections screen When you finish click OK on all windows a Connect window appears offering you the opportunity to connect to the device Click Cancel to close the Connect window 17 mm You cannot connect to the device using the Connect window a successful connection can only be made using the RSS You are now ready to perform the SWDL procedure to upgrade the device s software as described in Serial
261. ess Code Table in the navigation pane to access the Access Code Table screen as shown in Figure 3 6 Access Code Table 8 1 66 1 Tatio Access Code Tabie Number 1 Rx Sate p Mub MAC Table Rx PLEX Code Metwort Access Com Tx Ta PLOPL Code 293 Lar Received Transm Using Last v 7 Tm 5 m a Chee Using Than tater 1 Tatie rep asira Tate net Analog Squelch disabled Squelch to Access Code Table Number 1 Access Code Table 1 of 1 ow Rx PLP Code 1A 1035 Tx Sgueic n Tx PLOPL Code 1A 103 5 He Oper abor NORMAL w Rx Astro Access Code 29 Tx Astro Access Code Charret Ung Tr s Table m Qaqata gt CUTTUHN X Oeke Tabie ASTRO CAI Capable Multi Coded Squelch disabled Figure 3 6 Access Code Table Screens 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Access Code Tabie 1 of 1 TX Network Access Code Pret W A O X ASTRO CAI Capable Multi Coded Up to 16 Access Code Tables may be created to provide flexibility in the system design accommodating a variety of console and talkgroup combinations The number of Access Code Tables you create and the information programmed into each depends on the
262. et the VHF station power amplifier modules to greater than 18 W or 800 MHz station power amplifier modules to greater than 16W Battery Backup Specifies the output power from the Approximately 5096 to 11096 50 of value Customer defined Set to lower station power amplifier module whenin Quantro or 25 to 110 entered in value to extend station battery backup mode Refer to the QUANTAR of PA rating Channel operation in battery backup Important note in Tx Power Out Configuration mode screen Time Out Timers Wireline Specifies the maximum amount of time 0 2550 seconds 0 2 disabled 120 sec Customer defined transmitter may be continuously activated by console through wireline Local Specifies the maximum amount of time 0 2550 seconds 0 disabled 0 sec Customer defined transmitter may be continuously activated by local microphone handset Repeater Specifies the maximum amount of time 0 2550 seconds 0 disabled 0 sec Customer defined repeater mode may be continuously activated by subscriber through receiver MRTI Specifies the time a user may retain 0 2550 seconds 0 2 disabled 0 sec Customer defined MRTI interface by holding PTT before system cancels transmission Alarm Tone Over Air Specifies whether station alarm tones Enabled Disabled Customer defined four total are transmitted over air Disabled Over WL Specifies whether station alarm tones Enabled Disabled Customer defined four total are transmitted over Disab
263. evice password Enter New Password Show CodePlug size Confirm New Password CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Enter The Current Password If Any 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 8 3 ERASING STATION PASSWORD LOCAL ACCESS CHAPTER 8 PASSWORD PROTECTION Enter the current password in the Enter Current Password field Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field Enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field Click OK If the passwords entered in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields match then the new password is saved If the passwords do not match the following warning window appears and you must re enter the new password RSS Error The Passwords You Entered Do Not Match Password Not Accepted Erasing Station Password Local Access If the password is erased all future RSS sessions local or remote are allowed without requiring a password You may create another password by following the instructions on page Creating the Station s Password on page 8 2 If you wish to erase the current station password if for example you have forgotten it and are physically at the station site perform the procedure below 1 2 Connect the RSS computer to the station Launch RSS and connect to the station From the Tools menu select Set device password The Station Password Prompt window appears Tools Help Connection configuration Station Pa
264. eyed 4 Click Key On Freq 3 NOTE To avoid overloading the R2670 RF input the station automatically limits its power output to either one half power or approximately 100W whichever is lower when this alignment is performed 5 Set the R2670 analyzer to the value displayed in the Current Frequency Is field 6 Read the deviation on the analyzer display shown as two numbers one for and one for Enter the larger number into the Deviation kHz field for the first frequency 7 Click DEKEY 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 for Freq2 Freq3 Freq4 When done click SAVE to save the values 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 6 13 ALIGNING REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION PROCEDURE CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT Aligning Reference Modulation Compensation Procedure To set the Reference Modulation Compensation perform the following procedure 1 Connect the station as shown in Figure 6 5 1 Remove N type connector from PA output 2 Connect cable from wattmeter Station Note For Quaniro stations connect wattmeter to output of low pass filter m Note Keep this cable as short as possible R2001 communications analyzer N cal ae NN ae 516 ele let 000000000000 000000 Fig
265. free from reproducible defects that cause a material variance from its published specification However Motorola does not warrant that program operation will be uninterrupted or error free that each defect will be corrected or that any program will meet Licensee s particular requirements This warranty does not cover an item of Software i used in other than its normal and customary manner ii subjected to misuse or iii subjected to modifications by Licensee or by any party other than Motorola without the prior written consent of Motorola Limited Media Warranty For the first ninety 90 days following its initial shipment Motorola warrants that the media carrying the software will be free from defects that damage the performance of the software Motorola will replace any damaged media free of charge during the warranty period Warranted media is limited to that which is used to transport the software such as floppy disks and authorization key PROMs that may store the software in equipment are not covered under this warranty Limitation of Liability Motorola s total liability and Licensee s sole remedy for any warranted software shall be limited to at Motorola s option software replacement or the payment of Licensee s actual damages not to exceed the total licensed charge paid by Licensee to Motorola for the item of software that caused the damage The warranties set forth above extend only to the first licensee Subsequent
266. front panel Access Disable Toggles Access Disable Mode on Access Enable Toggles Access Disable Mode off 5 27 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 2 Status Panel Screen Buttons continued Button Description Start Log Starts the logging of messages Station Status Local Speaker Volume gt Increments speaker volume in 5 unit steps Local Speaker Volume lt Decrements speaker volume in 5 unit steps Intercom On Toggles Intercom mode on Intercom Off Toggles Intercom mode off Revr Squelch OFF CSQ PL Cycles through CSQ OFF CSQ and PL Comparator Status Panel Screen 5 28 The comparator Status Panel Screen provides operational information about the comparator s ports See Figure 5 5 and Figure 5 6 for examples of this screen for the two comparator configurations Current Chassis Number PRIMARY Link Delay 1 Falled LI 2 STATION Disabled Li Li 3 STATION2 Disabled I on L 4 Disabled Li 5 RCVR2 Disabled 6 RCVR3 Disabled Li L 7 RCYR4 Disabled Yai 8 RCVRS Disabled L RCVR6 Disabled 10 RCVR7 Disabled 11 RCVRB Disabled m 12 RCVR9 Disabled 3 RCVR10 Disabled Li L 14 RCVRI1 Disabled 15 RCVR12 Disabled L 18 NONE Disabled Li Voted Port Local Control Mode DISABLED Prevlous Comparator Next Comparator Get Link
267. ftware Download Capability release tpa rea sedie dei 7 12 CLN6960 Station Control Boards IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Version Compatibility ae E PCT 7 14 CLN7462 Station Control Boards Limited QUANTAR RSS Version eene Am D 7 15 RSS PC Modem Configuration Data Fields 9 5 WildCard Input Screen Data 5 10 3 WildCard Output Screen Data 10 5 WildCard State Action Screen Data Fields 10 9 Zone Controller Link Connection Scenarios 11 50 Tone Private Line PL 8 444 A 1 Digital Private Eine DPL Codes A 2 dBm to Microvolts Conversion 5 1 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Introduction The base station products Radio Service Software RSS program described in this guide provides service and maintenance personnel the ability to customize align and troubleshoot a variety of Motorola base station products and ancillary equipment The RSS is intended for use with the following products QUANTAR Quantro stations and ASTRO TAC receivers 55 data station e QUANTAR data base station DBS ASTRO TAC compa
268. gram as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 3 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 4 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 3 86 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Click Test and Measurement Screen in the navigation pane The following Test and Measurement screen appears ASTRO BER RSSI Report ASTRO Test Receiver Frequency 1 MHz Receiver Frequency 2 MHz Settings Potiem Type Sampling Period Resuls Dt Error Rote X Received Signal Strength art Measurement Stert KSA Measurement Bet Log The Station must be act 10 Access Disable in order to start ary pattern transmission ae Station Statue Not Keyed Click the ASTRO Test Patterns tab The following ASTRO Test Patterns screen appears ASTRO DER 8 RSSI Report ASTRO Test Pattern Frequency WHr 861 0125 Select Pattern to Transat No Test Pallerns Active The Station must be set lo Access Disable in order 10 start arry pattern transmission ation Note Station Status Not Keyed Select the desired pattern from the Select Pattern to Transmit list Click Start Pattern Transmission to transmit the selected pattern The screen indicates that the test pat
269. greement selection to accept the terms of the license 6 Click Next The Setup Type window appears Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type Complete 13 All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Custom Select which program features you want installed Recommended for advanced users InstallShield 7 There are two options for installing the RSS application The Complete installation selection installs the RSS application in the following directory C Program Files MotorolaWRadio Service Software If this is acceptable click Next the Ready to Install the Program window appears Proceed to step 10 2 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTALLING THE RSS SOFTWARE Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield The Custom installation selection allows you to choose where you want the RSS application to be installed When you click Next Choose Destination Location window appears Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files A Instal
270. guration List WildCard screens IntelliRepeater 2 0 3 2 7E Hardware Configuration screen Site Frequency screen Site General screen Site Timer screen Full Sub Band Partition screen Radio Modulation Partition screen Repeater Information screen Repeater Summary screen RF Configuration screen WildCard screens IntelliRepeater 3 0 3 5 4 1 Hardware Configuration screen Site Frequency screen Site General screen Site Timer screen Full Sub Band Partition screen Radio Modulation Partition screen Repeater Information screen Repeater Summary screen RF Configuration screen WildCard screens 6809 SmartZone Trunking Hardware Configuration screen Wireline Configuration screen Access Code Table screen Channel Information screen RF Configuration screen 6809 Trunking Interface WildCard screens 6809 SMARTNET Trunking Hardware Configuration screen Wireline Configuration screen Access Code Table screen Channel Information screen RF Configuration screen 6809 Trunking Interface WildCard screens DSSIII Hardware Configuration screen Channel Information screen WildCard screens QUANTAR Data Base Station Hardware Configuration screen Channel Information screen WildCard screens 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 5 PROGRAMMING THE IP ADDRESS CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Programming the IP Address Each device in the system requires a unique IP address for network operation To set the device s IP address
271. h NO parity 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Issue remote command to Channel Bank or Modem to temporarily set parity to NONE Connect equipment as shown in Zone Controller Link Connection on page 11 50 Perform download procedure provided in Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater Memory on page 11 57 Issue remote command to channel bank modem to return parity setting to ODD Disconnect the zone controller link cable from the PC and reconnect it to the zone controller port from which it was removed Connect equipment as shown in Figure 11 5 Perform download procedure described in Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater Memory on page 11 57 Disconnect the Zone Controller link cable from the PC and reconnect it to the Zone Controller port from which it was removed This scenario is not practical because a visit to the IntelliRepeater site is required to set parity to NONE for the download and then return the setting to ODD for normal operation Instead take PC to the site and perform the software download locally Connect equipment Perform download procedure described in Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater Memory on page 11 57 Disconnect the Zone Controller link cable from the PC and reconnect it to the Zone Controller port from which it was removed 11 51 CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Note the zone controller port from which you disconnect t
272. h the following section to add a SLIP connection Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Null Modem Connection To add a SLIP connection in Windows XP perform the following procedure 1 Launch the Control Panel and click on the Network Connections icon e Network Connections The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 27 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 11 28 fit Network Connections Rename Properties Network Connections gt Close Select New Connection from the File menu When the next window appears click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Network Connection Type What do you want to do Connect to the Internet Connect to the Internet so you can browse the Web and read email Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dial up or VPN so you can work from home a field office or another location 9 Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it Select Set up an advanced connection Click Next The following window appears 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS New Connection Wizard Advanced Conne
273. he PC hard disk you must program the codeplug data into a conventional or 6809 station s codeplug 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE CODEPLUG DATA INTO A CONVENTIONAL OR 6809 STATION OR ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR File Write to Device Menu Item SAVING COOFPLUG TO DEVICE When programming the codeplug you may be asked whether you want to condition the codeplug Follow the instructions in the message window to perform this task Conditioning is required only once With the PC connected and the RSS program running perform the following to program data into the station codeplug 1 2 Fom the File menu select Write to Device or Write to Device icon on the toolbar Radio Service Software Base Radio ie Save file icon ervice Configuration Tools Help Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Save As IW Radio Service Software Base Radio File Service Configuration Tools Help Da 4 gt Read from Device Ctrl R rv Write to Device Ctrl Ww Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 A confirmation window appears Confirmation Do you really want to save the current codeplug to the connected device Click Yes The progress of the write operation appears When the operation is complete an RSS message window asks whether you would like to reset the device SAVING COOEPLUG T
274. he link cable you must reconnect the cable here when the download process is completed lt E E RJ 45 link cable removed from zone controller T1 Line channel bank or Poss Phone Line modem Sige 2 Channel bank or modem Channel bank or modem RSS Laptop Figure 11 5 Zone Controller Link Connection For some SmartZone IntelliRepeater systems a DB 9 female to RJ 45 female adapter is required to connect between the SLIP equipped PC and the zone controller link that connects to the site to be downloaded as shown above The adapter is available at most electronic stores and should be wired as shown in Figure 11 6 TX 2 7 TX RX 3 8 RX To PC COMM 4 To Link Cable Port E GND 5 3 GND from Zone 6 Controller HIS 7 6 RTS CTS 8 5 CTS L 9 a DB 9 f RJ 45 f Figure 11 6 Adapter for Connecting between PC and Zone Controller Link 11 52 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL LOADING STATION SOFTWARE FILES ONTO THE PC Loading Station Software Files onto the PC The station operating software is provided on a diskette from Motorola usually associated with a FLASHport Upgrade option The files contained on the diskette include the operating software boot code optional and other files required to support the download process These files must be loaded onto the PC hard disk as described below About 3 M
275. hether call sign is sent to Enabled Disabled Customer defined Wireline console over wireline Disabled Access Code Specifies which of the 256 possible 0 16 0 2 none 1 Depends on system design Table access code tables applies to current channel Carrier Squelch This provides two threshold selections Normal Normal Customer defined Transition Normal and Shifted Normal operation Shifted sets squelch performance so that the receiver unsquelches in 20 ms for signals above squelch set level and 180 ms for signals below squelch set level but above receiver sensitivity Shifted operation sets squelch performance so that the receiver unsquelches in 20 ms for signals above 1 uV and unsquelches in 180 ms for signals below 1 uV but above the receiver sensitivity Analog Rx Specifies the type of squelch required to Off Off Customer defined See help for Activation unsquelch receiver Carrier Squelch details Depends on system C PL DPL design SC Carrier PL DPL On Unsquelched Analog Repeater Specifies the type of squelch required to Off Off Customer defined See help for Activation activate repeater Carrier Squelch details Depends on system C PL DPL design SC Carrier PL DPL On Unsquelched Analog Repeater Specifies the type of squelch required to Off Off Customer defined See help for Hold In maintain repeater activation Carrier Squelch details Depends on system C PL DPL
276. ical for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola To order additional copies of this document contact your Motorola sales representative Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined and is believed to be entirely reliable However no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies Furthermore Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability function or design Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein neither does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others Trademark Information The following are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc Motorola the Motorola logo ASTRO ASTRO TAC EMBASSY FullVision INTELLIREPEATER QUANTAR QUANTRO and SMARTZONE The following are Motorola trademarks CENTRACOM Elite CENTRACOM Series CENTRACOM Gold Series MOSCAD SECURENET and Wireless Network Gateway HP HP UX OpenView Vectra and Hewlett Packard are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Any other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders WARRANTY Limited Software Warranty For the first ninety 90 days following its initial shipment Motorola warrants that when properly used its software will be
277. ications 11 3 Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 11 3 Adding a Null Modem in Windows 2000 11 3 IV 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Null Modem ConnectlOn eR RR edhe dew eke ER lh eee aa EBENE 11 7 Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 11 14 Adding a Dial Up Modem in Windows 2000 Professional 11 15 Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Dial Up Modem enne TM 11 17 Adding a Null Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional 11 22 Adding a Null Modem in Windows XP 11 22 Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Null Modem CONMECTION PM C TT 11 27 Adding a Dial Up Modem Device in Microsoft Windows XP Professional 11 34 Adding Dial Up Modem in Windows XP 11 34 Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Dial Up Modem CONMECHON T 11 36 RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention 11 45 Naming Convention for Null Modem 11 45 Naming Convention for Dial Up
278. ies whether station has ability to activate Disabled Enabled Customer determined failsoft mode Enabled Line TRC Encode Specifies whether station generates continuous Disabled Disabled Customer determined tone 2175 Hz down wireline when in failsoft Enabled mode Failsoft Carrier Specifies whether station repeats on carrier Disabled Disabled Customer determined Squelch squelch instead of connect tones when in Enabled failsoft mode Dual CT Failsoft Only Specifies whether station requires dual connect Disabled Disabled Customer determined tones instead of single connect tone when in Enabled failsoft mode 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 31 PROGRAMMING THE SCAN LIST CONFIGURATION DATA Table 3 10 6809 Trunking Interface Screen Data Fields continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION i m Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default due Setting if any Modulation Type Specifies which voice mode is used while in Analog Analog Depends on system failsoft mode ASTRO configuration Trunking Tickle Source Specifies the signal source used to indicate TX Data Line TX Data Customer determined whether 6809 central is functioning properly Mute Line Trunking Tickle Source Specifies the amount of time tickle source must 1 72 sec 1 If tickle source is TX TDT be absent before station considers 6809 central Data then one second is malfunctioning recommended If tickle source is Mute Line then 72 sec is
279. igital Metering The RSS allows access to critical metering points throughout the station circuitry and displays the current measurements The readings may be compared with accepted ranges to aid in isolating a faulty module Print Codeplug Report A text version of the codeplug parameters and current settings may be printed to a printer connected to the RSS PC Save Codeplug Report A text version of the codeplug parameters and current settings may be printed to a file on the RSS PC hard disk Remote Station Disabling Enabling This feature is typically used to disable and subsequently enable a station from a remote location through an RSS dial up connection Station Comparator Status Messages 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Status messages may be generated by any or all of the following sources Diagnostics run at station power up and or at station reset may fail and generate status messages Diagnostics run continuously during normal station operation Status events log provides information about Internal abnormal operation provides information about the station itself 5 1 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS External abnormal operation provides information about the system in which the station is installed Status messages are time stamped and stored in the station memory in a status log file Any subsequent status messages are appended to the file resulting in an accumulation of status
280. ike to reset the device SAVING COOEPLUG TO DEVICE SAVING COOEPLUG TO DEVICE ar The Site 7 8 Click Yes to reset all connected IntelliRepeaters to activate the codeplug A message window is opened stating that a reset is in progress Device Reset In Progress When Front Panel Returns To Normal The Reset Command Is Complete Check Status Report For New Alarms 9 Click Continue On reset the following window is opened 1 The Has Been Successfully Programmed Into The Connected Device 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 53 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 10 Click Continue The display returns to the main RSS window Performing Station Alignment Some of the station tuning alignment and adjustment tasks have been performed in the factory prior to shipment These procedures do not need to be performed at the time of installation and are generally required only after maintenance of certain modules These procedures are listed below with their location in this manual Aligning Power Output Procedure on page 6 4 Aligning Power Output Procedure for a Quantro 350W VHF Station on page 6 7 Aligning Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Procedure 350W VHF Stations on page 6 11 Aligning Reference Modulation Compensation Procedure on page 6 14 Certain site specific alignment tasks must be performed during optimization at the time they are
281. immediately after reading it from the device in a folder that identifies the system you are currently working on as created from suggestion above Add comments to the archive file to further help identify the device to which it belongs The following sections provide RSS specific file access tasks Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File on page 2 23 Opening an Archive Codeplug File on page 2 25 The balance of file maintenance and disk operations such as directory creation are accomplished using the Windows operating system tools Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File 1 save the current session s configuration data to an archive file perform either of the two From the File menu select Save A browser window appears e Click Save the toolbar IM Radio Service Software Base Radio Save Menu Item File ervice Configuration Tools Help Save File Icon Open Ctrl O gave Ctri 5 Seri Radio Service Software Base Radio Hen E Service Configuration Tools Help Read from Device Ctrl R s Write to Device Ctrl Properties Sys Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Rx F Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard PAF Exit Alt F4 Pow 2 The Save window appears Browse to the directory where you want to save this archive or create the directory 17 mm Carefully consider how you name the directories and files Name them appropriately to simplify
282. ing Rules Modems Advanced The following modems are installed Select the new connection Click Properties at the bottom of the window The following window appears Communications cable between two compu ers P 21 General Diagnostics Advanced Select the Advanced tab Click Change Default Preferences at the bottom of the tab screen Change Default Preferences Click the General tab of the new window The following window appears Communications cable between two compu er Def 2j xj General Advanced m Cal preferences Disconnect a call if idle for mare than mins Cancel cal i not connected within secs Data Connection Preferences Pott speed 19200 Data Protocol 21 Compression z Flow control Configure the window as follows Flow control None 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS Port Speed 38400 20 Click the Advanced tab The following window appears Communications cable between two eo General Advanced Hardware Settings NNNENENENENEEEEN None Stop bits fi 2 21 Configure window as follows Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 22 Click OK on all open screens until you reach the control panel again You have successfully added a null modem that provides the means to co
283. ing with Release 13 ASTRO VSELP was cancelled Codeplugs configured for ASTRO VSELP cannot be upgraded beyond version 12 Version 14 supports 800 MHz rebanding To support rebanding of older 800 MHz systems the IntelliRepeater application allows the operation of Securenet and ASTRO VSELP as well as ANALOG and ASTRO CAI Thus Version 14 allows IntelliRepeater codeplugs configured for either Securenet or ASTRO VSELP to be upgraded to version 14 Version 14 does not allow Conventional or 6809 Trunking codeplugs configured for either Securenet or ASTRO VSELP to be upgraded beyond the limits imposed above version 10 and version 12 respectively IMPORTANT RSS R1 00 R2 00 R3 00 and R3 01 are not forward compatible with station firmware R4 00 and later These earlier RSS versions cannot read the later Version station codeplugs and display a warning message to the effect if attempted To support the various versions of frozen software and cancelled features the RSS provides a default training codeplug for versions 10 12 13 and 14 The RSS does not support Version 11 of the codeplug Version 11 is supported by the Customer Service Software CSS Retrieving Station Software Versions 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 You must provide the station s current software version and its name when contacting Motorola s System Support Center SSC To access software version information from the connected station perform the following procedu
284. ins two sections One specifies the conditions One specifies the function or action to execute The section that contains the conditions allows the programmer to specify up to three states inputs and two Boolean functions that tie the states input together and to determine the functions to execute The station continuously evaluates the states and inputs specified using the Boolean operators to determine when the condition as evaluated through the Boolean logic statement is true or false When the condition becomes true the commands specified in the Action Table are executed in sequential order When the condition becomes false the commands specified in the Inaction Table are executed in sequential order Commands are executed only when conditions change If conditions do not change commands are not executed WildCard functions may be created to provide simple monitoring tasks such as causing the station to generate a tone over the wireline when Battery Revert becomes true to complex tasks such as the Main Standby feature which requires multiple tables to implement In general using the WildCard option is comprised of the following three major steps 1 Configure station auxiliary inputs Configure inputs into binary groups for external channel or access code table control Configure individual inputs 2 Configure station auxiliary outputs Configure outputs into binary groups for reporting of station channel MCS user info
285. installed and prior to being placed into service The tasks required are shown below RX and TX Wireline Alignment on page 3 55 Aligning Radio Signal Strength Indicator RSSD on page 3 68 Aligning Squelch Adjust Procedure on page 3 71 Equalizing Batteries on page 3 73 Calibrating Reference Oscillator Procedure on page 3 75 Setting ASTRO Tx Align and Test Procedure on page 3 82 Generating ASTRO Test Patterns on page 3 85 e Calibration 6809 Trunking Station Only on page 3 88 ASTRO Bit Error Rate Reports on page 3 90 IMPORTANT Before performing any of the station alignment procedures you must dekey the station transmitter In addition when you enter the Alignment Screen the following prompt is displayed The station is Automatically put into Access Disable mode A station reset is required to return the station to Access Enable Do you want to continue Click Yes to continue When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset 3 54 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT wv IMPORTANT When entering data in any of the alignment screen fields you must click Save to save the value to the station If you enter a parameter value and exit the alignment screen without saving the value the station continues to operate
286. inues Scan Sample Time Specifies the amount of time the scanning process listens 20 to 10 000 msec 30 msec Customer determined to each scanning channel for activity before it scans to the next channel Rx Qualify Time Specifies the amount of time the scanning process listens 210 to 0 000 msec 250 msec Customer determined for PL or DPL after first detecting a carrier on a particular channel Resume Scan Specifies the amount of time delay to begin the scanning 0 to 10 000 msec 2000 msec Customer determined Timer process after the console has issued the resume command Scan Specifies whether the displayed channel is used for Enabled Disabled Customer determined scanning operation Disabled TX Slave Specifies whether the scan channel acts as a repeater Enabled Disabled Customer determined channel when the scanning process detects a carrier on a Disabled scanning channel the transmitter is keyed while locked on that channel 3 34 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Programming the IntelliRepeater 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 The RSS program allows the user to set up the operating parameters for a station in an IntelliRepeater network Figure 3 17 shows the IntelliRepeater screens provided in the navigation pane that are discussed in this section and Table 3 12 provides a description of each of the IntelliRepeater fields The screens are applicable to both IntelliRepeater
287. ion on the host computer 6 Select Guest 7 Click Next The following window appears Network Connection Wizard Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection Select a device 8 Select the device you just added from the dropdown box 9 Click Next The following window appears Network Connection Wizard n Connection Availability You may make the new connection available to all users or just yourself You may make this connection available to all users or keep it only for your own use connection stored in your profile will not be available unless you are logged on Create this connection For all users 10 Select For all users 11 Click Next The following window appears Network Connection Wizard Completing the Network Connection Wizard Type the name you want to use for this connection R S_SLIP_MDM_FP_98DD_CONM1 12 Enter the name of the connection in accordance with the rules outlined in RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 11 18 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 13 Click Finish The following window appears RSS SLIP MDM 9600 COMI EN _ 2 xl User name Password Save Password Connect Cancel Help 14 Click Properties The following window appears General
288. ional 7 28 Release R07 02 02 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 29 Release R08 00 00 R08 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 2 4444400000 0 nennen 7 30 Release R09 00 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 31 Release R09 02 01 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 32 Release R09 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 33 Release R09 05 00 R09 06 00 Features and System Capabilities uu u T a ei tars sux civ bra dria tee rw EE des aix 7 34 Release R09 07 00 R10 00 00 through R10 08 00 R10 11 00 R10 12 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 35 Release R12 01 00 through R12 03 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 36 Release R13 00 00 through R13 02 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional sx u unu pr aera Qi iuc E EM E E instances nee LEEREN toe 7 37 Release R14 0 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 7 38 Release R2 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 7 39 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure
289. isplayed for RSS Releases R1 00 through R3 01 IR and Exciter firmware version numbers IntelliRepeater SmartZone are not displayed 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Table 7 2 TTN4094 and TRN7900 Station Control Boards RSS Compatibility RSS Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE Version 5 Firmware IC Firmware Release Release IC Part No 202 Release Pp Version Part No Version SCM SCM B013 05 07 SCM IR 11 69 R5 00 R5 00 U651 5191020H09 WL B013 05 001 522 7 0653 5191022611 WL B013 03 007 U652 5191020H10 EXC B013 05 02 U654 5191022012 EXC B013 03 006 U653 5191020H11 WL U654 5191020H12 U134 5191013H22 WL U135 5191013H21 U134 5191013H28 EXC U3701 5181012L73 U135 5191013H27 EXC U3701 5191012P13 SCM SCM B013 05 07 SCM IR 13 11 R5 01 U651 5191020H13 WL B013 05 001 SZ2 TE U651 5191020H21 WL B013 05 001 U652 5191020H14 EXC B013 05 02 U652 5191020H22 EXC B013 05 002 U653 5191020H15 U653 5191020H23 U654 5191020H16 U654 5191020H24 WL WL U134 5191013H30 U134 5191013H28 U135 5191013H29 U135 5191013H27 EXC EXC U3701 5191012P13 U3701 5191012P13 SCM SCM 15 06 009 SCM IR 15 06 514 R6 00 R6 00 U651 5191020L01 WL 15 06 004 572 0 3 0651 5191022C29 WL 15 06 004 U652 5191020L02 EXC 13 05 002 U652 5191022C30 EXC 13 05 002 U653 5191020L03 U653 5191022C31 U654 5191020L04 U654
290. it signal Typically in Disabled installations where station and console are connected through a microwave link RS232 Wireline Interface is used Analog Idle Link Serves as diagnostic tool for V 24 Hybrid Enabled Disabled Customer determined Check links to check the physical state of the links Disabled Digital Idle Link Serves as diagnostic tool for all types of Enabled Disabled Customer determined Check links to check the physical state of the links Disabled Modem Input Specifies the signal level range being input 0 to 28 dBm 0 to 28 dBm Depends on system Level Tx WL to ASTRO modem f configuration 9 to 37 dBm Modem Output Specifies the signal level being output from 0 to 20 dBm 14 dBm Depends on system Level Rx WL ASTRO modem configuration RT RT If enabled allows back to back connection Enabled Disabled Customer determined Configuration of ASTRO stations in RF link Disabled configurations 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE ACCESS CODE TABLE DATA FOR CONVENTIONAL SYSTEMS Programming the Access Code Table Data For Conventional Systems Access Code Table Number Rx Type Rv Rx FLOP Colt 1 jn Tenth Tx PLIOPL Code n 10350 Urg Tes Table 1234 acs tact dues tum The appearance of the Access Code Table screen is dependent on the Station Type as configured in the Hardware Configuration screen Click Acc
291. ithin specifications the following procedure is provided to allow you to fine tune the Hi Boost level setting to improve voting accuracy 1 Click the RX Wireline Line 2 tab The Rx Wireline Line 2 screen appears 3 64 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 ME Reterence TX Devinton MI Power Output ASS Catenion ER B Reterence Modulation Compensation Gattery Equatzetion Squecn Aust FX Weeine 2 Current Stored Tween RX Wireline Level 1 KHz 50 69 dim Peak Audio Level 46 dBm RX Wenine Equalization SpectrafiguaSTRO TAC Current Stored LO Roost Adjust Level Hz 00 HI Boost Adjust Level 2588 Hz 00 00 Boost Frequency 2500 299 He Current Stored C Tomon Status Tone Level Below Peak Audio 430 430 Alert Tone Level Below Peak Audio E Radon is Currently ACCESS DIGSADLED Station Status Not Keyed At the comparator connect a high impedance AC voltmeter across the phone line input corresponding to the station receiver being aligned Click Tone On for 2200 Hz and record the value displayed on the voltmeter Click Tone Off Click Tone On for 2500 Hz and record the value displayed on the voltmeter Click Tone Off Click Tone On for 2800 Hz and record the value displayed on the voltmeter Click Tone Off
292. k Hardware Configuration in the navigation pane to access the Hardware Configuration screen Figure 4 2 See Table 4 1 for the screen s data fields 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 4 3 PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR System Type CONVENTIONAL Comparator Type STANDARD Comparator Battery NONE Simulcast DISABLED Simulcast Launch Time Delay 180 msec Validate Configuration CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR System Type Battery Simulcast Vote Scan Comparator Type Chassis Number Comparator Simulcast Launch Time Delay NOE CONVENTIONAL EXPANDED v LIA DISABLED 180 msec DISABLED v Validate Configuration Standard Expanded Figure 4 2 Hardware Configuration Screen Table 4 1 Hardware Configuration Screen Data Fields E Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default 9 Setting if any Standard System Type This field provides for specifying the system in Conventional Conventional System dependent which the comparator is installed Smartzone Comparator Name This provides for identifying the comparator Up to 10 alpha numeric N A Customer defined characters Battery This specifies the battery type installed in the None N A Must match the battery comparator LEAD ACID LIN installed in the comparator LEAD ACID NON NICAD Simulcast Specifies whether the compar
293. l Radio Service Software to C Program Files MotorolaR adio Service Software InstallShield 8 Ifthe directory shown for program installation is acceptable click Next Otherwise click Change to select or create the desired directory then click Next The Select Features window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 7 INSTALLING THE RSS SOFTWARE CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Select Features Select the features setup will install Select the features you want to install and deselect the features you do not want to install Description Radio Service Software Note this component need a Java Virtual Machine to run 55 74 MB of space required on the E drive 107080 42 MB of space available on the E drive InstallShield 9 Click Next to accept the default shown The Ready to Install the Program window appears Radio Service Software InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard InstallShield lt Back 10 The InstallShield Wizard installs the RSS application and indicates its progress in the Setup Status window as shown in the below example 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTALLING THE RSS
294. lane failed STATION NOT DEKEYED STATION PORTNAME CLST STATION RCVD SABM STATION RCVD UA STATION SENT SABM STATION SENT UA STN RCVD ANALOG START ICW STN RECVD STOP ICW STN RECVD STAND ALONE ICW STN SENT ANALOG START ICW STN SENT ANALOG STOP ICW STN SENT STAND ALONE ICW STOPPED ANALOG RX WL CALL STOPPED ANALOG TX WL CALL streaming still on SWITCH DEFAULT TASK SWARE ERROR tca task creation failed tca task start failed TestMsg partition create failed TCH Create failed TCH Start failed Test Failed L2 does not respond SIN ISSN SA NN SASA A LNSCN CNN CN SASA TIME DATE SET 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 23 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source pube ht Internal Incorrectly SITUE tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS TMON Create failed V TMON Start failed V TOD LINK DEGRADATION OFF V TOD LINK DEGRADATION ON V TOTAL CD ASSERTED V TOTAL CD LOST V TRACKING 5 FAILURE No 1 pps GPS input to station Traffic timer expired Unexpectedly V Traffic timer expired while GOINGUP 4 TRUNKING LC OVERWRITE V TSTAT FAILURE V txbdq create failed V TX block failed V tx complete
295. led wireline to console Audio Filters Pre emphasis Specifies whether analog audio is Enabled Enabled Customer determined passed through internal 6 dB per Disabled octave slope filter prior to transmission De emphasis Specifies whether analog audio is Enabled Enabled Customer determined passed through internal 6 dB per Disabled octave slope filter prior to transmission Hi pass Filter Specifies whether analog audio is Enabled Enabled Customer determined passed through internal 300 Hz corner Disabled high pass filter Filters PL or DPL low frequency signaling SECURENET WL CSQ Mute This parameter is used when the 0 1000 msec 150 msec Customer determined Timer channel is configured for SECURENET and Rx Activation is set to CSQ to specify the time that RX Audio is gated to the wireline after carrier is detected 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 23 PROGRAMMING THE CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN Table 3 7 Channel Configuration Field Definitions continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Tem Recommended Data Field Description Range Selection Default Setting if any Repeater Drop Out Delay Specifies the amount of time repeater 0 2550 sec 2 sec Customer defined Typically 1 mode is maintained following loss of to 5 sec received signal Audio Hold Off Specifies the amount of delay before 0 2550 msec 0 msec Customer defined Typically receive audio is gated to the transmitter used in
296. lists provide up to XX fields for entering commands N wv IMPORTANT It is important to remember that for any given state change the command list in each and every State Action Table containing the state change in the State Condition string is executed Be very careful when designing WildCard functions to consider the impact of commands in a given State Action Table with all other State Action Tables even tables that do not relate specifically to the same WildCard function To access the WildCard State screen click WildCard State in the navigation pane see Figure 10 2 See Table 10 2 for the screen s data fields Description POWER UP TABLE 1 OF 14 Jump to Table 1 State And Condition Settings State Cond State Cond State COLD RESET v WARMRESET _ x v Action Inaction CLR OUTPUT 1 NULL v s CLREVENTFLAG v 1 v SETEVENTFLAG v 2 RXDSC AUXRXON v vj Add Table Set To Default Previous Tabi Next Table gt Delete Table Programming Rules Figure 10 3 WildCard State Screen 10 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 10 3 WildCard State Action Screen Data Fields STATE ACTION TABLES ET Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any Description Indicates the name assigned to the Up to 15 alpha Blank System dependent WildCard Function implemented by numeric chara
297. llqedeO 8 yosire4 OSHN sSauniva4d 3HVALLdOS TWNOILdO 1X3 ZHIN OL ZHIN S Sjeuueu ZHx 821 OuL 21529 Sauniva4 3HVALLdOS 15 L3N3Hf193S ALIS 6089 3aIM LSVOTNINIS SNDPINnH L 6089 3N3Hf123S IAIM SNDPINnH L 6089 692 sepniouj LLLX ISVOINNIS aav 692 Ovli vdlOddS dav 966 ALIS 319NIS 6089 Ayiqedeg sepnioul 39V3HW83 NI ALIHOlHd 31OSNOO Idd M 9119 aay 697X VL VY19JdS aav 166X ALIS 6089 SNDPINnH L 6089 2H LY AHA M OSE ZHIN 006 LH AHN o4gueno M 001 VY IM OLL ZH M SZ AHN enO LY SHA enO ZHN 008 ZHN 008 oguenp qardoddns SNOILYLS Figure 7 21 Release R5 00 Features and System Capabilities 6809 Trunking 12 30 2006 6881085E35 AG 7 42 5 LSVOTNINIS ONDINAYL OHLSV AGIM ONDINNYL 6089 7 43 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES 04157 6089 3GIM LSVOTNWIS 6089 L3N3HD103S LSVOTANIS 6089 Idd M 3LIS 319NIS 6089 3N3Hn123S IAIM
298. locating archive files later 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 23 FILE MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Save Save in le archive TRAINING CP My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer File name My Network Places Files oftyp amp Codeplug files cp 3 Inthe Save window name the file appropriately in the File name field 4 Click Save A message window appears Confirmation Do You Wish To Enter Comments 5 Click Yes The Comments window appears It is recommended to enter comments to aid in the identification of the codeplug 2 24 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FILE MAINTENANCE Properties File Information File Type QUANTAR CODEPLUG Codeplug Version 00 27 r Device ID and SW Versions Device ID UNKNOWN IP Address UNKNOWN Physical Address UNKNOWN L r Modification Information Last User Motorola Inc Description and Comments 6 Enter appropriate information in the Last User Date and File Description and Comments fields 17 mm Comments should be explicit enough to help you locate the archive file if needed The information entered here is available when opening a file using Preview in the Open window to help in file identification 7 When done click OK The following window appears when the codeplug is saved as
299. lug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 Click the next to Service in the navigation pane to expand the service node Click Version screen in the Service tree The information pane displays the current version information as shown in the examples below 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING UPGRADES Contre Cord Softwwe Versi n SW Pert Humber Comet Software Version SW Pert Humber ACT OC RO307 005 PCS25r 003000050700 ACT QC 80307 005 PCS2SFO03000090700 Boor 81 R03 05 006 KCS 001000030800 B1 863 06 005 525 00 000030600 Boot B2 R03 07 001 PCS2F002000030700 Box 6290307 001 PC526F002000090700 WasckPlan C ID 000002f CN BE CP Version 39 CP Version 39 Bod SW Version Wireline SV Version Boot Svv Part Number Wireline Part unter 0307 003 08 001 RO307 003 LNOTLASSIGMED 525004000020750 NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED RO306 000 02 07 000 __ ASSIGNED 527000000 NOT INSTALLED NSTALLEO NOT NSTALLEO NOT NSTALLED 0306001 0307 002 ASSIGNED 525 004000020790 NOT INSTALLED NSTALLED MOT NSTALLED NOT INSTALLED 0 AG FES 06901 9367 003 01 90 40 4747004000030700 NOTINSTALLED NOT INSTALLED OT STALLED NOT INSTALLED 4 NOT INSTALLO
300. m serial cable The CSS application uses the same connections for null modem serial SWDL therefore the same naming is used for both applications 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 45 RSS SLIP CONNECTION NAMING CONVENTION CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Naming Convention for Null Modem install A Windows RSS SLIP connection name has three items that depend on and describe some physical parameters of the connection A typical RSS SLIP connection name is CSS SLIP FP 9600 COMI and breaks down as follows CSS SLIP This part of the connection name is fixed All RSS SLIP connections must start with this string This part of the name describes the device port the connection is capable of connecting with Allowed strings are FP front port and back port 9600 This part of the name describes the baud rate at which the connection communicates This value must match the actual baud rate of the connection COMI This part of the name describes the PC communications port that is used to establish the connection RSS SLIP connections must be created in pairs For a given baud rate PC communications port combination create one connection for the device front port and one for the back port Example If the SLIP connection CSS SLIP FP 9600 COM is created then the following must also be created CSS SLIP BP 9600 COMI The meets the requirement that a name for be created for both the front and back port on the
301. m the choice list RX Freq Band 2 Not used for IR 3 35 PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Table 3 12 IntelliRepeater Screen Fields continued Field Tx Freq Description Select the Tx Freq Range IR Freq Band Select the Trunking Band allocation type from choice list Defined by system designer PA Power Rating Select the PA Type installed in the radio use choice list Power Supply Select Power Supply installed in the radio Battery Type Select Battery Type connected to the radio Wireline Normally set to 4 wire The 8 wire selection is used when the Enhanced Wild Card Option is purchased Wild Card Set by user to choice to DISABLED BASIC or ENHANCED Freq Ref Select the frequency reference used for this radio see choice list Simulcast Not applicable to IntelliRepeater External Wattmeter Enable if an External Wattmeter is connected to the radio Programming the Site Frequency Parameters The Site Frequency screen is available only when VHF or UHF Rx and Tx frequency bands are selected in the Hardware Configuration screen If the IntelliRepeater is operating in a VHF or UHF band then click Site Frequency in the navigation pane to access the Site Frequency screen Figure 3 18 See Table 3 14 for the screen s data fields ise Radio 3 Configuration Site Timer Full sub Band Partition Radio Modulation Partition Repea
302. ment you are currently optimizing Also verify that the equipment configuration agrees with the vend ticket shipped with the equipment To access the connected comparator s current configuration data perform the following procedure 1 Click the sign on the Configuration node in the navigation pane to expand the Configuration branch 17 AstroTAC Comparator System Type amp H Configuration Hardware Configuration Comparator Type Conventional System amp Analog Voting Port Control Comparator Name G H Service Version Screen ELE Alignment Screen Simulcast Status Report Screen n Status Panel Screen Simulcast Launch Time Delay Diagnostics Screen CONVENTIONAL STANDARD INONE 180 msec Validate Configuration 2 Click Hardware Configuration to display the comparator s retrieved configuration data as shown in the example above You can now read the comparator s configuration data as programmed at the factory 3 Review the comparator data shown to verify that it matches the equipment and the user s requirements In most cases it matches but there are circumstances where there may be discrepancies such as missing information on the original sales order requiring the factory to leave certain fields at default values 4 Change the data as required and when done save the configuration data to either e An archive file as outlined in Saving Configuration Dat
303. mmed MULTIGRP MISMATCH subscriber radio INDV ID xxxx SAC RECORD NOT AVAILABLE Check system programming INIT ACCESS CTRL PORTS V INIT FROM BAD LM SW STATE V INIT FROM BAD RR SW STATE V INIT FROM LOSS OF CD V INIT FROM MAX INBND TIMER V INIT FROM MODEM DIAG FAIL 5 V INIT FROM RR ACT TIMER V INIT FROM TOO MANY SABMS 4 INIT FROM USER ENABLE 4 INIT FROM V24 CD LOSS V 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source pube elt Internal Incorrectly TEM tatus Message System Programmed Failure Status RSS INIT FROM V52 FAILURE V INIT FROM XID MGMT V INITIALIZATION FAILURE V INITIALIZE FLED V INITIALIZE FP V INITIALIZE GPS V INITIAL SEARCH GPS FAILURE No 1 pps GPS input to station INITIAL SYNC IPPS FAILURE No 1 pps GPS input to station INIT ISV CROSSLOAD CLIENT V INIT SCST V INT WM FWD PWR ALARM Re align power out Wireline Exciter Power Amplifier INT WM REFL PWR ALARM Re align power out Wireline Exciter Power Amplifier INT WM VSWR ALARM Re align power out Exciter Power Amplifier INVALID CMD IN FILE INVALID_CODEPLUG V Upgrade and download latest version codeplug INVALID COMMAND MESSAGE INVALID_CPLUG_CHECKSUM V INVALID DUAL WORD ISW V INVALID FREQ BAND V Verify freque
304. mmended that the frequency measurement equipment has an accuracy 10 times greater than the accuracy required for the measurement For example if the frequency must be measured to within 5 pulses per minute PPM the accuracy of the measurement equipment should be 0 5 PPM The reference oscillator calibration procedure depends on the station configuration Currently there are three possible configurations Perform the calibration procedure that corresponds to the station s configuration Internal reference oscillator located on the station control board e Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Manual Procedure on page 3 75 or e Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Auto Net Procedure on page 3 77 External source typically 5 MHz Reference Oscillator Calibration External Reference Oscillator on page 3 78 UHSO option X873AA Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Ultra High Stability Oscillator UHSO on page 3 78 Reference Oscillator Calibration Internal Reference Oscillator Manual Procedure 1 Setupthe station and R2001 analyzer with an external frequency standard to measure the station s transmitter frequency 2 Disconnect the station s receive antenna cable 3 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 75 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 4
305. mparator s configuration data as sent from Motorola is as specified in the purchase order See Verifying the Comparator s Configuration Data on page 4 2 Customize the codeplug for the comparator s specific installation if required See the following as required for the specific system Programming the IP Address on page 3 6 Programming the MAC Address on page 3 7 Setting the Device s Date and Time on page 3 8 Creating the Station s Password on page 8 2 Programming the Comparator on page 4 3 Save the updated configuration data to a file on the RSS computer as an archive of the comparator s current configuration as outlined in Saving Configuration Data to an Archive File on page 2 23 Save the updated configuration data to the comparator s codeplug as outlined in Writing Codeplug Data to the Device on page 2 21 4 1 VERIFYING THE COMPARATOR S CONFIGURATION DATA Verifying the Comparator s Configuration Data CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Each comparator ships from Motorola s factory with a codeplug that has been custom programmed based on information on the sales order A portion of the comparator codeplug data includes definitions of the comparator hardware configuration including serial number ID types of modules installed and system and modulation type It is recommended that you use the RSS to view this data to ensure that it agrees with the equip
306. n screen CHN XXX Commands station to tune transmitter and receiver to specified channel The channel must exist on the Channel Information table Example CHN 002 GATEACC OFF Commands station not to repeat for users with PLs DPLs assigned with a User Access of Gated on Multi Coded Squelch screen GATEACC ON Commands station to repeat for users with PLs DPLs assigned with a User Access of Gated on Multi Coded Squelch screen KEY Commands station to key transmitter and remain keyed as long as low level guard tone is received If a KEY command is queued by the first tone detected all subsequent tones and their associated commands are ignored until the detection of a subsequent high level guard tone KEY ON Commands station to key transmitter indefinitely Transmitter may be de keyed by the KEY OFF command KEY OFF Commands station to de key transmitter MONITOR Commands station to turn on receiver to wireline audio path Overrides all squelch requirements if any MORE Not required for QUANTAR Quantro stations See Help for details MRTI OFF Disables MRTI phone patch feature MRTI is enabled at station boot MRTI ON Enables MRTI phone patch feature capability Used to cancel MRTI OFF command RXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate receiver squelch as programmed in Channel Information screen for the affected channel Includes CSQ PL and DPL RXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate receiver squelch as programmed in Chann
307. n you initially click Metering Screen in the navigation pane N A appears for all metering values for a few seconds until the data becomes valid N A appears for any metering point not applicable for the station after all valid values are displayed Click the appropriate tab to display the Metering screen for the desired module A list of key metering points appears along with the acceptable value ranges for each metering point See Figure 5 1 for an example 5 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES z Exciter PA Receiver Receiver2 Power Supply UHSO Station Control Wireline Meter Value Range Module ID N A 28 V Power Supply 10300 Volts 14 V Power Supply 4 42 134 10149 Volts 5 v Power Supply 543 48 to 53 Vols Battery Charger Voltage Only 0 00 0 0 to 35 2 Volts Battery Temperature 36 84 40 to 66 degress Heatsink Temperature 5 63 40 to 100 degress C Station Note Access Enable Access Disable Reset Station Station Status DeKeyed Figure 5 1 Station Metering Screen Example Station Comparator Status Report Screen The Status Report screen is comprised of a list of status messages each with a date and time stamp indicating when the status message first occurred and last occurred in relation to the last station power up The status list continues to grow with previo
308. nce 2 22 Saving to 2 23 Firmware Glossa essais ve ette hence C 1 Installing 55 2 4 INDEX 2 Hardware Configuration screen Hardware Configuration screen fields Port 1 Port Control screen fields Retrieving Backplane Smartzone System screen Smartzone System screen fields Verifying configuration Compatibility Modem PC Configuration RSS PC Configuration Fields Station Configuration Disabling Remote Station Disabling DPLCOdES RI nee mms Remote Station Enabling Features and System Capabilities RSS Program Version Relationship Upgrade xs 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Metering SCleENS eo gore SUR TR ae Ra 5 2 N Network Operation Setting the IP Address 3 6 Setting the Date and Time 3 8 Setting the MAC 3 7 Optimization Verifying Station
309. nce of the event The PC Date and PC Time fields provide the current date and time of the PC s clock and are not editable The Device Date and Device Time fields are filled with the current date and time as read from the station These fields are editable and can be changed to the requirements of any given installation To change the station s date and or time perform the following procedure 1 From the Tools menu select Set device date and time The Set Date and Time Screen window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CODEPLUG REPORTS Set Date And Time Screen Hel ee Date And Time Connection configuration Pa Set device date and time Date 2005 08 30 Set IP and MAC address L Time 15 44 00 r Set device password t x Device Date And Time Show CodePlug size E CodePlug upgrade N Date Y Y Y Y MM DD 800 01 01 EnablejDisable Station N r x Time 55 06 53 03 N Enter the device date in Y Y Y Y MM DD format 2 Edit the Date and or Time fields as required for the site s location 3 Click OK to save the Date and Time to the device and close the window Click Apply to save the Date and Time to the device without closing the window Codeplug Reports A text version of the codeplug parameters and current settings may be Printed to a printer connected to the PC See Printing a Codeplug Report on page 5 31
310. ncreased risk of misprogramming which can result in infinite loops inadvertently resetting the station and other unintentional station behavior Please exercise caution when defining the inputs and outputs and when configuring the State Action Tables IMPORTANT If WildCard and SECURENET features are both enabled Output 2 must remain active LO and cannot be used in any other WildCard table either as an individual output or as part of a Binary Group How State Action Tables Operate 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Whenever a state changes from True to Untrue the state condition statement in State and Condition Settings are evaluated from left to right with no parentheses If the logical result changes from Untrue to True the command s in the Action list is executed by the station If the list contains more than one command the commands are executed sequentially All commands in the list are executed even if the logical result of the state condition evaluation becomes untrue during performance of the sequence If the result changes from true to untrue the command s in the Inaction list is executed by the station If the list contains more than one command the commands are executed sequentially All commands in the list are executed even if the logical result of the state condition evaluation becomes true during performance of the sequence The figure below shows a simple example When Input 2 TX Inhibit becomes true logic HI as defi
311. ncy entered on Hardware Configuration Screen Invalid GIB opcode V INVALID GROUP ID xxx RECEIVED FROM MANAGER Misprogrammed system or subscriber radio 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages continued Source Station Generated Internal Incorrectl Status Message y System Programmed Status RSS INVALID INDV ID xxx RECEIVED FROM CONSOLE Misprogrammed system or subscriber radio Hardware Failure INVALID INDV ID xxx RECEIVED FROM Misprogrammed MANAGER system or subscriber radio INVALID INDV ID xxx RECEIVED FROM RADIO Misprogrammed system or subscriber radio INVALID LAUNCH TIME INVALID MCS TABLE ENTRY INVALID METERING VALUE INVALID PL DPL DETECT INVALID SCC INVALID SINGLE WORD ISW INVALID SPI MSG LENGTH INVALID SPI OPCODE lt lt SA 5 NONIS NS INVALID TX DATA READY CODE INVALID WC STATE Out of Date RSS INVALID WIRELINE BOARD Wireline ISV CLIENT Last block arrived but frame buf ptr ZZNULL last buf sending failed LAUNCH TIME OVERRIDE LINK FAILURE ACTIVE LINK FAILURE INACTIVE LINK HWR INIT LINK HWR INIT COMPLETE LINK INIT ACTIVE LINK INIT INACTIVE LINK MNG QUEUE CREATE FAILED LINK STILL DOWN 5 5 SN A 555
312. nds on system design Access Code Network ID hex Voice on control For single station trunked repeater Enabled Disabled Customer determined application Specifies whether station has Disabled capability to temporarily drop control channel operation and become a voice channel Maximum Control Effectively varies the time frame whicha 25 to 595 miles lt 75 miles Customer determined Channel Range subscriber for service ISW can be 125 km successfully received Setting to a smaller range limits access by subscribers farther from site while also increasing chances of false service requests caused by random RF noise Failsoft Modulation For IntelliRepeater 2 0 3 2 7E Failsoft Analog Analog Depends on system configuration Type Modulation is on the Site General Screen ASTRO because failsoft modulation is the same for all the channels Specifies which voice mode is used while in failsoft mode Wireline Interface The following apply to ASTRO CAI V 24 Only V 24 Hybrid Customer determined Capable IntelliRepeaters only e V24 Hybrid 3 38 V 24 Hybrid Used for mixed mode analog and ASTRO systems where the V 24 interface is used for ASTRO and control and the Line 1 Line 2 wirelines are used for analog Used only in trunked systems V 24 Only Used for ASTRO only systems where the external connection is either local or through microwave link 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 3 14
313. ne modem or ISDN C Connect to a private network through the Internet Create a Virtual Private Network VPN connection or tunnel through the Internet C Accept incoming connections Let other computers connect to mine by phone line the Internet or direct cable Connect directly to another computer Connect using my serial parallel or infrared port lt Back Cancel 4 Select Connect directly to another computer 5 Click Next The following window appears 11 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS Host or Guest To connect two computers specify which one you are using 6 Click Guest 7 Click Next The following window appears Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection Eu EE 8 Select the null modem you added in the previous section from the dropdown list 9 Click Next The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 9 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Connection Availability You may make the new connection available to all users or just yourself You may make this connection available to all users or keep it only for your own use connection stored in your profile will not be available unless you are logged on Create this connection For all users C Only for myself lt Back Cancel
314. ned in the WildCard Input screen the TX INHIBIT command in the Action list is executed by the station The station transmitter is now inhibited and remains so until the condition becomes untrue logic LO at which time the command in the Inaction list is executed The station transmitter is now enabled and remains so until the condition again becomes true Description TX INHIBIT TABLE 1 OF 1 Jump to Table 1 State And Condition Settings State Cond State Cond State INPUT 2 v v v v vj Action Inaction TX INHIBIT v TX ENABLE 10 7 STATE ACTION TABLES CHAPTER 10 WILDCARD OPERATION Programming the Wildcard State Screen This screen is available when the WildCard Option is set to either Basic or Enhanced on the Hardware Configuration screen Each station equipped with the WildCard Option comes programmed with a default set of State Action Tables that provide a basic set of station functions such as Ext PTT RX Code Det or RD Stat The default tables utilize the predefined functions assigned to the station auxiliary inputs and outputs as described in the Backplane section of the appropriate QUANTAR or Quantro station or QUANTAR receiver Functional Manual The number of default tables depends on the station type conventional or 6809 trunking You may use the default tables as provided modify one or more to satisfy unique customer requirements or add tables thus adding WildCard functions The Action and Inaction
315. nel for Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 depends on system design Frequency Tx Frequency Transmit frequency in MHz for current Depends on band N A Frequency assigned by FCC channel depends on system design Set to 0 to disable transmitter Tx Idle Defines frequency the transmit Depends on band N A N A Frequency oscillator tunes to when not transmitting Modulation Type Specifies the type of modulation for Analog ASTRO Analog Depends on system design current channel ASTRO or Analog Analog SECURENET CFS Analog SECURENET XL SECURENET CFS SECURENET XL ASTRO CAI Analog ASTRO CAI Tx Rated Specifies the maximum frequency 5 00 kHz 5 00 kHz Determined by FCC per Deviation deviation allowed for channel 4kHz channel type Depends on 2 5 kHz system design 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 21 PROGRAMMING THE CHANNEL INFORMATION SCREEN Table 3 7 Channel Configuration Field Definitions continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Tem Recommended Data Field Description Range Selection Default don Setting if any Receive Channel Specifies the frequency spacing in Wide 25 30 kHz Wide Determined by FCC per BW kHz between channels NPSPAC 25 kHz channel Depends on system Narrow 12 5 15 kHz design Narrow 12 5 KHz Call sign Specifies the call sign for station Alphanumeric 15 characters N A Assigned by FCC Depends on Assigned by FCC max system design Call Sign Over Determines w
316. never M C Redial if line is dropped 21 Select the Networking tab and set the option selection as shown in the figure below CSS SLIP FP 9600 COM General Option Security Networking Advanced Type of dial up server am calling SLIP Unix Connection Settings This connection uses the follovang items F QoS Packet Scheduler O File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Client for Microsoft Networks Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 22 Select SLIP Unix Connection in the Type of dial up server I am calling list 23 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP entry 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 33 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 11 34 24 25 26 27 28 CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Click Properties The following window appears Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatica Use the following IP address IP address 193 0 Obtain DNS dress au y Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Set the
317. ng Repeater Summary Screen 3 41 Programming the Repeater Information 3 41 Programming RF Configuration 3 44 Programming the Codeplug Data into a Conventional or 6809 Station or ASTRO TAC Comparator 3 46 Programming the Codeplug Data into an IntelliRepeater Station Installed in a SmartZone 2 0 3 0r 2 Y E SyStemioLa un see edel E Le et v be ets 3 48 Programming the Codeplug Data into an IntelliRepeater Station Installed in a SmartZone 3 0 3 5 0r 4 1 SySI m es E tek deb detto b ed e OA ede RI E e 3 51 Performing Station 3 54 Required TeshEquipment cis hoe pp ER ABRE RIP Y eR RETE 3 55 RX and TX Wireline 3 55 Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure 3 57 Procedure B Rx Wireline Equalization Alignment 3 59 Procedure C Status Tone Level Alignment 3 63 Procedure D Optional Hi Boost Fine Tuning 3 64 Procedure E Aligning TX Wireline Procedure 3 66 Procedure F Aligning ASTRO Link Management Tone Procedure 3 68 Aligning Radio
318. ng window appears Communications cable between two compute Communications cable between two compute PE p a General Advanced General Advanced preferences Cancel the calli not connected within Hardware Settings Data Connection Preferences Data bits Port speed Data Protocol Party None v 1 Stop bits 1 Compression Flow controt 6 Select the following on the General tab Flow control None Port Speed 38400 7 Select the following on the Advanced tab Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 8 Click OK on all open windows until you reach the control panel again You have successfully added a dial up modem that provides the means to connect to a station or comparator using a SLIP connection from a remote location Proceed with the following section to add a SLIP connection Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Dial Up Modem Connection To add a SLIP connection in Windows XP to connect to a device from a remote location perform the following procedure 11 36 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 3 4 5 Open the Control Panel and double click the Network Connections icon gt Network Connections On the window that appears from the File menu select New Connection Network Connections Click Next on the window
319. nnect to a station or comparator using a SLIP connection Perform the next procedure to add the SLIP connection Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Null Modem Connection To add a SLIP connection that uses the null modem you added in the previous section perform the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and double click the Network and Dial Up Connections icon EJ Network and Dial un Connecbons The following window appears and contains at least the Make New Connection entry 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 7 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Back Gsearch C4 Folder Address Network and Dial up Connections cB L amp Local Area Connection 2 Double click Make a New connection The following window appears Welcome to the Network A Connection Wizard Using this wizard you can create a connection to other computers and networks enabling applications such as e mail Web browsing file sharing and printing To continue click Next lt Back Cancel 3 Click Next The following window appears Network Connection Type You can choose the type of network connection you want to create based on your network configuration and your networking needs C Dial up to private network Connect using my phone line modem or ISDN C Dial up to the Internet Connect to the Internet using my phone li
320. nnection you must 1 Add a dial up modem that is used to connect to the device at a remote location See Adding a Dial Up Modem in Windows XP Professional on page 11 35 Add a SLIP connection that uses the modem you just added See Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows XP Professional for a Dial Up Modem Connection on page 11 36 Adding a Dial Up Modem in Windows XP Professional 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 To add a dial up modem to connect to the device from a remote location install the dial up modem in your computer in accordance with the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer On completion of the new modem s installation or for an existing modem set up the dial up modem as directed in the procedure below 1 If not already open it opens by default when adding a new modem open the Modem Options window from Control Panel The following window appears Phone and Modem Options Dialing Rules Modems Advanced ll The following modems are installed Select the modem from the list Click Properties at the bottom Select the Advanced tab Communications cable between two computers Propert FER General Modem Diagnostics Advanced Driver Click Change Default Preferences found at the bottom of the screen 11 35 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Change Default Preferences The followi
321. nnection Screen icon Radio Service Software Connection configuration k Set device date and time File Service Configuration tig II Radio Service Software File Service Configuration Tools Help LI Set IP and MAC address Set device password Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Open Connection Screen Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station The Connection Screen window appears as shown in Figure 2 6 Connection Screen r Connection Type Serial Serial Settings cour y Baud Rate 9600 Modem Settings Phone Book Modem Configuration Phone Number 5143947964 Moscad Response Time Multiplier Connect Dial Disconnect Hang Up Figure 2 6 Connection Screen Window 3 Select the appropriate connection type serial or modem 4 Verify that the COM port selection is correct The RSS program is provided with available COM port information The baud rate defaults to 9600 2 16 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG I wanna If the base station is not connected to a transmitting antenna or to an appropriate piece of test equipment capable of handling the output you must connect a dummy load to the transmitter output Do not key the transmitter or use the station to transmit RF unles
322. nnection you just added Phone and Modem Options Dialing Rules Modems Advanced The following modems are installed Modem Select your new connection Click Properties at the bottom Select the Advanced tab Communications cable between two computers Propert 2 ene Modem Diagnostics Advanced Driver Click Change Default Preferences at the bottom of the screen Change Default Preferences OK Cancel 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS The following window appears gt i lt Communications cable between two compute Communications cable between two compute f2 f amp General Advanced General Advanced Call preferences Cancel the call not connected within Hardware Selling Data Connection Preferences Data bis r speed T Data Protocot Stop bts 1 Compression Flow controt 21 Select the following on the General tab Flow control None Port Speed 38400 22 Select the following on the Advanced tab Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 23 Click OK on all open screens until you reach the control panel again You have successfully added a null modem that provides the means to connect to a station or comparator using a SLIP connection Proceed wit
323. ns have been established the RSS and the LEDs on the station control module front panel indicate the software download progress Inthe RSS Progress appears at the bottom of the Software Download window On the station control module All LEDs slowly flash indicating that the station is in download mode The LEDs flash sequentially up and down marquee style as the station downloads the data from DRAM memory to FLASH memory on the station control module The station resets when DRAM to FLASH download is complete If the station also has new wireline software then reset station control module downloads the wireline operating software to the wireline interface module This is indicated by the two flashing LEDs on the wireline interface module Otherwise the stations completes the boot process and the station control module s Station On LED lights 12 success message appears on successful software download If the station enters a frozen or locked state the software modules have not been FLASHed properly To recover click Erase Flash then repeat the download procedure Click Erase Flash only if you have the software on hand to download to the station Erasing FLASH renders the station inoperable until software is downloaded 17 mcm In an IntelliRepeater network when the software download has completed to one station all other stations in the network are automatically crossloaded through Ethernet so that they ar
324. nt Console Hangtime to a comparator remains keyed up and transmitting silence at the conclusion of a digital data call sourced by a console DIU port Default Specifies the address that the comparator uses 00 to 3F hex 3F hex System dependent Transmitter when there is no unique address specified in the Steering Address source message that the comparator is sending to stations Hangtime HDLC Specifies which station s transmits hangtime 00 to 3F hex 3F hex System dependent Address generated by the comparator 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 4 5 PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Table 4 2 Conventional System Screen Data Fields continued AX Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default dye Setting if any Analog Voice Specifies the amount of time a station connected 0 0 to 15 0 seconds 2 0 seconds System dependent Repeat Hangtime to a comparator remains keyed up and transmitting silence at the conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a subscriber unit Analog Voice Specifies the amount of time a station connected 0 0 to 15 0 seconds 0 0 seconds System dependent Console Hangtime to a comparator remains keyed up and transmitting silence at the conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a console Programming the Smartzone System Screen Click Smartzone System in the navigation pane to access the Smartzone System screen Figure 4 4 See Table 4 3 for the
325. ny part of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extend of the law Version Details If you would like to see more details about the RSS click Version Details See the example below About Radio Service Software MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE Version 0 9 7 July 2005 Codeplug Version 12 Warning This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any part of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extend of the law Core R14 00 00 gt gt Version Details GUI 20050627 01 Build date 20050630 Xerces library Xerces J 2 6 2 log4j library 1 2 9 Java version 1 4 2 05 If you wish to upgrade the station s codeplug version click OK to close the Versions window then from the Tools menu select Codeplug upgrade 3 gur irat able tior _ Connection configuration Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address Set device password Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade h Enable Disable Station Help Upgrade Codeplug Data Current Codeplug Version 12 Upgrade To Codeplug Version 14 Click Upgrade to upgrade the station s codeplug The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL i The Codeplug Mus
326. o the station receiver being aligned 2 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 3 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 4 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 5 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane 3 59 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION MEE She General 6 Click Yes to continue w When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears 3 60 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT B Retererce Modulation Compensstson Bstery Egusizsbon Sych D RX Velim re 2 B 1x Oson Power Outout Reference 4 BSS Cet Reference Oscillator Frequency gt Trentmt Frequency 9539125 MHZ AUTO NET 10 MHz AUTO NET 5 MHz KEYUP Station Note Station Currertty ACCESS DISABLE ED etur Not Keyed 7 Click the RX Wireline Line 2 tab The Rx Wireline Line 2 screen appears Reterence TX Deviation Power Output M FSS BH Reference Modulstion Compensation B
327. ommended maximum Tx Rated Deviation set on the Channel Information screen 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 29 PROGRAMMING THE RF CONFIGURATION DATA SCREEN Table 3 9 RF Configuration Data Fields continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION n Range Recommended Data field Description 9 Default s Selection Setting if any Low Speed PL Specifies the deviation for low speed TDATA for 6809 0 25 17 for 1796 or 1896 Deviation trunking applications 25 kHz recommended based on 18 for channel bandwidth 12 5 kHz Antenna Relay Specifies whether antenna relay is implemented on station Disabled Disabled N A Enabled Antenna Relay Specifies the delay to allow relay contacts to close before 30 90 msec 30 msec 30 msec recommended Delay station transmitter is keyed Call Sign Interval Specifies the time interval at which FCC assigned station 1 60 minutes 10 Set time less than or call sign is broadcast equal to the time specified by the FCC Startup on Last Specifies that the station starts on the last active channel Disabled Disable Depends on system Active Channel after a reset Enabled configuration Startup Channel Specifies the channel to which station it is set after a reset 1 28 1 Depends on system Ignored if Startup on Last Active Channel is enabled configuration ASTRO Fade Specifies the number of missed frames before ASTRO 1 3 frames 3 frames Customer defined Tolerance message is considered terminated
328. ommunications analyzer as follows Frequency Set to the station s receive frequency Output level Set as specified in the system design document Typically set to 12 dB SINAD or 20 dB quieting RF level Modulation None 3 Click the Squelch Adjust tab The Squelch Adjust screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 71 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Reterence Tx Deviation Power Output MN ASS Catenion BB TX Weeine Reterence Moduisbon Compensation Datery Sauekch Adust Rx vWeine ine 2 Receiver Mode inr Normal S L 4 On Receiver 1 Charmed 1 Receive Frequency 1 weer we Receive Frequency gt Select Receiver 1 NETTEN Nomai SOL Seve ene Cesena J Ration Note Station is Currenty ACCESS Station Status Not Keyed 4 Click Select Receiver 1 5 Click the triple arrows pointing to the left to set the squelch to fully open Receiver Mode in NORMAL SQL K K __ F3 3 Click to set squelch fully open er 2 Channel 1 Receive Frequency 1 806 0 Receive Frequency 2 6 Turn on the station s local speaker and verify that you can hear carrier noise If you hear carrier noise proceed to the next step If you do not hear carrier noise resolve the problem before proceeding 7 Usethe right pointing arrows to set the squelch until the noise is
329. omparator 20 to 3 dBm 14dBm System dependent Level on the port s 2 wire output when a modem link is either idle or supporting a digital call Output Analog Specifies how often a link is transitioned to a 10 to 300 sec 120 sec System dependent Link Timer digital state and a message is sent to verify that the link is functional and active Hybrid V 24 Link Fields conventional and Smartzone systems Input Level Specifies the numerical difference between the 20 to 3 dB 0dB System dependent Differential port s modem or idle tone input signal level and the port s analog input signal level Analog Output Specifies the output signal level used when 0 to 20 dBm 14dBm System dependent Level transmitting an analog signal Idle Tone Output Specifies the output level of the idle tone on the 0 to 20 dBm 10 dBm System dependent Level analog portion of the hybrid link when the analog side of the link is idle Performing Comparator Alignment 6881085E35 AG Certain site specific alignment tasks must be performed during optimization at the time they are installed and prior to being placed into service The tasks required are shown below Equalizing Batteries on page 4 10 Reference Oscillator Calibration Procedures on page 4 10 12 30 2006 4 9 PERFORMING COMPARATOR ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 4 OPTIMIZING THE ASTRO TAC COMPARATOR Equalizing Batteries Sites equipped with storage batteries to provide comparator power in ca
330. on PC509F1050000501500 020 09 005 R10 02 00 PC509F022000501001 PC5093104000009005 R10 03 00 IR 005 01 501 0180706 51 Boot 2 005 01 001 PC509F1050000501501 020 09 005 PC509F022000501001 5093104000009005 10 04 00 005 01 502 10 05 00 0180706 51 Boot 2 005 01 001 PC509F105000501502 020 09 005 R10 06 00 PC509F022000501001 PC5093104000009005 R10 07 00 SCM 005 01 504 R10 08 00 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 Boot B2 005 01 001 App Sftwr 509 105000501504 EXC 020 09 009 R10 11 00 Boot2 PC509F022000501001 R10 12 00 EXC PC5093 104000009009 R12 01 00 SCM TR_005_01_504 App Sftwr PC509F105000501504 R12 03 00 Boot2 PC509F022000501001 EXC 020 09 009 EXC PC509E02M000009010 Notes 1 The software versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu or by selecting Status Panel Software Version Set Date and Time from the Service menu 7 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 7 6 CLN7462 Station Control Boards Limited QUANTAR RSS Version Compatibility RSS Version Release Release R10 04 00 R10 04 R10 05 00 R10 05 R10 06 00 R10 06 R10 07 00 R10 07 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 SCM P651 SIMM App Sftwr Boot2 WL U134 U135 EXC SCM P651 SIMM App Sftwr Boot2 WL U134 U135 EXC SCM P651 SIMM App Sftwr Boot2 WL U134 U135 EXC
331. on burran Tx Wireine 1 Calibration J Station Stalion is ACCESS DISABLED 4 Connect the signal generator to the station as shown in Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 TX Wireline Alignment Setup 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PHONE LINE INPUTS 1 LINE 1 5 LINE 3 2 LINE1 6 LINE3 3 LINE2 7 LINE4 4 LINE2 8 LINE4 1 kHz tone level you wish to result in 60 of rated system deviation defined in system design document MON OUT PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 3 67 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT Procedure F Aligning ASTRO Link Management Tone Procedure Aligning Radio Signal Strength Indicator RSSI 3 68 CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION For 2 wire audio circuits Line 2 is used for both receive and transmit For 4 wire phone line circuits Line 1 is used for transmit audio For 6 wire and 8 wire phone line circuits Line 1 and Line 3 are used for transmit audio 5 Click Tx Wireline 1 Calibration The station automatically adjusts for the TX Wireline level and stores the value s in memory This procedure is required only for ASTRO stations with hybrid links including conventional 6809 trunking and IntelliRepeater trunking 1 Click Rx Wireline Line 2 tab The Rx Wireline Line 2 screen appears Tone Tone Set Freq Tone C WE Reterence
332. on s codeplug The general process for optimizing a base station is as follows 1 Connect the RSS computer to the station See Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 Read the station s codeplug See Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 Verify that the station s configuration data as sent from Motorola is as specified in the purchase order See Verifying the Device s Configuration Data on page 3 3 Customize the codeplug for the station s specific installation if required See the following as required for the specific system Programming the IP Address on page 3 6 Programming the MAC Address on page 3 7 Setting the Device s Date and Time on page 3 8 e Creating the Station s Password on page 8 2 Programming Wireline Configuration Data on page 3 8 Programming the Access Code Table Data For Conventional Systems on page 3 13 Programming the Access Code Table Data for 6809 Trunking Systems on page 3 15 Programming the Multi Coded Squelch Table Screen on page 3 16 Programming the Channel Information Screen on page 3 20 Programming the TRC Commands Data on page 3 25 Programming DC Remote Command Data on page 3 27 Programming the RF Configuration Data Screen on page 3 29 Programming the 6809 Trunking Interface Data on page 3
333. on provides details on RSS compatibility and the relationship between the RSS program station firmware and station hardware Associated with each RSS version are corresponding station firmware versions QUANTAR firmware releases prior to R9 00 consisted of a four IC EPROM set for the station control board two EPROM set for the wireline board and one EPROM for the exciter QUANTAR release R9 00 and later releases utilized a Flash download to a single SIMM on the station control board which also contains the wireline firmware version The exciter board continues to use a single EPROM Prior to Release R07 02 02 The release numbering format for all RSS releases prior to R07 02 02 is RX XX with each major release resulting in an incremented release number such as R1 00 to R2 00 and minor releases resulting in an incremented point number such as R3 01 For the RSS this release number is printed on the RSS CD and appears in the About window 57 mm The release numbering scheme was not implemented in the initial release of the RSS and station firmware The initial RSS release was numbered R01 19 17 This version is considered release R1 00 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 1 BEGINNING WITH RELEASE R7 02 02 CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Beginning with Release R7 02 02 The release numbering format for all RSS releases beginning with R7 02 02 is RXX XX XX with each major release resulting in an incremented release number such
334. opriate for the installation as outlined below Serial connection between the PC and a single station or one of the stations in an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network See Serial Direct Connection on page 11 47 Ethernet connection between PC and a single station or to the access point in an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network See Ethernet Connections on page 11 48 Remote connection to a single station or one of the stations in an IntelliRepeater Ethernet network using PC and dial up modem See Remote Dial Up Connections on page 11 50 Zone controller link connection using PC and channel banks modems IntelliRepeater systems only See Zone Controller Link Connection on page 11 50 Serial Direct Connection A serial connection may be made between the PC and the RSS port located on the station control module front panel You may make the connection to either a single station or to one of the stations in an IntelliRepeater network 57 mm ASTRO TAC receivers can be downloaded only through the serial port 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 47 CONNECTING TO THE DEVICE CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 9 PIN EIA 232 MALE D TYPE CONNECTOR STATION CONTROL MODULE CABLE WIRED FOR NULL MODEM CONNECTIONS 9 PIN EIA 232 5 RSS PORT FEMALE D TYPE ON CONNECTOR 5 STATION CONTROL Os 4 8g MODULE Figure 11 1 Serial Connection for Software Download Ethernet Connections An Ethernet connection may be mad
335. ot2 PC5091002000009012 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009012 EXC 020 09 001 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095103000009015 App Sftwr 5095103000009015 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 SCM SCM 5 020 09 028 SCM SCM 020 09 528 R09 00 00 R9 01 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 022 573 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 022 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009028 Boot B2 020 09 012 App Sftwr 5091103000009528 Boot B2 020 09 012 Boot2 PC5091002000009012 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009012 EXC 020 09 001 WL WL U134 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095103000009022 App Sftwr 5095103000009022 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 SCM SCM SC_020_09_031 2 SCM SCM 020 09 533 R09 02 01 R9 02 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 09 022 572 0 3 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 09 022 App Sftwr PC5091 103000009031 Boot B2 020 09 014 and App Sftwr 5091103000009533 Boot B2 020 09 014 Boot2 PC5091002000009014 EXC 020 09 001 Boot2 PC5091002000009014 EXC 020 09 001 WL SZ3 0 U13 PC5095201000009008 U134 PC5095201000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 U135 PC5095101000009008 App Sftwr PC5095103000009022 App Sftwr 5095103000009022 EXC PC5093104000009001 EXC PC5093104000009001 SCM SCM SC_020_09_042 SCM SCM 020 09 542 R09 03 00 R9 03
336. oueJejeu 1X3 ZHN OL ZHW S Sjeuueu ZH 521 W 9 3 6SX ZH PU LH JHA M OSE ogueno ZHN 006 48juenc 950 IVNV V3HV 1V901 TVNOILNSANOD v u amp noiu oguenp ZH pue H AHA 4ejueno dd ZHN 008 JEejuenp 21529 ZHIN 008 Saunivad 3HvMLJOS SNOILVLS 7 25 12 30 2006 Figure 7 4 Release R4 00 Features and System Capabilities Conventional 6881085E35 AG CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES SS399V 3Nauno3s IAIM OHLSV 1V901 1svo1nWis 1VNOILN3ANOO 1VNOILN3ANOO 2229 226 LSVOTNNIS dav 553007 H3lV3d3H WYS aav 55300 LINFUNIAS aqIN LINIHNIISVAYV 17007 IVNOLLN3ANOO TVNOILN3ANOO 1Svo1nWis 692x sepnioul X ISVOINNIS aav jeuondo sanba S LOHLSY Autiqedeo pJoMsseg 5 SSY uojenbs pepoo niniw euoud ILYN OSHN Saunivad 3HVALLdOS TWNOILdO X3 ZHN OL ZHIN S ZHY 521 IN 9 3 uue v Honey Aieneg 9 seg Saunivad 3HVALLdOS 1VNOILN3ANOO 869X 13N3uHfhO3S AAY 226 6 2 SS300V H3alvadau W
337. pable of running Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP This chapter provides information on frequently performed operations such as launching the RSS program and downloading a codeplug from a connected device The following topics are included User Interface Description on page 2 2 PC Requirements on page 2 4 Installing the RSS Software on page 2 4 Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 Exiting the RSS Program on page 2 15 Navigating Through the RSS Screens on page 2 19 Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 Writing Codeplug Data to the Device on page 2 21 Obtaining Codeplug Size on page 2 22 File Maintenance on page 2 22 including saving and opening archive files Summary of Features 6881085E35 AG The RSS program provides the following features and capabilities 12 30 2006 Read and program device codeplug data Create replacement codeplug files based on default codeplug template files included with the RSS program Optimize newly installed devices Modify or upgrade existing installations 2 1 USER INTERFACE DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW Perform device alignment procedures Interrogate and interpret device status log files Perform comprehensive diagnostics on all device modules Perform digital metering to measure key voltages and levels User Interface Description The RS
338. pp Sftwr PC509500100010008 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 SCM SCM SC_020_10_042 2 SCM SCM IR_020_10_536 R10 04 00 R10 04 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_008 522 0 3 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL_020_10_008 App Sftwr PC509F 10300010042 Boot B2_020_10_003 and App Sftwr PC509F 10400010536 Boot B2_020_10_003 Boot2 PC5091002000010003 EXC 020 09 005 Boot2 PC5091002000010003 EXC 020 09 005 WL SZ3 0 U134 PC5095204000010807 U134 PC5095204000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 U135 PC5095104000010807 App Sftwr PC509500100010008 App Sftwr PC509500100010008 EXC PC5093104000009005 EXC PC5093104000009005 7 8 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP Table 7 3 CLN6960 CLN6961 CLN6873 and CLN7060 Station Control Boards with Software Download Capability Non IntelliRepeater 5 0 Stations RSS Compatibility continued Conventional 6809 Trunking IntelliRepeater SMARTZONE RSS Version E Release Software IC Software Release Software IC Software elease Part Numbers Version Part Numbers Version SCM SCM 5 020 10 049 2 SCM SCM IR_020_10_543 R10 05 00 R10 05 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL_020_10_014 522 0 3 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 10 014 App Sftwr PC509F10300010049 Boot B2 020 10 008 and App Sftwr PC509F10400010543 Boot B2 020 10
339. ram writes the configuration data entered in the current session to the connected device Confirmation Obtaining Codeplug Size When the codeplug has been read from the device as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 you can view the size of the codeplug by choosing Show codeplug size from the Tools menu The Codeplug Size Information window displays the codeplug information as shown in Figure 2 8 Tools Help Connection configuration Set device date and time Codeplug Bytes In Use 1136 Set IP and MAC address Codeplug Bytes Remaining 31632 Set device password Codeplug Size Information Maximum Codeplug Size 32768 Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Figure 2 8 Codeplug Size Information Window File Maintenance File maintenance is accomplished through Windows Explorer or My Computer as preferred When the RSS is installed on your computer the installation program creates a default archive directory as follows Motorola Radio Service Software archive Specifically where this directory tree is located depends on where RSS was installed on your computer When working with more than one device you find it helpful to Create an obvious directory structure to store the codeplug archives for the devices in each of the systems you work on 2 22 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FILE MAINTENANCE Archive each device s codeplug
340. rator The Graphical User Interface GUI and context sensitive help simplify setting up the stations for operation in your system To gain the full benefit of many features and capabilities offered by the RSS program please read this guide and keep it handy as a reference for day to day operations 17 NOTE The figures provided in this guide are examples only The screens you see may be different depending on your Microsoft Windows operating system Intended User Profile The information presented in this guide is intended for use by qualified communications technicians and maintenance personnel to program troubleshoot and align QUANTAR and Quantro stations and ancillary equipment It is assumed that the user is Familiar with general communications equipment operation alignment and maintenance Proficient in the use of alignment and servicing test equipment such as an oscilloscope digital voltmeter DVM and the Motorola R2001 or equivalent communications analyzer Experienced using computers running Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems OSs and familiar with Windows applications and operations 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 1 1 ORGANIZATION OF THIS GUIDE CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Performing tasks such as copying disks and executing programs while described in this guide would be facilitated by a general knowledge of Windows 2000 or Windows XP Refer to your PC and OS manuals for information relating to
341. rd Completing the New Connection Wizard YYou have successfully completed the steps needed to create the folowing connection CSS_SLIP_FP_9600_COM1 Share with all users of this computer The connection will be saved in the Network Connections folder _ Add a shortcut to this connection to my desktop To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish 14 Select Anyone s use 11 30 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 15 Click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Completing the New Connection Wizard YYou have successfully completed the steps needed to create the following connection CSS_SLIP_FP_9600_COM1 Share with all users of this computer The connection wall be saved in the Network Connections foldes _ Add a shortcut to this connection to my desktop To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish 16 Click Finish The following window appears Leave the area code and phone number fields blank User name Password Save this user name and password for the following users Ma only Anyone who uses this computer 17 Click Properties The following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 31 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING _SUP_FP_9600_COM1
342. re 1 Connect to the station as outlined in Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 2 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 3 Read the connected station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 4 Click the next to Service in the navigation pane to expand the service node 5 Click Version Screen in the Service tree The information pane displays the current version information as shown in the example below RETRIEVING COMPARATOR SOFTWARE VERSIONS AND BACKPLANE ID CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Station Control Firmware RO20 12 034 2003 07 23 11 37 Station Wireline Firmware R020 12 008 2003 07 23 11 37 Station Exciter Firmware 020 09 010 Station Boot2 Firmware RO20 10 022 2003 04 02 10 40 Station Boot Firmware RO20 10 009 0000 00 00 00 00 Codeplug Version 42 Retrieving Comparator Software Versions and Backplane ID 7 18 You must provide the comparator s current software version and its backplane ID when contacting Motorola s System Support Center SSC To access software version information from the connected station perform the following procedure 1 Connect to the comparator as outlined in Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port on page 2 12 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 Read the connected comparator s codep
343. re Base Radio File Service Configuration 5 oH 5 84 S Base Radio amp 24 Configuration aede ni te Frequency Site General Site Timer Ful Sub Band Partit Figure 2 3 RSS Menus 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 IB Radio Service Software Base Radio Configuration Tools Help n Version Screen Alignment Screen Metering Screen Status Report Screen Hare Test And Measurement Screen Status Panel Screen Sys File Service S Base Radio amp W Config Site Site Full Rac File Service Configuration Tools 22 Connection configuration Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address T Base Radio Set device password Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade EnablejDisable Station IB Radio Service Software Base Radio Configuratiop Tools Help v Hardware Configuration Site General Site Timer Full Sub Band Partition Radio Modulation Partition Repeater Information Repeater Summary RF Configuration WildCard Input WildCard Output WildCard State Radio Service Software Base Radio El TI us ri mes 2 3 PC REQUIREMENTS CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW PC Requirements The following list provides the hardware requirements for the computer that has the RSS installed on it CD DVD drive One serial communications port Microsoft
344. reating Enter the name of the connection in accordance with the rules outlined in RSS SLIP Connection Naming Convention on page 11 45 Do not add any other text to the name other than what is stated in the rules Click Next The following window appears 11 39 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING New Connection Wizard Phone Number to Dial What is your ISP s phone number Type the phone number below Phone number You might need to include a 1 the area code or both If you are not sure you need the extra numbers dial the phone number on your telephone If you hear a modem sound the number dialed is correct 14 Leave the phone number field blank and click Next The following window appears New Connection Wizard Connection Availability You can make the new connection available to any user or only to yourself connection that is created for your use only is saved in your user account and is not available unless you are logged on Create this connection for 15 Select Anyone s use 16 Click Next The following window appears 11 40 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS New Connection Wizard Internet Account Information You will need an account name and password to sign in to your Internet account an ISP
345. red Control Assigns preference level for channel s use as the 0 4 0 disabled 4 As determined by the Channel Rank control channel system design Dispatch Indicates whether the station can make dispatch Disabled Analog As determined by the Capability calls Analog system design ASTRO Analog ASTRO Failsoft Indicates whether the repeater can operate in the Enabled Disabled As determined by the Capability failsoft mode Disabled system design BSI Capability Indicates whether the repeater can operate in the Enabled Disabled As determined by the BSI operating mode If set to Enabled an entry Disabled system design must be provided for Base Station Identification DFB Capability Indicates whether repeater is capable of dynamic Enabled Disabled As determined by the frequency blocking Disabled system design Secure Capability Indicates whether the repeater is capable of 12 Kb ASTRO Secure Disabled As determined by the operating as a secure station Disabled system design Protect Capability Prevents the station from being assigned as Enabled Disabled As determined by the control channel or to a dispatch call unless it is the Disabled system design only repeater available Subband Indicates whether the repeater can operate at sub Enabled Disabled As determined by the Capability band frequencies Allows system to be optimized Disabled system design for more efficient call steering Failsoft For IntelliRepeater 3 0 3 5 4 1 Failsoft Mod
346. restarts the timer Multi NAC Table Defines up to eight Rx and Tx network access codes for the 0 hex RxNo 1 Depends on system design specified Access Code Table Number For ASTRO CAI 293 voice only Tx No 1 NULL 1 Applicable for ASTRO CAI Capable stations and Multi Coded Squelch is disabled in the Hardware Configuration screen 2 Applicable for ASTRO CAI Capable stations and Multi Coded Squelch is set to Multi NAC in the Hardware Configuration screen 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROGRAMMING THE ACCESS CODE TABLE DATA FOR 6809 TRUNKING SYSTEMS Programming the Access Code Table Data for 6809 Trunking Systems The 6809 trunking systems require that the subscribers and the stations be programmed with the same system Connect Tone Connect Tone 1 DISABLED Connect Tone 2 Rx Astro Access Code 293 Tx Astro Access Code 293 Smart Connect Tone Smart Connect Tone Decoder MUTE TICKLE Connect Tone 1 Connect Tone 2 0 105 8 Hz DISABLED Smart Connect Tone Smart Connect Tone Decoder MUTE TICKLE v Smart Connect Tone Disable Delay 7 0 0 msec Smart Connect Tone Disable Delay 700 ASTRO capable Analog Only Figure 3 7 Access Code Table Screens Table 3 6 Access Code Table Screen Parameters 2 Range Recommended Data Field Description Default dn p Selections Setting if
347. rew 6 If the station is not at desired power repeat steps 3 and 4 Test And MeasuremeN Status Panel Screen Note If an error occurs during adjustment press the P INIT button to clear the error and set the P to an initial value Restart the alignment process 8 Click KEYUP 9 Read the power output as displayed by the wattmeter 10 Enter the value displayed by the wattmeter into the Power Read on Wattmeter field 11 Click ADJUST The station automatically adjusts its output power 12 Click KEYUP to verify that the station correctly adjusted its output power to its rated value Ifthe PA FAIL LED turns on during the alignment procedure click PA INIT and proceed to step 8 If the output power displayed on the wattmeter is not at the rated level proceed to step 9 6 10 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ALIGNING TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST PROCEDURE 350W VHF STATIONS If the output power displayed on the wattmeter is at the rated level proceed to step 13 13 Click SAVE to save the calibrated value in memory This may take up to 12 seconds Aligning Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Procedure 350W VHF Stations To set the station s Tx Deviation Gain Adjust perform the following procedure 1 Connect the station as shown in Figure 6 4 2 Setthe R2670 communications analyzer as follows Display Set to Read Deviation Narrow Bandwidth NB Filter Enabled High Pass Fil
348. rmation or access code table control Configure individual outputs 3 Configure state action tables Modify default state action tables to accommodate unique system requirements Generate new state action tables to implement new WildCard functions 10 1 STATION AUXILIARY INPUTS CHAPTER 10 WILDCARD OPERATION Station Auxiliary Inputs Each QUANTAR and Quantro station and QUANTAR Receiver contains circuitry located on the wireline interface board that can accept TTL inputs and relay closures AUX Inputs from miscellaneous external equipment Two types of inputs are provided Opto coupled Transistor These are available through the 50 pin system connector located on the station backplane For normal operation without WildCard option many of these inputs have predefined functions as described in the Backplane section of the appropriate QUANTAR or Quantro Station Functional Manual or QUANTAR Receiver Functional Manual However with the WildCard Option available and enabled through the RSS the function of each predefined input and each undefined input may be customized usually to implement one or more WildCard functions An additional feature is the ability to select predefined combinations of inputs binary groups When used with a properly programmed WildCard Function this feature facilitates binary control of the station by an external source such as the console to control the station operating channel or select an A
349. rn the Fan on press Fan 2 Verify that the fan is operating properly 3 Set the Fan back to Auto mode press Fan Auto Fan Status Help Fan On Fan Auto 2 Verify that the fan turns on If the fan does not turn on remove the comparator from service and contact Motorola to replace the fan 3 Ifthe fan functions click Fan Auto to return the fan to automatic operation 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 35 ASTRO TAC DIAGNOSTICS CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 5 36 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Performing Post Repair Alignment Following replacement of certain station modules as described in the Troubleshooting section of the appropriate station functional service manual alignment procedures may need to be performed before placing the station back into service The RSS program provides access to the alignment routines required by QUANTAR Quantro station modules Overview of Alignment Routines 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 The Alignment screens see Figure 6 1 show the available alignment routines for the QUANTAR Quantro station products The following is an overview of each alignment routine Rx Wireline Line2 Line 4 Sets the desired wireline level that results from an RF receive signal at 60 of system rated deviation Tx Wireline Calibrates the gain of certain audio circuits on the wireline interface board so that the desired level of audio signal from consol
350. rogram This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Modify 13 Select new program features to add or select currently installed features to remove Repair Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup Remove Remove all installed features eld 3 Click Next 4 InstallShield program automatically reinstalls the RSS files and fixes the Registry entries Connecting the PC to the Device RSS Port A nine pin male to nine pin female EIA 232 null modem cable Motorola part number 30 80369E31 is required to connect the computer to the device Figure 2 4 provides a null modem cable wiring diagram 2 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CONNECTING THE PC TO THE DEVICE RSS PORT To COM port on RSS To RSS Port on SCM computer 9 pin D front panel 9 pin D type EIA 232 Female Type EIA 232 Male TXD TXD RXD RXD GND GND RTS RTS CTS CTS Figure 2 4 Null Modem Cable Wiring Diagram Connect the null modem cable from the serial port of the computer running the RSS to the RSS port on the device control module as shown in Figure 2 5 9 pin EIA 232 Female D type connector Station Control Module 9 pin EIA 232 Male RSS Port D type connector Figure 2 5 RSS Cable Connections 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 13 WORKING WITH THE RSS PROGRAM CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW The RSS cable can also be
351. rts COM2 COM6 COM 13 Select the following e Click Selected ports Select the PC port that you use to perform the serial software download to the device 14 Click Next The following warning message appears Hardware Installation The software you are instaling for this hardware Communications cable between two computers has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing STOP Installation 15 Click Continue Anyway to disregard it If the operation was successful the following window appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 25 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 11 26 16 17 18 19 20 CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING Add Hardware Wizard Install New Modem Modem installation is finished Your modem has been set up successfully If you want to change these settings double click the Phone and Modem Options icon in Control Panel click the Modems tab select this modem and then click Properties Cancel Click Finish to exit The following window appears This window now contains the modem co
352. s 1 Connect the station and R2670 analyzer 3 90 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT TO RECEIVE ANTENNA R2670 COMMUNICATIONS ANALYZER ag ec Disconnect cable from re ceive antenna to lower N type connector on bracket racc Connect N to N cable between sta tion receive input and RF In Out con nector on R2670 2 Setthe R2670 as follows Frequency Set to station s Rx frequency Output level 0 5 uV 113 dBm e Modulation V 53 or Project 25 1011 Pattern as applicable 3 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 4 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 5 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 6 Click Test and Measurement Screen in the navigation pane The Test and Measurement screen appears 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 91 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION ASTRO BER amp RSSI Report ASTRO Test Pattern Receiver Frequency 1 MHz 806 0125 Receiver Frequency 2 MHz 0 0 Settings Sampling Period sec 1 r Results Bit Error Rate 95 Received Signal Strength dBm N A Start BER Measurement Start RSSI Measurement Start Log The
353. s Set device password Enter New Password Show CodePlug size Confirm New Password CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station OK J umm 1 Enter The Current Password If Any 4 Leave the Enter Current Password field blank it currently has no password 5 Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field 6 Enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field 7 Click OK If the passwords entered in the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields match then the new password is saved If the passwords do not match the following warning window appears and you must re enter the new password 8 2 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHANGING STATION PASSWORD RSS Error The Passwords You Entered Do Not Match Password Not Accepted Changing Station Password To change an existing station password perform the procedure below 1 Connect the RSS computer to the station 2 Launch RSS and connect to the station 3 From the Tools menu select Set device password The Station Password Prompt window appears Station Password Prompt Device Is Password Protected Enter Station Password Enter the Station Password 4 Enter the current password 5 Click OK The Set Device Password window appears Set Device Password Help Enter Current Password Connection configuration Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address Set d
354. s need not be changed However all fields are fully editable to accommodate unique system requirements or user specified values Not applicable to DSHI or QUANTAR data base stations Click RF Configuration in the navigation pane to access the applicable RF Configuration screen see Figure 3 14 See Table 3 9 for details on each field Repeater Operation BASE v Repesler Operation BASE Devisbon 92 Deviation 2 Low Speead t Deviation 170 Low Deviation 170 Antenna Arterna Antenna Relay DISABLED Antenne Reis Call Sign indervat bU Col Son Intervet 60 min On Lest Active Channet On Lest Active Channet DGADLED Channet 1 ly Charret 1 ASTRO RDLAP ASTRO ROLAP Repeal DISABLED Repeat DISABLED v Deviation 92 Drop Ou Delay 0 sec VWreine Drop Out Delay 0 sec Low Speed Devisbon 170 ASTRO Tx Fer VD PULSE v ASTRO Tx Fiter WIDE PULSE y ASTRO fede Tolerance JIRAMLS ANALOG Supa ona Reverse Burst INTERNAL Figure 3 14 RF Configuration Screens Table 3 9 RF Configuration Data Fields Range Recommended Data field Description Default REUS p Selection Setting if any Repeater Specifies whether station is operating as a base station or a Base Base Depends on system Operation repeater Repeater design Max Deviation Limits the station transmit deviation to a percentage of 0 100 92 92 rec
355. s its transmitter output port is connected either to a transmitting antenna or to a 50 high power dummy load 5 Ensure that the device is turned on and click Connect Dial The RSS attempts to connect to the device If successful the following message appears RSS Information e QD RSS successfully connected to this device 6 Click OK The RSS Information window closes 7 Download the current codeplug information from the connected device by either the File menu select Read from Device Clicking Read Configuration From Device toolbar icon Radio Service Software Service Configuration Tools Help en Ctri o ave t IB Radio Service Software ave As File Service Configuration Tools Help Read from Device Ctrl R 4 Ed Th Read Configuration From Device Software Download Exit Alt F4 If the device requires a password the Station Password Prompt window appears Station Password Prompt Device Is Password Protected Enter Station Password Enter the Station Password 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 2 17 READING THE DEVICE CODEPLUG CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW If required enter the device s password and click OK The RSS retrieves the codeplug data from the device and stores it on the PC displaying the progress READING COOEPLUG FROM DEVICE READING CODFPLUG FROM DEVICE Start In progress The Codepiuy Has Been gt d Successfully Read From The Connected Device
356. s location by Motorola personnel are not covered by this warranty TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Intended User 1 1 Organization of this Guide sesi erisa Hed eee weed ted bees eye denied deeds 1 2 Related Manuals es euin tae Pie a E 1 3 Chapter 2 RSS Overview Summary of 4 2 1 User Interface Description 1 14 0 2 1 2 2 PC Requirements is soe ae me hed pew ETC 2 4 Installing the RSS Software 1 2 4 Removing a Previous RSS Version 2 10 Repairing an ll hh 2 12 Connecting the PC to the Device RSS 2 12 Working with the RSS 2 14 Launching the RSS 7 2 14 Exiting the RSS 2 15 Reading the Device Codeplug 1 4 1 1 2 15 Navigating Through the RSS
357. s lower when this alignment is performed 5 Set the analyzer to the transmit frequency displayed in the Current Frequency field The analyzer should display a square wave at approximately 10 Hz as shown in Figure 6 6 The horizontal segments of the waveform should be as straight as possible with no noticeable droops or bumps Y NOTE Adjust the oscilloscope to be able to adequately view the waveform during alignment 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 6 15 ALIGNING REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION PROCEDURE HORIZONTAL SEGMENTS MAY CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT BE SLANTED BUT MUST BE HORIZONTAL SEG ape WITH NO DROOP OR MENTS MUST NOT BE DROOP OR HUMP n T SN p lt CORRECT WAVEFORM INCORRECT WAVEFORM Figure 6 6 Waveform Examples If the waveform is acceptable click SAVE and proceed to step 7 Ifthe waveform is not acceptable click either the right or left arrows to adjust the station s output until the waveform is acceptable Click SAVE and proceed to step 5 6 Click DEKEY 7 Perform steps 5 through 7 for ALIGN REF 2 6 16 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Version Compatibility and Upgrades Periodically Motorola may release an upgraded version of the RSS program with a companion release of station firmware Each upgraded version typically provides support for new station features The following informati
358. s the password to be entered Password Time out If the RSS remains idle for 10 minutes without user activity an internal station timer expires requiring the user to re enter the password You may bypass the password for the current RSS session by performing the procedure Bypassing the Station Password on page 8 6 Activating Password Protection Stations are shipped from the factory without a default password and can therefore be accessed by any user with a compatible release of RSS software To activate password protection you must access Tools then Set device password and establish an initial password 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 8 1 CREATING THE STATION S PASSWORD CHAPTER 8 PASSWORD PROTECTION Special Password Protection Features The password protection feature allows a forgotten password to be erased as well as temporary circumvention of the current password leaving the current password valid These features are described in this chapter Creating the Station s Password To create a station password for stations with either no prior password or an erased password perform the procedure below 1 Connect the RSS computer to the station 2 Launch RSS and connect to the station 3 From the Tools menu select Set device password The Set Device Password window appears Set Device Password Tools Help Enter Current Password Connection configuration Set device date and time Set IP and MAC addres
359. se of primary power failure require that the battery cells be equalized periodically It is recommended that the batteries be equalized at the time of installation and henceforth according to the schedule recommended by the battery manufacturer Battery equalization is a process under which the charging voltage to the batteries is slightly boosted for a period of time typically 48 hours to 72 hours This slight overcharging causes the individual cells to regenerate equally and provide nearly identical output voltages 1 Click the Battery Equalization tab The following Battery Equalization screen appears Reference Oscillator Battery Equalization In order to maintain proper charge and capacity some batteries require periodic equalization When equalization is turned ON the connected device will equalize for a period of time and then it will turn equalization OFF The user is given the capacity to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in the connected device The timer is dependent on the type of battery selected Lead Acid Non Linear Not Equalized Lead Acid Linear 72 Hours NICAD 48 Hours Equalization is OFF Turn Equalization ON Turn Equalizetion OFF Help 2 Click Turn Equalization On to start the process The comparator power supply boosts the battery charging voltage slightly for a period of time determined by the type of batteries being used as specified in the Hardware Configuration screen
360. selections Al Radio Service Software Base Radio Senece Configuration Toos Heb Ste Frequency Ste Goneri Ste timer Bord Parilion Anda Moduintion Partition in ormaton Repester Summary RF Configuration input Tables amp __ Service Sorini Musser Station Name Pinti System Type INNTELUREPEATER 3 09541 4 Station Type ASTRO CAL CAPABLE Tx freq Gen UM 494540 9 MIT Pf PA Power Rating 100 Watts Power Suppr AC LOW ve Type NONE 8 WRE Weard BHANCED Freq Ker STANDARD Operation External Wnttmeter NONE Configuration lt Use Arrow Keys Select Rx Frequency Bana Deconnecte Figure 3 17 IntelliRepeater Specific Configuration Screens Table 3 12 IntelliRepeater Screen Fields Field Serial Number Description Serial number assigned to the radio by the factory Station Name User definable station name Hardware Platform Either QUANTAR or Quantro System Type IntelliRepeater 3 0 3 5 4 1 supports either Analog or ASTRO CAI operation IntelliRepeater 2 0 3 2 7E supports either Analog or ASTRO VSELP operation Station Type Select Analog ASTRO CAI or ASTRO VSELP RX Freq Band 1 Select the Rx Freq Range fro
361. squelched Wait atleast one second between each arrow click to allow the squelch circuitry to adjust 17 mm The single arrow moves the squelch by single units the double arrow by 7 units and the triple all the way to 100 tight 3 72 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 8 When the carrier noise is squelched use the left pointing arrows to adjust the squelch toward open until carrier noise is again heard Wait at least one second between each arrow Click to allow the squelch circuitry to adjust 9 Click Save The squelch setting is saved to the station 10 If the station has two receivers click Select Receiver 2 and perform steps 7 through 9 Otherwise squelch setting is complete y mm Trunking stations IntelliRepeater or 6809 SMARTNET SmartZone stations must be configured for mixed mode ANALOG ASTRO CAI operation in order for them to detect interfering carriers The threshold for detecting the interfering carrier is set by performing the Carrier Squelch alignment A station that is configured for ASTRO CAI only operation does not perform the carrier detect function properly Equalizing Batteries Sites equipped with storage batteries to provide station power in case of primary power failure require the battery cells be equalized periodically It is recommended that the batteries be equalized at the time of installation and henceforth according to the sche
362. ssword Prompt Set device date and time Device Password Protected Set IP and MAC address Set device password Enter Station Password Show CodePlug size Ten CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Enter the Station Password Type lost in the Enter Station Password field 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ERASING STATION PASSWORD REMOTE ACCESS 5 Press and hold the Vol Up and Vol Down pushbuttons on the Station Control front panel While holding the pushbuttons in click OK on the Station Password Prompt window The station password is permanently erased Erasing Station Password Remote Access 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 If the password is erased all future RSS sessions local or remote are allowed without requiring a password You may create another password by following the instructions on page Creating the Station s Password on page 8 2 If you know the station password and are connected to the station through a remote dial up connection you may erase the current station password by performing the procedure below 1 Connect the RSS computer to a modem 2 Launch RSS and dial in to the station 3 From the Tools menu select Set device password The Station Password Prompt window appears Tools Help Connection configuration Station Password Prompt Device Is Password Protected Set device date and time Set IP and MAC address Set device pas
363. sword Enter Station Password Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade ume Enable Disable Station Enter the Station Password 4 Enter the current password 5 Click OK The Set Device Password window appears Set Device Password Enter Current Password Enter New Password Confirm New Password Enter The Current Password If Any 8 5 BYPASSING THE STATION PASSWORD CHAPTER 8 PASSWORD PROTECTION 6 Typethe current password in the Enter Current Password field 7 not enter a password Instead click OK the RSS information window appears indicating that password protection has been disabled RSS Information fe d Password Protection Has Been Disabled 8 Click OK to close the window Bypassing the Station Password If you wish to temporarily bypass the station password perform the procedures below After the password has been bypassed the current RSS session allows the RSS to operate as if you had entered the station password When the RSS session is terminated or the station is reset password protection is again activated using the current password 57 mm You need not know the current station password to perform this procedure However you must be physically at the station site 1 Connect the RSS computer to a modem 2 Launch RSS and connect to the station 3 From the Tools menu select Set device password The Station Password Prompt window appears Tools Help Connec
364. system design You may choose to create one access table for each channel or allow multiple channels to share the same table When you program the Channel Information screen see Programming the Channel Information Screen on page 3 20 you assign a particular Access Code Table number in the Active Code Table field to each channel provided by the station PROGRAMMING THE ACCESS CODE TABLE DATA FOR CONVENTIONAL SYSTEMS CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 17 mm The number of channel information screens you create and the information programmed into each depends on the system design Before programming the information in the Access Code Table s obtain the channel and access code information from the system designer This information defines the number of channels supported by the station and the particular squelch type PL DPL codes or ASTRO codes to assign to each channel Table 3 5 provides information about the Access Code Table parameters Table 3 5 Access Code Table Field Definitions Recommended Data Field Description 9 Default Selection Setting if any Access Code Table Identifies the current table as one of 16 possible tables 1 16 1 N A Number Rx Squelch Type Defines the type of receiver squelch recognized by station PL CSQ Depends on system design receiver DPL CSQ Rx PL DPL Code Defines the access code corresponding to PL or DPL type Use Help CSQ Must be valid code for specified abov
365. t 3 Click Properties at the bottom of the window The following window appears Communications cable between two comp ste T General Diagnostics Advanced 4 Select the Advanced tab 5 Click Change Default Preferences at the bottom of the tab screen Change Default Preferences 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 11 15 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING 6 Click the General tab of the new window The following window appears 7 Configure the window as follows Flow control None Port Speed 38400 8 Click the Advanced tab The following window appears ions cable between two computers O O oj x 9 Configure the window as follows Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 10 Click OK on all open screens until you reach the control panel again 11 16 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS You have successfully added a dial up modem that provides the means to connect to a station or comparator using a SLIP connection you add in the next section Adding a SLIP Connection in Windows 2000 Professional for a Dial Up Modem Connection To add a SLIP connection in Windows 2000 and to connect to a device from a remote location perform the following procedure 1 Open the Control Panel and double click on the Network and Dial Up Connections icon P La
366. t Be Written Out To The Station To Complete The Process PERFORMING UPGRADES 5 Click Continue to write the upgraded codeplug to the station and complete the upgrade process Upgrading an Archived Codeplug File 1 Launch the RSS program 2 Open the archive file to upgrade 3 From the Tools menu select Codeplug upgrade The Upgrade Codeplug Data windows appears Help Upgrade Codeplug Data Set device date and time Set and MAC address Current Codeplug Version 12 gur Set device password rat eO n able Upgrade To Codeplug version 14 Show CodePlug size n a Connection configuration CodePlug upgrade h ior Enable Disable Station gt 4 The Must Be Written Out To The Station To Complete The Process Click Upgrade to upgrade the station s codeplug The following window appears 5 Click Continue to write the upgraded codeplug to the station and complete the upgrade process 6 Savethe upgraded codeplug archive for installation in a station later 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 21 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES Features and System Capabilities The following figures provide a summary of the features available in each release STANDARD CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA ANALOG SOFTWARE FEATURES CONVENTIONAL LOCAL AREA SECURENET Basic TRC PL Battery Revert
367. t panel 2 Set the frequency source for 1 0 0 5V RMS output 3 Clickeither Auto Net 5 MHz or Auto Net 10 MHz depending on the reference in use to begin the calibration process using the test reference source The status area of the screen displays the progress 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 77 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Transmit Frequency 851 0 AUTO NET 5 MHz AUTO NET 10 MHz 4 When the process is complete close the Completed Successfully message window The oscillator adjustment data is saved to the station codeplug and the station dekeys Reference Oscillator Calibration External Reference Oscillator This procedure is required only if the station transmitter and or receiver do not lock as indicated by the Tx Lock LED off or the Rx Fail LED lit when the external source is present and on The accuracy of this procedure depends on the accuracy of the external source Ensure that the 5 or 10 MHz source provides the required accuracy as defined in Table 1 in the Routine Maintenance section of the relevant functional manual for the station 1 Connect the output of the stable 5 or 10 MHz external reference source to either the BNC connector located at the bottom of the station control module front panel or the BNC connector located on the station backplane 2 Clickeither Auto Net 5 MHz or Auto Net 10 MHz depending on the reference in use to begin the calibration process using the test referenc
368. ta to the Device 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Base Radio amp 9 Configuration Hardware Configuration Wireline Configuration Access Code Table Channel Information TRC Command Table RF Configuration WildCard Input WildCard Output WildCard State B 239 Service Version Screen Alignment Screen Metering Screen Status Report Screen Test And Measurement Screen Status Panel Screen 0200000000 6 WRITING CODEPLUG DATA TO THE DEVICE Figure 2 7 RSS Information and Function Screens After changes have been made to the device s codeplug data the data must be written to the device To upload configuration data to the device perform the following procedure 1 Do one of the following From the File menu select Write to Device Click Write Configuration to Device icon on the toolbar Radio Service Software Service Configuration Tools Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Save As Read from Device Ctrl R Properties Print Codeplug Report Ctrl P Save Codeplug Report Software Download Merge Wildcard Exit Alt F4 IB Radio Service Software Base Radio File Service Configuration Tools Help CH Radio Write Configuration To Device S 73 Configuration Hardware Configuration Wireline Configuration 4 a Aada Tete 2 21 OBTAINING CODEPLUG SIZE CHAPTER 2 RSS OVERVIEW 2 Click Yes when the Confirmation window appears The RSS prog
369. ted by the system designer as follows 1 Click TRC Command Table in the navigation pane The TRC Command Table screen appears as shown in Figure 3 12 The TRC Commands screen allows you to define any or all of the 16 function tones by assigning up to eight station commands per tone Guard Tone 2175 Hz MORE FT1 2050 Hz MONITOR FT2 1950 Hz CHN 001 KEY FT3 1850 Hz FT4 1750 Hz 5 1650 Hz FT6 1550 Hz Figure 3 12 TRC Command Table Screen 1 Click the cursor in the desired field to start entering commands through the keyboard The commands are executed in sequence 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 25 PROGRAMMING THE TRC COMMANDS DATA CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION CHN UU1 KEY 1 213 185 2 For any displayed tone in the TRC Command Table screen Enter the desired command from Table 3 8 in the cells of that tone up to eight commands per tone If the Guard tone is set to a frequency that is within 40 Hz of a function tone that function tone is blanked and therefore unavailable for use 3 Repeat step 2 for all other tones if required Table 3 8 TRC Commands Command Function ALARM OFF Commands station not to route alarm alert tones over the air and or over the wireline as defined on the Channel Information screen ALARM ON Commands station to route alarm alert tones over the air and or over the wireline as defined on the Channel Informatio
370. ted with the data in internal registers data communications between ICs on the station circuit boards and various other software processes These status messages may result from such occurrences as a power glitch failure lightning strike or phone line malfunctions any of which are capable of corrupting internal station data Due to the precision of the ASTRO signaling protocol minor errors in signaling protocol may result in status messages even though these may not be service affecting Incorrect RSS Programming Status messages in this category usually result from incorrect or invalid codeplug programming Hardware Generated Status Messages Status messages of this type are the result of a station or external hardware malfunction Table 5 1 Station Comparator Generated Status Messages Source n s Internal Incorrectly NEA tatus Message System Programmed Fallure Status RSS ABORT SEQUENC V abort streaming V ACCESS DISABLE ABORT V52 V Exciter Power Amp UHSO 5 MHz External Ref IPPS GPS Battery Revert Mode Loss of 16 8 MHz ACCESS TO PRES MEM FAILED V A D ERROR V ALREADY DISABLED V ANALOG LINK FAIL ACTIVE V ANALOG LINK FAIL INACTIVE V ANT RLY SHORT ALARM Power Amplifier Antenna Relay ASTRO FRAME OVERWRITE V ASTRO TEST TONE ABORTED V BAD BD LENGTH V BAD ERROR LOG ENTRY V BAD EXT WATTMETER TYPE V BAD V BAD INT WATTMETER TY
371. ter 5 Hz Low Pass Filter 20 kHz 22670 Firmware Version Must be 5 04 xx or later 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 6 11 ALIGNING TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST PROCEDURE 350W VHF STATIONS CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT 1 Remove N type connector from PA output 2 Connect cable from wattmeter Station Note For Quaniro stations connect wattmeter to output of low pass filter 9990 boc we Note Keep this cable as short as possible Figure 6 4 Tx Deviation Gain Adjust Alignment Setup 3 Click Hardware Configuration in the navigation pane then the Tx Deviation tab The Tx Deviation screen appears 6 12 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ALIGNING TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST PROCEDURE 350W VHF STATIONS TX Wireline ro Sirr attern TDATA Calibration Reference Modulation Compensation Battery Equalization N Squelch Adjust RX Wireline line 2 Reference Oscillator Deviation kHz gt Key On Freq Stored Deviation 3 03 B TX Deviation B Power Output B RSSI Calibration Deviation kHz Key On Freq 2 Stored Deviation 343 Deviation kHz Key On Freq 3 Stored Deviation 343 Deviation kHz Key On Freq 4 Stored Deviation 325 Current Frequency MHz 0 000000 Key On Status Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS DISABLED Station Status Not K
372. ter Information Repeater Summary RF Configuration WildCard Input WildCard Output WildCard Tables X Service Version Screen 020000900909 IntelliRepeater Frequency Band HF Block Base Frequency MHz Channel Spacing of Channel Rx 0 000000 Booz 380 Rez 000000 o Rx 3 0 000000 booz Txt 0 000000 5 00 kHz 380 0 000000 5 00 kez Wo _ Tx 3 0 000000 5 00 kHz Figure 3 18 Site Frequency Screen 3 36 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 3 13 Site Frequency Screen Data Fields PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER eT Range Recommended Setting if Data Field Description Default p Selections any Block VHF and UHF trunking spectrum is Non editable Rx 1 non editable divided by FCC into three Rx frequency Rx 2 blocks and three Tx frequency blocks each block is defined by a base frequency Rx 3 channel spacing kHz and number of channels in the block Tx 1 Tx 2 Tx 3 Base Frequency User programming for starting frequency Per each VHF or 0 00000 As determined by the Station of each block of channels for receive or UHF FCC allocated Configuration transmit channel starting frequency Channel Spacing User Programmable for the FCC allocated 5 6 25 10 12 5 5 kHz As determined by the Station channel spacing 15 18 75 20 25 Configuration 5kHz 25 6 25kHz 30 31 25 35 37 5 40 43 75
373. tern is now on Std Dev Is On Stop Pattern Transmission Observe the pattern on the R2670 display Compare the pattern s deviation with that specified in the Help file by clicking Help 3 87 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION If it matches the specified deviation proceed to step 10 fit does not match the specified deviation troubleshoot and repair 10 Click Stop Pattern Transmission to stop the transmission 11 If required to select another pattern proceed to step 7 and repeat steps 7 through 10 Otherwise the procedure is complete Disconnect the test equipment TDATA Calibration 6809 Trunking Station Only 1 Launch the RSS program as outlined in Launching the RSS Program on page 2 14 2 Read the station s codeplug as outlined in Reading the Device Codeplug on page 2 15 You are now connected to the station 3 Click the sign next to Service to expand the Service menu 4 Click Alignment Screen in the navigation pane 181 x Configuration Took Help v 2 Base Recto z 4 Cuortapa son 2 Reference Compensation watery a RX vreine ne 2 Ste General Reterence TX Deviation Power Output 18 55 Calibration Timer Fulub Dand Perteon Rado Modulsiion Partition Repeater Information Repeater Summar
374. tervals PROGRAMMING WIRELINE CONFIGURATION DATA CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 1 Enabling ALC affects the setting of the intercom volume immediately after a station reset The intercom volume is high and may be unintelligible The station requires one TRC sequence such as high level guard tone function tone sequence in order to properly establish line levels Therefore before using intercom request that the console send any TRC sequence to the station This sequence establishes the proper level for intercom Table 3 4 ASTRO Tab Parameters Data Field Wireline Interface Description Defines type of ASTRO wireline interface Range Selections V24 Hybrid Default Trunking V 24 Hybrid Recommended Setting if any Customer determined as follows Modem Conventional Modem V 24 Hybrid Used for mixed mode V24 Only analog and ASTRO systems where the V 24 interface is used for ASTRO and control and the Line 1 Line 2 wirelines are used for analog Used only in trunked systems Modem Used for systems where the external connections to from stations are through phone lines Used for mixed mode analog and ASTRO systems Not used in trunking systems V 24 Only Used for ASTRO only systems where the external connection is either local or through microwave link External Transmit Specifies whether external synchronization Enabled Disabled Customer determined Clock is required for transm
375. tery Equalization Squelch Adjust N RX VVireline line 2 B Reference Oscillator B TX Deviation B Power Output B RSSI Calibration Reference Oscillator Frequency 4 119 gt Transmit Frequency 853 8125 MHz AUTO NET 5 MHz AUTO NET 10 MHz KEYUP DEKEY Help Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS DISABLED Station Status Not Keyed Figure 6 1 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen This chapter provides procedures for those alignment procedures not described elsewhere in this guide or the station functional manual Table 6 1 lists each alignment routine and where to find the corresponding procedure Note that some alignment routines must be performed as part of routine maintenance and or at the time of equipment installation as indicated in parentheses on the alignment screen Table 6 1 Alignment Procedures Alignment Routine When Required Location Rx Wireline Line 2 Line 4 Station control module Procedure A Rx Wireline Alignment Procedure on page 3 57 Tx Wireline Wireline interface module Procedure E Aligning TX Wireline Procedure on Station control module page 3 66 RSSI Calibrate Receiver module Aligning Radio Signal Strength Indicator RSSI Station control module on page 3 68 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table 6 1 Alignment Procedures continued Alignment Routine Squelch Adjust Battery Equalization When R
376. that appears New Connection Wizard Network Connection Type What do you want to do Connect to the Internet so you can browse the Web and read email Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dia up or VPN so you can work from home a field office or another location Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it Select Connect to the Internet Click Next The following window appears PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS 11 37 PREPARING PC FOR SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 11 SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING iNew Connection Wizard Getting Ready The wizard is preparing to set up your Intemet connection How do you want to connect to the Internet Choose from a list of Internet service providers ISPs Os connection manually For a dial up connection you will need your account name password and phone number for your ISP For a broadband account you won t need a phone number Use the CD I got from an ISP 6 Select Set up my connection manually 7 Click Next The New Connection Wizard window appears as shown in the example below New Connection Wizard NH A Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection You have more than one dial up
377. tion configuration Device Is Password Protected Set device date and time Station Password Prompt Set IP and MAC address Set device password Enter Station Password Show CodePlug size CodePlug upgrade Enable Disable Station Enter the Station Password 4 Type service in the Enter Station Password field 8 6 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL BYPASSING THE STATION PASSWORD 5 Press and hold the Vol Up and Vol Down pushbuttons on the station control front panel While holding the pushbuttons in click OK The station password is bypassed The RSS operates as if you had entered the current station password The time out feature is still operational if the 10 minute timer expires you must repeat the password bypass procedure 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 8 7 BYPASSING THE STATION PASSWORD THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CHAPTER 8 PASSWORD PROTECTION 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Remote Dial Up QUANTAR and Quantro stations support remote dial up capability This feature allows the service technician to make a dial up connection through a modem to a station and perform RSS tasks See Figure 9 1 for an example of a typical dial up connection between a PC and a remotely located station See the modem manufacturer s instructions for information connecting the modem to your computer Phone line Station modem SS Laptop with RSS Figure 9 1 Remote Dial
378. to de activate access disable and restore the station to normal operation IMPORTANT When entering data in any of the alignment screens fields you must click Save to accept the entry and save the changed value to the station If you alter a parameter value and exit the particular alignment screen without saving the changed value the station continues to operate using the changed value only until a station reset occurs either deliberately or due to an external cause such as a momentary power failure 7 mum If you experiment with a parameter value without intending to permanently change the value you must remember not to save the value and to reset the station to restore the original parameter value s TEST EQUIPMENT FOR POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 6 PERFORMING POST REPAIR ALIGNMENT Test Equipment for Post Repair Alignment Procedures Performing the alignment procedures requires using the RSS program in conjunction with the following test equipment Motorola R2001 R2670 communications analyzer or equivalent In line wattmeter adapter RTL4055B or equivalent In line wattmeter elements ST1200 series or equivalent This equipment is used to inject and monitor test signals The RSS provides the means of adjusting various alignment parameters Aligning Power Output Procedure mm This procedure is not for the Quantro 350W VHF station If you are aligning a Quantro 350W station refer Aligning Pow
379. to the station The download may be performed either locally through a null modem or remotely through a dial up modem The SWDL process differs from connecting to a device through RSS because SWDL requires the use of file transfer protocol FTP and RSS does not Therefore you must configure a modem to use serial line internet protocol SLIP because SLIP supports FTP The process for performing a SWDL to upgrade your device s software is outlined below 1 Ensure the prerequisites met See Prerequisites on page 11 2 2 Prepare the PC for connecting to the station receiver or comparator See Preparing PC for Software Download Communications on page 11 3 57 mm Step 3 is needed only if your device is an IntelliRepeater and you are going to connect through an Ethernet connection or a zone controller link connection 3 Copy the device software from the Motorola supplied disk to the PC hard disk See Loading Station Software Files onto the PC on page 11 53 4 Connect to the device See Connecting to the Device on page 11 47 5 Download the station software from the PC to the station If your device is not an IntelliRepeater See Downloading Software to Station Receiver Memory Conventional and 6809 Controller Systems or ASTRO TAC Comparator Memory on page 11 53 If your device is an IntelliRepeater See Downloading Software to IntelliRepeater Memory on page 11 57 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006
380. ttings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask pour network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 193 01 08 55 Obtain DNS server address automatically 6 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server 2 5 Alternate DNS server OK Cancel Set the IP Address field as follows Ifthe connection being configured connects to the front port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 5 If the connection being configured connects to the back port of the device the IP should be 193 0 0 4 Click Advanced when done The following window appears Advanced TCP IP Settings IN u 2 General DNS WINS Options This checkbox only applies when you are connected to a local network and a dial up network simultaneously When checked data that cannot be sent on the local network is forwarded to the dial up network Use default gateway on remote network PPP link Use IP header compression Uncheck the Use default gateway on remote network checkbox Click OK on all screens until you reach the Network Connections screen When you finish clicking OK on all windows a Connect window appears offering you the opportunity to connect to the device Click Cancel to close the Connect window 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SE
381. tware versions See Figure 5 7 Station Control Firmware Station Wireline Firmware Station Exciter Firmware Station Boot2 Firmware Station Boot Firmware Codeplug Version Setting Date and Time 5 30 R020 12 034 R020 12 008 R020 08 010 R020 10 022 R020 10 009 12 Station Control Card Softwere Version SW Part Mamber ACT OC 05307 005 PCS25F003000030700 Boti B1 R03 06 005 WICS25F001000030600 62 0307 001 PC525r002000030700 2003 07 23 11 37 BackPtane 00000f C31 56 2003 07 23 11 37 CP Version 35 SW version Boot SW Part Number Wireline SW Part Number ww K03 06 002 K03 07 003 P 525401 00003060 UOS 30 2003 04 02 10 40 MOT MSTALLED NSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED IMOT NSTALLED NSTALLEO INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED 0000 00 00 00 00 NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT NSTALLED NSTALLED NOT NSTALLED INSTALLED MOT MSTALLED NSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED MOT NSTALLED NSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLEO NOT NSTALLED NSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED Help Comparator Figure 5 7 Station and Comparator Version Screens In most situations the station s internal clock is set for the current date and time for the location in which it is installed This ensures that timestamps associated with any status messages provide correlation with the actual time of occurre
382. ug programming and alignment tasks required at time of installation of station equipment Chapter 4 Optimizing the ASTRO TAC Comparator provides step by step instructions for using the RSS program to program a newly installed ASTRO TAC comparator Chapter 5 Diagnostics and Status describes how to use the diagnostics capabilities of the RSS program also describes how to read and interpret the status report log how to use the front panel display and how to use the digital meeting screens Chapter 6 Performing Post Repair Alignment provides step by step procedures for performing station alignment routines Chapter 7 Version Compatibility and Upgrades provides information regarding RSS version compatibility issues and instructions for performing RSS and station upgrades Chapter 8 Password Protection describes the use of the station password protection feature Chapter 9 Remote Dial Up describes how to make a dial up connection through a modem to the station This allows the RSS to be used remotely Chapter 10 WildCard Operation describes how to use the wildcard option feature 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL RELATED MANUALS Related Manuals Chapter 11 Software Downloading describes how to download station software to FLASH memory on the station control board Appendix A PL DPL Codes provides the PL DPL codes Appendix B
383. ulation Analog Analog Depends on the system Modulation Type is on the Site Repeater Screen because failsoft ASTRO configuration modulation can be set individually for each channel Specifies which voice mode is used while in failsoft mode 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 3 43 PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Table 3 18 Repeater Information Screen Data Fields continued CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default Setting if any Advanced Tab Modulation Type Specifies the type of modulation for current Analog Analog if As determined by the channel The selections provided depend on the ASTRO StationType system design Station Type selected in the Hardware Analog ASTRO is Analog Configuration screen ASTRO RX WIDE Analog DEV ASTRO if Secure XL Station Type Analog Sec XL ag Secure CFB P Analog Sec CFB Analog CAI Analog ASTRO CAI CAI Rx Wide Dev Tx Rated Specifies the maximum frequency deviation 5 00 kHz 5 00 kHz Determined by FCC per Deviation allowed in channel 4 kHz channel type Depends 2 5 kHz on the system design Receive Channel Specifies the frequency spacing in kHz between Wide 25 30 kHz Wide Determined by FCC per BW channels NPSPAC 25 kHz channel type Depends Narrow 12 5 15 kHz on the system design Narrow 12 5 kHz Tx Power Out Specifies the output power from the station power Quantro 50 to 110
384. uration in the navigation pane to access the RF Configuration screen See Figure 3 26 and Figure 3 27 for views of the RF Configuration screens See Table 3 19 for the screen s data fields 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL Sign Intervet Startup Channet r ASTRO ROLAP Repeat Wireline Drop Delay 0 ASTRO Tx Fler 60 min Stwtup On Last Active Channel v 1 DISABLED PULSE 44 ANALOG Reverse Burst INTERNAL Conventional Analog PROGRAMMING THE INTELLIREPEATER Repeater Operator m Max Deviation 92 Low Speedie Deviation 17 0 Antenne Antenna Relay DISABLED Sign intervat 60 mn Startup On Last Active Charret DISABLED v Startup Channel 1 ASTRO Fade Tolerance 3FRAMES v PASTRO RDLAP Repeat DISABLED Out Delay 0 sec ASTRO Tx Fiter ANALOG Simuicast Reverse Burst INTERNAL Conventional ASTRO Figure 3 26 RF Configuration Screen Conventional Stations Max Deviation 92 Low Speed Deviation 170 ASTRO Fade Tolerance 3FRAMES v IntelliRepeater Analog Deviation 9 Arteren Reiny 20 msec Low Speed Devisbon 17 0 Rx Carrier Detect Fade Timer 80 msec ASTRO Fade Tolerance FRAMES v IntelliRepeater ASTRO Figure 3 27 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 Sign interval 60 mn Startup On
385. ure 4 5 Analog Voting Screen Table 4 4 Analog Voting Screen Data Fields PROGRAMMING THE COMPARATOR fe Recommended Data Field Description Range Selections Default dme P 9 Setting if any Analog Voting Provides for greater accuracy in determining the 5 to 10 000 msec 50 msec System dependent Sample Period noise content of a signal by increasing the interval of time over which the analog signal quality is averaged Analog First Vote Prevents infrastructure induced transients at the 5 to 10 000 msec 40 msec System dependent Settle Time beginning of a call from degrading the initial voting decisions for each PTT Vote and Hold Specifies the state of the analog vote and hold Enabled Disabled System dependent Operation feature Disabled First Vote Hold Ensures that the voted port does not switch for a 5 to 10 000 msec 250 msec System dependent Time fixed amount of time after it is selected as the voted port for the first time Voting Hold Time Ensures that the voted port does not switch for a 5 to 10 000 msec 250 msec System dependent fixed amount of time after it is selected as the voted port Analog Signal Specifies the amount of time a signal must be of 5 to 10 000 msec 150 msec System dependent Quality Debounce higher quality than the current voted port before it Time is eligible to be routed as the voted port Analog Line Ensures that any transient on a port during the 5 to 10 000 msec 20 msec System dependent
386. ure 6 5 Reference Modulation Compensation Alignment Setup 2 Setthe R2001 communications analyzer as follows Frequency Tx frequency of station Display Set to read modulation Bandwidth Narrow 3 Click Alignment in the navigation pane then the Reference Modulation Compensation tab The following Reference Modulation Compensation screen appears 6 14 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL ALIGNING REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION PROCEDURE Reference Oscillator TX Deviation Power Output RSSI Calibration sine Cine TX Wireline ca t Pattern TDATA Calibration Reference Modulation Compensation Battery Equalization B Squelch Adjust RX Wireline line 2 STATION CURRENTLY NOT KEYED Jj i Current Frequency 0 000000 MHz Keyup the station and observe the recovered audio waveform Use the Right Left Arrow Buttons to adjust Reference Modulation until the observed squarewave s horizontal portions are as near to a straight line as possible sloped straight line OK When done press SAVE button after a REF MOD alignment is completed to save that alignment ALIGN REF MOD1 ALIGN REF MOD2 SAVE DEKE ren Station Note Station is Currently ACCESS DISABLED Station Status Not Keyed 4 Click ALIGN REF MODI To avoid overloading the analyzer s RF input the station automatically limits its power output to either one half power or approximately 100 W whichever i
387. using the previous value 57 mm If you experiment with a parameter value without intending to permanently change the value stored in the station do not click Save and reset the station to restore the original parameter value s Required Test Equipment The following test equipment is required for optimization Motorola R2001 communications analyzer or equivalent Motorola R2600 communications analyzer or equivalent Motorola R2650 ASTRO communications analyzer or equivalent RX and TX Wireline Alignment The station may be equipped with a 4 wire or 8 wire wireline interface board Depending on the system application and the specific wireline board the following wireline circuit configurations are supported 2 wire half duplex 4 wire half duplex 4 wire full duplex 6 wire full duplex 8 wire full duplex Alignment of the receive Rx and transmit Tx circuits is required depending on the system application wireline circuit configuration and whether equalization is required or desired Use Table 3 20 Table 3 21 and Table 3 22 to determine the Rx and Tx lines that require alignment and or equalization and the specific alignment procedure s to perform The following examples show you how to use the tables Example 1 For a station programmed for 4 wire operation ALC disabled and not in a voting system Table 3 20 shows that Line 1 requires alignment procedure E and Line 2 requires alignment procedur
388. usly unreported status messages added to the end of the list The station stores up to 128 status messages in the log Subsequent status messages overwrite the oldest status messages in the log on a first in first out basis If the number of messages exceed that which can be displayed a scroll bar is provided on the right side of the screen See Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 for examples The status screens provide information that can be used during troubleshooting along with performing the troubleshooting procedures located in the equipment service manual 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 5 3 STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND STATUS Software Download ID O000041E1E9E Station Name BOSTON_FIRE_ 3 Device Date Time 1900 01 01 02 15 21 Serial Number 448CAX0252 Station Control PA R020 12 034 Station Wireline FW R020 12 008 Station Exciter PA RO20 09 010 Codeplug Version 12 First Occurrence Last Occurrence Count Message 1900 01 01 00 00 00 1900 01 101 00 00 00 H SC ROOT 665 SYS_RESET 1 1900 01 01 00 00 07 1900 01 01 00 00 07 1 SC EXECUTE_STARTUP_DIAGS 156 DIAG_FAILED PS_BAT_CHR_ Figure 5 2 Station Status Report Screen Example 5 4 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL STATION COMPARATOR STATUS MESSAGES Software Download ID 000002 3186 Serial Number Device Date Time 2005 12 06 10 36 05 AstroTAC Wireline FW VL R03 07 003 AstroTAC Control FW R03 0
389. wr PC509F02N000012008 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC_020_12_034 SCM SCML IR 020 12 529 R12 05 00 R12 05 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 12 008 573 0 P651 SIMM 0180706 51 WL WL_020_12_008 App Sftw PC509F10300012034 2 020 10 022 and App Sftwr 509 104000012529 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 WL SZ4 1 AppSttwr 509 02 000012008 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009017 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509F02N000012008 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM SC 020 12 047 SCM SCML IR 020 12 535 R12 06 00 R12 06 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 12 011 523 0 P651 0180706 51 WL WL 020 12 011 App Sftwr 509 10300012047 Boot B2 020 10 022 and App Sftwr 509 104000012535 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000010022 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 WL SZ4 1 AppSttwr 509 02 000012011 U134 PC5095204000010816 EXC PC509E02M000009017 U135 PC5095104000010816 App Sftwr PC509F02N000012011 EXC PC509E02M000009017 SCM SCM 5 020 12 071 SCM SCML IR_020_12_541 R12 07 00 R12 07 P651 SIMM 0180706F52 WL WL 020 12 028 573 0 P651 SIMM 0180706F51 WL WL 020 12 011 App Sftwr 509 10300012071 Boot 2 020 12 006 and App Sftwr 509 104000012541 Boot 2 020 10 022 Boot2 PC5091002000012006 EXC 020 09 017 Boot2 PC509F 104000010022 EXC 020 09 017 WL SZ4 1
390. y Quantar R1 R2 25 W R1 R2 110 W 5 10 MHz External Reference R3 110 W 100 W UHSO Quantar 900 MHz Full Sub Band Partition requires optional hardware Quantro350 W VHF R1 and R2 800 MHz Rebanding SMARTZONE SMARTZONE SMARTZONE ASTRO INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING INTELLIREPEATER TRUNKING WIDE AREA ANALOG WIDE AREA SECURENET WIDE AREA ASTRO X999 X998 X990 Figure 7 39 Release 14 00 00 Features and System Capabilities IntelliRepeater SmartZone 2 0 3 Trunking 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 7 55 FEATURES AND SYSTEM CAPABILITIES CHAPTER 7 VERSION COMPATIBILITY AND UPGRADES THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 7 56 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 CHAPTER Password Protection QUANTAR and Quantro stations are equipped with a password protection feature that limits RSS access to the station by unauthorized personnel Stations that are password protected prohibit any RSS action requiring communications with the station until the station password is entered How Password Protection Works On a station with password protection activated any attempted RSS action that requires communication with the station such as reading the station codeplug results in a password popup that prompts you to enter the station password When the correct password is entered the current RSS session may proceed until the session is terminated by the user or until the station is reset The next RSS session require
391. y RF Configuration 0010900000506 6 e Reference Oscillator Frequency saa u 2 i Meter Status Test A Status _ The station will automatically be put ito Access Disable mode A station reset will be required Lo return station to Access Enabled Do you wank to continue 7 71 amm 5 Click Yes to continue 3 88 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT 17 mm 6 When the alignment procedures are completed deactivate Access Disable and restore the station to normal operation by performing a station reset The Reference Oscillator Alignment screen appears iverne Retererce Modulalion R W ire 2 Reference Ovcilator E Power B Reference Oscillator Frequency Frequency 0539125 MHZ AUTO NET 5 MH AUTONET 10 MHZ thote Station Currertty ACCESS Aston Not Keyed Click the TDATA Calibration tab The TDATA Calibration screen appears 3 89 PERFORMING STATION ALIGNMENT CHAPTER 3 OPTIMIZATION 7 Follow the instructions on the screen Note that the low speed deviation shown as 850 Hz above is determined by the setting of the low speed deviation data field on the RF Configuration screen ASTRO Bit Error Rate Report
392. y U134 5191013H14 U134 5191013H12 U135 5191013H13 U135 5191013H11 EXC EXC U3701 5191012H98 U3701 5191012168 5 SCM 013 02 015 5 IR 10 26 R2 00 R2 00 U653 5191020047 WL B013 02 007 572 3 0653 5191022005 WLB 013 02 007 0654 519102048 EXC 013 02 004 U654 519102206 EXC 013 02 004 WL WL U134 5191013H18 U134 5191013H18 U135 5191013H17 U135 5191013H17 EXC EXC U3701 5191012L71 U3701 5191012171 5 SCM 013 03 007 5 IR 11 69 R3 00 R3 00 U653 5191020049 WL B013 03 003 572 7 U653 5191022 11 WL 013 03 007 0654 519102050 EXC 013 03 003 U654 5191022C12 EXC 013 03 006 WL WL U134 5191013H20 U134 5191013H22 U135 5191013H19 U135 5191013H21 EXC EXC U3701 5181012173 U3701 5191012172 5 SCM 013 03 013 R3 01 R3 01 U653 5191020C51 WL B013 03 007 U654 5191020052 013 03 006 WL U134 5191013H22 U135 5191013H21 EXC U3701 5191012L73 SCM SCM B013 04 007 R4 00 R401 U653 5191022C13 WL B013 04 004 U654 5191022C14 EXC B013 04 004 WL U134 5191013H26 U135 5191013H25 EXC U3701 5191012175 SCM IR 11 69 R5 00 R5 01 SZ2 TE U653 5191022 11 WL B013 03 007 0654 5191022012 EXC 013 03 006 WL U134 5191013H22 U135 5191013H21 EXC U3701 5181012L73 Notes 1 There is no further development for these control boards 2 The firmware versions may be displayed by selecting Status Report from the Service menu Exciter firmware version numbers Conventional 6809 Trunking are not d
393. zation was successful and that the device operates properly Post Optimization Checkout on page 3 93 Required Test Equipment The following equipment is required to perform optimization The RSS computer Communications Analyzer Motorola R2001 or equivalent for non ASTRO systems Communications Analyzer Motorola R2500 or equivalent for ASTRO systems 6881085E35 AG 12 30 2006 RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL VERIFYING THE DEVICE S CONFIGURATION DATA Verifying the Device s Configuration Data Each device ships from Motorola s factory with a codeplug that has been custom programmed based on information on the sales order A portion of the device codeplug data includes definitions of the device hardware configuration including serial number ID types of modules installed and system and modulation type It is recommended that you use the RSS to view this data to ensure it agrees with the equipment you are currently optimizing Also verify that the equipment configuration agrees with the vend ticket shipped with the equipment To access the connected device s current configuration data perform the following procedure 1 Click the sign on the Configuration node in the navigation pane to expand the Configuration branch uu Ss BH gt M Base Radio 3 3 Configuration Hardware MS Wireline Configurati Access Code Table Channel Information TRC Command Table RF Configuration

Quantar RSS Instruction Manual 6881085E35-AG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents